laminex product catalogue

Product Catalogue

The Laminex Group Product Catalogue

Today,The Laminex Group is uniquely placed to provide you withinnovative solutions to all kinds of decorative surface, building anddesign environments, both commercial and residential.

The Laminex Group brandportfolio offers the mostextensive range of panels,decorative laminates,premium surfaces andaccessories.This includeshigh and low pressurelaminates, cabinet doorsand edgings, a range ofTrade Essential items inpanel products andadhesives, laminatedflooring, essa stone, solidsurfacing and compactlaminate products. Providingthe most comprehensiveand technically advancedrange available.

All products are expertlymanufactured to the highestquality standards possible.This enables you to find theoptimal answer to thetrickiest problem that mucheasier.

The Laminex Group can alsooffer environmentallypreferable products throughthe Greenfirst range, withproducts being certified byGood Environmental ChoiceAustralia.

Just as important is the factthat The Laminex Group hasbranches spread all overAustralia; and together witha network of authoriseddistributors, provideshopfitters, cabinetmakers,builders and specifiersimmediate access to ourportfolio of products.

It’s a comforting thought giventhe tight project deadlines youoften have to work to.

This user-friendly catalogueof products from TheLaminex Group, and theirmany applications, isdesigned to make it easierfor you to use the rightproduct, allowing you toperform your job and solveyour problems creatively andprofessionally, so you can beconfident of achieving thebest result.This cataloguegroups together all productsby brand, eg. Laminex,Formica, essa stone,TradeEssentials.

It provides an easy-to-understand reference guideto the various attributes andpotential uses.

And it accurately outlines allthe technical information yourequire to make the correctproduct specification and/orfollow the appropriateinstallation procedures.

The Laminex Group is totallycommitted to providing youwith the very best technicaland problem solving supportpossible including an expertsales and technical supportteam that you can call on atany time for professionaladvice and assistance.

For a prompt response toany query you may have,contact your representativedirectly or alternatively callThe Laminex Group on132 136.

INDEX

Issued September 2009

Section 1Laminex Product CatalogueIntroduction & Index 1

Section 2Product DefinitionsHow they’re made 2.1Construction Options 2.2Ready Reference 2.3

Section 3Greenfirst - Environmentally Preferable Products 3.1

Section 420-20 Design Software 4.1

Section 5Laminex Technical Data Laminex Fire Retardant Laminate 5.1Laminex Squareform Benchtops 5.2Laminex Redback Laminate 5.3Laminex Chemical Resistant Laminate 5.4Laminex Metallics 5.5Laminex Aquapanel 5.6Laminex Structural MR 5.7Laminex Stainless Steel 5.8Laminex DiamondGloss Surfaces 5.9Laminex Fusion Surfaces 5.10Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Vertiboard 5.12Laminex Vertiboard MR 5.13Laminex Lamiwood MR 5.14Laminex Decorwood 5.15Laminex Finished Designed Timber Veneers 5.16Laminex Timber Veneers 5.17Laminex Freestyle 12mm Surfaces 5.18Laminex Freestyle 30mm Surfaces 5.19Laminex ColourTech Doors 5.20Laminex Contour Doors 5.21Laminex Contour Finedge Doors 5.22Laminex Timber Doors 5.23Laminex Timber Veneer Doors 5.24Laminex Vinyl Doors 5.25Laminex CrystalGloss Doors and Panels 5.26Laminex Surround Coated Doors and Panels 5.27Laminex Partitioning Systems 5.28Laminex Handles 5.29Laminex Thin Melamine Unglued Edging 5.30Laminex Thin Melamine Preglued Edging 5.31Laminex ABS Edging 5.32Laminex Wall Systems Adhesive 5.33Laminex Wall Systems Silicone 5.34

Section 6Formica Technical Data Formica Decorative Laminate 6.1Formica Liner Grade Laminate 6.2Formica Chemtop 2 Laminate 6.3Formica Metals Laminate 6.4Formica Decorated MDF 6.5Formica Decorated MR MDF 6.6Formica Decorated Particleboard 6.7Formica Decorated Particleboard MR 6.8Formica ABS Edging 6.9Formica Melamine Preglued Edging 6.10Formica Melamine Unglued Edging 6.11Formica Doors 6.12Formica Laminate Flooring 6.13

Section 7Essa Technical DataEssa Stone 7.1

Section 8Trade Essentials Technical DataTrade Essentials Craftwood 8.1Trade Essentials Craftwood MR 8.2Trade Essentials Craftwood (Thin) 8.3Trade Essentials Craftform 8.4Trade Essentials White MDF 8.5Trade Essentials Particleboard 8.6Trade Essentials Particleboard MR 8.7Trade Essentials Aquaban 8.8Trade Essentials Whiteboard 8.9Trade Essentials Particleboard Flooring 8.10

Section 8Trade Essentials AdhesivesTrade Essentials Adhesives Guide 8.11Brushable Contact Adhesive 8.12Sprayable Contact Adhesive 8.13Contact Adhesive Thinner 8.14Adhesive Cleaner 8.15ABS Edge Strip Cleaner 8.16Particleboard Flooring Adhesive 8.17Wet Area Panelling Adhesive 8.18General Purpose PVA Adhesive 8.19Cross Linking PVA Adhesive 8.20Craftwood PVA Adhesive 8.21

Section 9AppendicesHandling & Product Application Guidelines 9.1Laminate Products - General Care & Maintenance 9.2Board Products - Handling & Product Application Guidelines 9.3Safety & Usage Recommendations for Contact Adhesives 9.4Safety & Usage Recommendations for PVA &Water Based Adhesives 9.5Sheet Size & Thickness Availability 9.6

Ind

ex1

Contents Page

Section 1

HOW THEY’RE MADE

ProductsToday’s wide and varied

range of products from

The Laminex Group are

specially engineered and

manufactured using the very

best in raw materials,

technology and quality

control methods.

Quite often, it’s what you don’t see below the surface that makes a product durable, fire retardant, moisture resistant or impact resistant.

For this reason the following illustrations have been prepared to demonstrate the level of technology and thought that goes intomaking our products among the most trusted and well regarded in the building industry today.

Issued September 2009Section 2:1.1

HOW THEY’RE MADE


Laminex® Redback™

High-pressure laminate

0.7mm thick (nominal)

Post-forming grade/heat formed

Medium impact applications

Horizontal or vertical applications

Pro

du

ct D

efi

nit

ion

s2

Section 2:1.2

Laminex® Aquapanel®


2.7mm thick (nominal)

Wall panelling & wet area wall lining

applications

Laminex® Compact LaminateHigh-pressure laminate

2 - 20mm thick

Double-sided

– balanced construction

High-impact applications

Use for partitioning, institutional

furniture, toilet and shower partitions,

window sills, furniture, table & desk tops

Laminex Decorwood®, Lamiwood MR®

& Formica Decorated MDF

Pre-finished decorated Craftwood®

panel (standard grade or moisture

resistant)

Vertical application

Low impact applications

Use as cupboard doors, panels,

carcasses, furniture and wall panelling

Available in most Laminex colours,

patterns and woodgrains, and also in

Formica decors

HOW THEY’RE MADE


IMPORTANT NOTEA slight variation exists between the finishes onLaminex melamine faced board products (LamiwoodMR, Decorwood,Vertiboard,Vertiboard MR, Structuraland Contour Doors) and the Laminex high-pressurelaminate products.This also applies with Formicamelamine faced board products (e.g. Decorated Board)and Formica high pressure laminate products.

Section 2:1.3

Laminex Vertiboard®, Vertiboard MR®

& Formica Decorated Particleboard

Pre-finished decorated

particleboard (standard or

moisture resistant)

Low impact applications

Used for carcasses and

furniture applications

Available in Laminex and Formica décors

IMPORTANT NOTEA slight variation exists between the finishes onLaminex melamine faced board products (LamiwoodMR, Decorwood,Vertiboard,Vertiboard MR, Structuraland Contour Doors) and the Laminex high-pressurelaminate products.This also applies with Formicamelamine faced board products (e.g. Decorated Board)and Formica high pressure laminate products.

HOW THEY’RE MADE


Pro

du

ct D

efi

nit

ion

s2

Section 2:1.4

Laminex Structural MR™

Pre-finished decorated Particleboard MR

with special underlay paper for higher

impact resistance

Use in office desks, counters, computer

floors, etc.

Available in most colours and thicknesses

Suitable for horizontal or vertical

applications

Made to order

IMPORTANT NOTEA slight variation exists between the finishes onLaminex melamine faced board products (LamiwoodMR, Decorwood,Vertiboard,Vertiboard MR, Structuraland Contour Doors) and the Laminex high-pressurelaminate products.

Fusion® Surfaces


1.0 - 13.0mm thick (nominal)

Interior horizontal and vertical applications

Grafitti and chemical resistant properties

Fusion surfaces available in Wet Area Panelling (2.7mm nominal),Sign Grade (3.0mm nominal) and Solid Grade (6.0 & 13.0mm nominal).

Resin impregnated kraft paper.

Thicker laminates have more

kraft paper layers

Transparent, melamine

resin impregnated

surface overlay

Image, layer. Digitally printed

onto specially developed paper

Resin impregnated

solid colour underlay

CONSTRUCTION OPTIONS

Benchtops and DoorsThe following illustrations

show the wide variety of

product combinations from

The Laminex Group which

can be specified for creating

benchtops, table tops,

cupboard doors and other

internal joinery and

furniture.

This is designed as a guide only and does not represent every potential combination.

By combining the right products, project solutions can be developed for applications ranging from laboratory benchtops to highlydecorative reception desks and kitchen cupboard doors to high abuse toilet partition doors.

The Laminex Group Product Ready Reference and detailed product information will help provide the correct path to specifyingthe product that is exactly right for your project.




Laminate Benchtops / DesktopsSurface Options

Laminex Redback

Fusion Laminate

Laminex Chemical Resistant Redback

Laminex DiamondGloss

Laminex Squareform

Formica Laminate

Freestyle

Essa Stone

Applications

Kitchen/bathroom/work surface

benchtops

Substrates

Trade Essentials Particleboard MR

Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF MR

Surface Options

Laminex Redback

Fusion Laminate


Formica Laminate

Applications

Kitchen/bathroom/work surface

benchtops

Substrates



Surface Options

Laminex Structural MR

Applications

Desk tops

Office workstations/furniture

Pro

du

ct D

efi

nit

ion

s2

Section 2:2.2

Surface Options

Laminex Redback & DiamondGloss Laminate


Formica Laminate

Applications

Kitchen/bathroom/laboratory/work

surface benchtops

Substrates





Laminate Benchtops / Desktops

Surface Options

Laminex Redback & DiamondGloss Laminate

Fusion

Applications

Curved/shaped benchtops

Square edged benchtops

Substrates



Surface Options

Laminex Multipurpose Compact

Laminates and Laboratory Compact

Laminates are self supporting compact

laminates.They have an integrated

decorative surface

Applications:

Laboratory Compact Laminates:

biological, chemical and educational

laboratories benchtops

Laminex Multipurpose Compact

Laminates: office furniture, laboratory,

educational benchtops

Section 2:2.3



Premium Sufaces Benchtop/Desktops

Pro

du

ct D

efi

nit

ion

s2

Surface Options

essa stone Quartz surfaces, 20mm &

30mm options

Applications:

Kitchen benchtops

Bathroom worktops

Interior cladding

Kitchen splashbacks

Surface Options

Laminex Freestyle Surfaces

Applications:

Suitable for interior surfaces or

cladding applications

Kitchen benchtops & sinks

Bathroom worktops & laundries

Furniture shop fittings

Section 2:2.4

Reconstituted Stone

Solid Surface



Laminate & VinylDoors, Cupboards & ShelvingProducts

Laminex Lamiwood MR (Lamiwoodis available in all Laminex palettecolours, patterns and woodgrains) Formica Decorated BoardContour Doors

Formica Rolled Edge DoorsFinished Designed Timber VeneerDoorsLaminex & Formica Square EdgedDoors

ProductsTimber Veneer Panels

ApplicationsCupboard doors, furniture etc.

ProductsLaminex Colourtech Doors

ApplicationsCupboard DoorsEnd Panels

ProductsLaminex Vinyl Doors

ApplicationsCupboard DoorsEnd Panels

FormicaColorPanel

ApplicationsCupboard doors, shelving, carcasses for kitchens, bathrooms, tea rooms, libraries, office furniture etc.

Laminex colours inAdvanced 2 PacPolyurethane paint

Laminex decorsin vacuumpressed vinyl

READY REFERENCE


Ready Reference

Pro

du

ct D

efi

nit

ion

s2

How to use this Ready Reference

This Ready Reference is designed to give you a quick overview of the multitude

of applications for The Laminex Group decorative surfacing and building products.

To use the Ready Reference:

1. Identify the general area of the application for which you require a decorative

surface or building product.

2. Select the specific usage requirement you have from within this

application area.

3. For detailed information on The Laminex Group product(s) which will fulfil

your requirements, refer to the page number in the far right hand column.

For ease of reference, these are colour coded to reflect the product categories

in this catalogue.

Colour Codings Section

Laminate Products 5

Formica 6

Essa Stone 7

Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF Products 8

Trade Essentials Particleboard Products 8

Trade EssentialsAdhesives Products 8

Benchtops Flooring Formica Laminate Flooring 6.1Bar Tops Laminex Squareform Benchtops 5.2

Laminex Redback 5.3Laminex Chemical Resistant Laminate 5.4Laminex Fusion Surfaces 5.10Laminex DiamondGloss Surfaces 5.9Laminex Stainless Steel 5.8Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Freestyle 30mm Surfaces 5.19Formica Decorative Laminate 6.1Essa Stone 7.1Trade Essentials Aquaban 8.8

Check outs Laminex Fusion Surfaces 5.10Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11

Domestic Laminex Squareform Benchtops 5.2Kitchens Laminex DiamondGloss Surfaces 5.9

Laminex Redback 5.3Laminex Stainless Steel 5.8Laminex Freestyle 30mm Surfaces 5.19Formica Decorative Laminate 6.1Formica Decorated MR MDF 6.6Formica Decorated Particleboard MR 6.8Formica Doors 6.12Essa Stone 7.1Trade Essentials Particleboard MR 8.7Trade Essentials Aquaban 8.8

Laboratory Laminex Chemical Resistant Laminate 5.4Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Freestyle 30mm Surfaces 5.19Formica Chemtop 2 Laminate 6.3Trade Essentials Aquaban 8.8

Area of Application Specific Use Product Section

Section 2:3.1

READY REFERENCE


Ready Reference

Benchtops cont’d Post-formed Laminex Squareform Benchtops 5.2Laminex DiamondGloss Surfaces 5.9Laminex Redback 5.3Formica Decorative Laminate 6.1

High Wear Repetitive Laminex Chemical Resistant Laminate 5.4Reception Laminex Squareform Benchtops 5.2

Laminex Redback 5.3Laminex DiamondGloss Surfaces 5.9Laminex Fusion Surfaces 5.10Laminex Stainless Steel 5.8Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Freestyle 30mm Surfaces 5.19Formica Decorative Laminate 6.1Formica ABS Edging 6.9Formica Melamine Preglued Edging 6.10Formica Melamine Unglued edging 6.11Essa Stone 7.1Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF 8.1Trade Essentials Craftwood (Thin) 8.3Trade Essentials Particleboard 8.6

Vanity Laminex Squareform Benchtops 5.2Laminex Redback 5.3Laminex DiamondGloss Surfaces 5.9Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Freestyle 30mm Surfaces 5.19Formica Decorative Laminate 6.1Formica Decorated MR MDF 6.6Trade Essentials Particleboard MR 8.7

Doors Cupboards Laminex Lamiwood MR 5.14Laminex Finished Designed Timber Veneer Doors 5.16Laminex Structural MR 5.7Laminex ColourTech Doors 5.20Laminex Contour Doors 5.21Laminex Timber Doors 5.23Laminex Timber Veneer Doors 5.24Laminex Vinyl Doors 5.25Formica Liner Grade Laminate 6.2Formica Metals Laminate 6.4Formica Decorated MR MDF 6.6Formica ABS Edging 6.9Formica Melamine Preglued Edging 6.10Formica Melamine Unglued Edging 6.11Formica Doors 6.12Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF 8.1Trade Essentials Craftwood MR MDF 8.2Trade Essentials Particleboard 8.6Trade Essentials Particleboard MR 8.7Trade Essentials Whiteboard 8.9


READY REFERENCE

Ready Reference

Pro

du

ct D

efi

nit

ion

s2


Section 2:3.3

Doors cont’d Decorated Laminex Lamiwood MR 5.14Laminex Structural MR 5.7Laminex ColourTech Doors 5.20Laminex Contour Doors 5.21

Curved Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF 8.1Trade Essentials Craftwood (Thin) 8.3Trade Essentials Craftform 8.4Trade Essentials Particleboard 8.6

Fire Retardant Laminex Fire Retardant Laminate 5.1Handles Laminex Handles 5.29

Built-In Shelving Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Furniture Wall Units Laminex Lamiwood MR 5.14

Laminex Timber Veneer 5.17Laminex Structural MR 5.7Formica Liner Grade Laminate 6.2Formica Metals Laminate 6.4Formica Decorated MDF 6.5Formica Decorated Particleboard 6.7Formica Decorated Particleboard MR 6.8Formica Doors 6.12Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF 8.1Trade Essentials Craftwood MR MDF 8.2Trade Essentials Craftwood (Thin) 8.3Trade Essentials White MDF 8.5Trade Essentials Particleboard 8.6Trade Essentials Particleboard MR 8.7Trade Essentials Whiteboard 8.9

Cupboards Laminex Lamiwood MR 5.14Laminex Decorwood 5.15Laminex Timber Veneer 5.17Laminex Vertiboard 5.12Laminex Vertiboard MR 5.13Formica Decorated MR MDF 6.6Formica Decorated Particleboard 6.7

Fire Retardant Laminex Fire Retardant Laminate 5.1

Furniture Painted Finish Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11High Abuse Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF 8.1

Trade Essentials Craftwood (Thin) 8.3Trade Essentials Particleboard 8.6

Schools/Institutions Laminex Fire Retardant Laminate 5.1Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Vertiboard MR 5.13Laminex Structural MR 5.7Formica Liner Grade Laminate 6.2Formica Decorated MDF 6.5Formica Decorated Particleboard 6.7Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF 8.1Trade Essentials Craftwood MR MDF 8.2Trade Essentials Particleboard 8.6


READY REFERENCE


Ready Reference

Fire Retardant Laminex Fire Retardant Laminate 5.1Speaker Boxes Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF 8.1

Trade Essentials Craftwood (Thin) 8.3Trade Essentials Particleboard 8.6

Laboratory Laminex Chemical Resistant Redback 5.4Laminex Laboratory Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Freestyle 30mm Surfaces 5.19Formica Chemtop 2 Laminates 6.3Trade Essential Aquaban 8.8

Partitions Toilet Laminex Aquapanel 5.6Laminex Fusion Surfaces 5.10Laminex Timber Veneer 5.17Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Structural MR 5.7Laminex Partitioning Systems 5.28

Shower Laminex Aquapanel 5.6Laminex Fusion Surfaces 5.10Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Partitioning Systems 5.28

Office (Various) Laminex Aquapanel 5.6Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Timber Veneer 5.17Laminex Lamiwood MR 5.14Laminex Decorwood 5.15Laminex Partitioning Systems 5.28

Change Rooms Laminex Aquapanel 5.6Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Structural MR 5.7Laminex Partitioning Systems 5.28Formica Metals Laminate 6.4Formica Decorated Particleboard MR 6.8

Decorative Vertical Residential & Commercial Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Panels Laminex Partitioning Systems 5.28

Wall Cladding Shower Walls Laminex Aquapanel 5.6(Wet Areas) Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11

Laminex Partitioning Systems 5.28(Dependent upon Essa Stone 7.1BCA ‘Deemed To Laundry & Bathroom Laminex Aquapanel 5.6Satisfy’ fire provisions) Splashbacks Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11

Laminex Freestyle 30mm Surfaces 5.19


Ready Reference

Wall Cladding Laundry & Bathroom Formica Decorated MR MDF 6.6(Wet Area con’td) Splashbacks Formica Decorated Particleboard MR 6.8

Essa Stone 7.1Trade Essentials White MDF 8.5

Shower Partitions Laminex Aquapanel 5.6Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Partitioning Systems 5.28

Wall Cladding High Impact Decorative Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11(Dry Areas) Laminex Lamiwood MR 5.14

Laminex Vertiboard MR 5.13(Dependent upon Laminex Structural MR 5.7BCA ‘Deemed To Formica Metals Laminate 6.4Satisfy’ fire provisions) Formica Decorated MDF 6.5

Formica Decorated MR MDF 6.6Formica Decorated Particleboard 6.7Formica Decorated Particleboard MR 6.8Trade Essentials White MDF 8.5Trade Essentials Whiteboard 8.9

Caravans Laminex Aquapanel 5.6Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11Laminex Lamiwood MR 5.14

Wall Cladding Lift Car Linings Laminex Redback* 5.3(Fire Retardant) Formica Decorative Laminate* 6.1(Dependent upon Laminex Fire Retardant Laminate* 5.1BCA ‘Deemed To Laminex Fusion* Surfaces 5.10Satisfy’ fire provisions) Laminex Metallics 5.5

Wall Cladding Shipping Laminex Fire Retardant Laminate 5.1Laminex Aquapanel 5.6Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11

(Dependent upon Rail Cars Laminex Fire Retardant Laminate 5.1BCA ‘Deemed To Laminex Aquapanel 5.6Satisfy’ fire provisions) Tram Cars Laminex Aquapanel 5.6

Bus Linings Laminex Aquapanel 5.6Corridors Laminex Fire Retardant Laminate 5.1

Laminex Compact Laminates 5.11


READY REFERENCE


Pro

du

ct D

efi

nit

ion

s2

Section 2:3.5

* Complete laminate substrate construction must comply to BCA Requirements Specification C1.10a - Lift cars for walls and ceiling linings.

Note: For all product specifications it is the responsibility of the specifier to confirm specific requirements consistent with Building Code of Australia and anyappropriate local building regulations.

READY REFERENCE


Ready Reference

Column Square Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF 8.1Cladding Round Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF 8.1

Window Sills Computer Laminex Structural MR 5.7Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF 8.1

Ceilings Decorated Laminex Aquapanel 5.6Laminex Timber Veneer 5.17Laminex Metallics Laminate 5.5Laminex Fusion Surfaces 5.10

Acoustic Trade Essentials Craftwood MR MDF 8.2Curved Trade Essentials Craftwood (Thin) 8.3

Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF 8.1Trade Essentials Craftwood MR MDF 8.2

Fire Retardant Laminex Fire Retardant Laminate 5.1

Signage Murals Laminex Fusion Surfaces 5.10Logos Laminex Fusion Surfaces 5.10

Mouldings,Trims Shower Laminex Aquapanel 5.6and Edging Edgings Laminex Thin Melamine Pre-glued Edging 5.31

Laminex Thin Melamine Unglued Edging 5.30Laminex ABS Edging 5.32Formica ABS Edging 6.9Formica Melamine Preglued Edging 6.10Formica Melamine Unglued Edging 6.11

Adhesives Craftwood® Trade Essentials Craftwood PVA Adhesive 8.21Decorative Boards to Trade Essentials General Purpose PVA 8.19Particleboard or Timber Trade Essentials Cross Linking PVA Adhesive 8.20Timber Joinery Trade Essentials Sprayable Contact Adhesive 8.13Contact (Laminate) Trade Essentials Brushable Contact Adhesive 8.12Solvent Trade Essentials Contact Adhesive Thinner 8.14Particleboard Flooring Trade Essentials Particleboard Flooring Adhesive 8.17Wet Area Panelling Trade Essentials Wet Area Panelling Adhesive 8.18

Sealant Adhesive/Sealant Trade Essentials Adhesives 8.11LaminexWall Systems Adhesive 5.33

Laminex Wall Systems Silicone 5.34

Cleaner Rubber Based Adhesives Trade Essentials Adhesive Cleaner 8.15Edge Strip Trade Essentials ABS Edge Strip Cleaner 8.16


Section 3

ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS

Issued September 2009Section 3: 1.1

The Laminex Group hasalways been at the forefront ofdesign and innovation forinterior surfaces.TheGreenfirst initiative takesinnovation a step further byproviding you with a range ofproducts that also deliverenvironmental advantages.

Scientifically based, internationallyrecognised eco-labelling programs haveindependently appraised our Greenfirst™

products. All Greenfirst products havebeen verified and certified by GoodEnvironmental Choice Australia (GECA).

The Laminex Group is the firstmanufacturer of composite wood panelsand laminates to receive the GoodEnvironmental Choice label certification –this label is the only Australianenvironmental labelling program whichindicates the environmental performance ofa product from a multi-criteria and wholeof life product perspective.The GoodEnvironmental Choice label defines certifiedproducts as environmentally preferable.

Products in the Greenfirst range offer noloss in design flexibility and productfunctionality and make it simple toidentify products that contribute towardsthe achievement of Green Star credits.

The Laminex Group has Green StarAccredited Professionals throughoutAustralia to assist with product selectionand the provision of information foryour next Green Star project.

The Greenfirst range is now so extensiveit can satisfy almost every type of interiorspace: aesthetically superior, commerciallyviable and environmentally responsible.

WOOD FIBRE SOURCESThe wood fibre for our Australian madeMDF and particleboard comes fromgovernment and private plantations thatfollow sustainable forest managementpractices.A significant proportion of pre-consumer recycled and reclaimed woodfibre is used in the production of compositewood panels, giving these products a high‘eco-preferred’ content.The vast majority offibre for our products comes from foreststhat are part of the international frameworkof certification schemes.This includes ForestStewardship Council (FSC),AustralianForestry Standard (AFS) and Programmefor the Endorsement of Forest CertificationSchemes (PEFC).

PAPER SOURCESDecorating papers are sourced fromsuppliers in Europe, Asia and the USA –with suppliers using wood pulp frommanaged timber plantations.We specifythe use of ECF – Elemental Chlorine Freebleached pulp for decorative papers.

INDOOR AIR QUALITYAll composite wood panels aremanufactured to comply with the lowformaldehyde emission level E1, definedin the Australian Standard AS/NZS 1859.These levels are well below theworkplace exposure limit set by theNational Occupational Health and SafetyCommission.There is also the option ofthe very low formaldehyde emission

level E0 in certain product offers. AllGreenfirst products meet the criteria forformaldehyde within the GECAFurniture and Fittings Standard which isless than or equal to 1.0mg/L.

All Greenfirst products contain lowlevels of Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC’s).

GREEN STAR COMPATIBILITYGreenfirst products can contributetowards the achievement of Green Starcredits. Green Star is a suite of ratingtools created by the Green BuildingCouncil of Australia to evaluate theenvironmental design and performanceof buildings.The two important GreenStar environmental impact categories forGreenfirst products are IndoorEnvironment Quality (IEQ) and Materials.

The table following outlines all theGreenfirst products from The LaminexGroup, including applications, productscertified by GECA and also the GreenStar criteria, to which Greenfirstproducts can help achieve credits.

LA-2008GECA 28-2006–

Furniture and Fittings


Tech

nic

al

Data

: G

reen

firs

t3

ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERABLE PRODUCTS

Section 3: 1.2

Gre

en S

tar

- O

ffic

e In

teri

ors

v1.

1 /

Off

ice

v3 C

om

pat

ibili

ty

Pro

duct

Lam

inex

Ver

tiboa

rd E

0✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

Lam

inex

Dec

orw

ood

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓

Lam

inex

Str

uctu

ral M

R E0

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

Lam

inex

Mel

amin

e Ed

ging

✓✓

✓

Lam

inex

Red

back

HPL

✓

✓N

/A✓

N/A

✓✓

✓✓

Lam

inex

Fus

ion

Surfa

ces

✓✓

N/A

✓N

/A✓

✓✓

✓✓

Lam

inex

Lam

iwoo

d✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

Lam

inex

FSC

™Ti

mbe

r Ven

eer

Pane

ls✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓

Form

ica

Dec

orat

ed M

DF

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓

Form

ica

Lam

inat

e Fl

oorin

g✓

✓✓

✓

Form

ica

Dec

orat

ive

Lam

inat

e✓

✓N

/A✓

N/A

✓✓

✓✓

Trad

e Es

sent

ials

Cra

ftwoo

d M

DF

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

Trad

e Es

sent

ials

Part

icle

boar

d E0

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓

Trad

e Es

sent

ials

Whi

te M

DF

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓

Trad

e Es

sent

ials

Whi

tebo

ard

E0✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

✓✓

Trad

e Es

sent

ials

PVA

Adh

esiv

es

✓✓

✓

N/A

Pro

duct

s m

ade

com

plet

ely

of la

min

ate

are

not

cons

ider

ed t

o be

com

posit

e w

ood

prod

ucts

and

are

the

refo

re n

ot s

ubje

ct t

o th

ese

Gre

en S

tar

cred

it cr

iteria

(as

per

Gre

en B

uild

ing

Cou

ncil

of A

ustr

alia

).

Plea

se n

ote:

This

tabl

e is

corr

ect

as o

f the

tim

e of

prin

ting.

Plea

se c

heck

Pro

duct

Cat

alog

ue o

n w

ebsit

e fo

r m

ost

curr

ent

listin

gs.

Furniture

GECA Certified

MAT-7:Joinery

MAT-11/8:SustainableTimber

IEQ-11/13:Volatile OrganicCompound

IEQ-12/14:FormaldehydeMinimisation

Storage Units

Wall Linings

Shelving

General Joinery

Partitioning

Benchtops

Signage/ Murals

Interior Flooring

Mouldings

Edgings

Adhesives

Section 4


DESIGN SERVICES

20-20 Software Products

Section 4: 1.1

OVERVIEWIT Bureau, a division of Laminex GroupPty Limited, is the licenced distributor of20-20 Technologies products andservices in Australia.

20-20 Technologies is the world’s leadingprovider of computer-aided design, salessoftware, and manufacturing solutionstailored for the interior design industry.This technology offers state-of-the-artmarketing, design, specification, photo-realistic 3D rendering, and managementsoftware for organisations in theresidential and commercial interiormarket.The main office of IT Bureau isbased in Melbourne.

WHAT ARE THE 20-20TECHNOLOGIES PRODUCTSAND SERVICES AVAILABLEFROM IT BUREAU?20-20 Products:• 20-20 Design is a software application

that assists in designing and visualising interior spaces.

• 20-20 Virtual Showroom is a consumer engagement rendering tool that can be tailored to suit specific interior built product offers.

20-20 Technologies software is currentlyused for kitchens and bathrooms, but isexpected to be used for all interiorspaces of the home including: master

bedrooms, walk in wardrobes, and hometheatres. 20-20 Design can allow projectbuilders, cabinet makers, designers andspecifiers to adjust plans quicky andeasily to suit each specific home buyersrequirements. 20-20 Virtual Showroomallows customers to visualise interiorspaces before being purchased or built.

For any enquiries about 20-20Technologies products and servicesplease contact IT Bureau directly.

SERVICESPhone Support• If a customer elects to put their

software purchased from IT Bureau on annual Support and Enhancement (see more details below), they will receive phone support on the applications purchased.This support will include; installation of the application, help with features, help upgrading to a new version, and help installing catalogues.

Customisation• If a customer would like to investigate

a customised application they can call IT Bureau. Common items customized include; catalogues, reports, logos,layouts, and showing/hiding features.Catalogues can be built or customisedto suit specific customer requirements.

Consultation Service• IT Bureau can provide a consultation

service to assist the customer in setting up an application or process towork with any applicationsIT Bureau sells.

This could include; making an application work with the customers accounting software, automating common tasks, and setting up a network install.

Training• IT Bureau provides training on all of

the applications sold.This training can be in a classroom or over the web. A customer can also work with the IT Bureau in creating a customer specific training session.

Catalogue Design• 20-20 Design is based on catalogues

of data.These catalogues include;images of each product, available colours, add-ons to each product, pre-set limitations (example: minium size and maximum size), and pricing for each product.

Tech

nic

al

Data

: D

esig

n S

ervic

es4


DESIGN SERVICES

Section 4: 1.2

WHAT 20-20 SUPPORT &ENHANCEMENT (S&E) OFFERS1. Invaluable advice and assitance by

telephone, email and fax from a dedicated team.The support line is open 9am to 5pm AEST, Monday to Friday. Help offered by this support includes troubleshooting, technical information and general queries about the 20-20 products.The support line does not offer training,but can arrange for a training consultant to contact you to discuss training needs.

2. Support can help you with installing your 20-20 products. Due to the length of time that can be taken by installations, assistance is available by appointment only. If you have broadband, installation assistance can be obtained over a web conference.During a web conference you can have Support remotely install your software with you. Easy-to-follow documentation will be available with each software update.

3. The opportunity to receive invitations to seminars and trade shows across Australia.

4. Regular major software releases are sent out automatically.

5. Access to helpful resources and software service packs will be available on-line through our website.Support can assist with your website account if assistance is required.

6. A periodic newsletter, NewsBYTE,will be sent out to inform customers of updates, interior design trends andnew products and services.The newsletter will also include an FAQ area and a section that will feature the top selections of kitchen,bathroom and office designs submitted by our customers.

7. Access to vendor approved catalogues and updates generic catalogues both on-line and sent out on media periodically.

SYSTEM RECOMMENDATIONS TO OPERATE 20-20 DESIGNPlease contact IT Bureau to confirm if your system will be compatible. 20-20Technologies are currently working towards supporting the latest and upcomingtechnology. As new hardware and operating systems are supported we will notifyyou, with customers on active support (S&E) receiving the corresponding updates.

EXAMPLES OF 20-20 DESIGN OUTPUTS

IT BUREAU CONTACT DETAILSIT Bureaua division of Laminex Group Pty LimitedSuite 12/857 Doncaster RoadDoncaster East VIC 3109

Phone: 1800 653 015Fax: 1800 283 509Website: www.itbureau.com.auEmail Sales: [email protected] Support: [email protected]

Section 5


HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATES

Section 5: 1.1

Laminex® Fire Retardant LaminateLaminex Fire Retardantlaminate is a melamine surfacedhigh-pressure decorativelaminate specifically designed tomeet certain AustralianStandards as outlined below.

APPLICATIONSThe effectiveness and suitability ofLaminex Fire Retardant Laminate mustbe assessed and determined by thecustomer to meet project requirements.

PRODUCT CHARATERISTICSSize: 2400mm x 1200mm

(other sizes subject to enquiry).

Thickness: 1.2mm, 0.8mm (nominal)Weight: 0.8mm: 1kg/m2 approx.

1.2mm: 1.7kg/m2 approx.Finish: Flint.Colours and Refer to current Pattern Range: Product Availability

Chart.

FIRE TESTS(Typically achieved when tested toAS/NZS 1530.3)Indices Result* Range

Ignitability 0 0-20Spread of Flame 0 0-10Heat Evolved 0 0-10Smoke Developed 4 0-10

* Results for 0.8 and 1.2mm laminates. Laminate testedfree standing.

Cone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837(Irradiance of 50kW/m2)Classification Result Unit/RangeGroup Number 1 1-3Average Specific 73.4 m2 / kgExtinction Area

1.2mm Laminate unadhered

Laminex Fire Retardant laminateconforms with AS/NZS 2924.1 for high-pressure decorative laminates.

Note: Laminex Fire Retardant Laminateis adhered on the surfaces of panels; butthe laminate itself has no significanteffect on the fire retardancy of thesubstrate to which it is bonded, so thecore construction selected must itselfgive the required level or fire retardancy

PROPERTIES(AS/NZS 2924.1)PROPERTY REQUIREMENT

Resistance to Initial wear not less Surface Wear: than 150 cycles. Average

wear not less than 350 cycles.

Resistance to No deterioration otherImmersion in than slight loss of gloss.Boiling Water: Gain in weight of not

more than 13.5% (0.8mm).Resistance to No deterioration Dry Heat other than slight loss at 180°C: of gloss and/or colour.Resistance to No deterioration otherSteam: than slight change of

gloss and/or colour.Dimensional Dimensional change Stability: of not more than

0.70% with grain and 1.2% across grain (0.8mm).

Resistance to Reagents Groups 1 Staining: and 2 = No visible

change.

Reagents Groups 3 and 4 = Slight change of colour and/or gloss.

Resistance to Not more than slight Colour Change in colour change in XenonArtificial Light:* arc light (minimum).

6 on Blue Wool ScaleResistance to No deterioration other Cigarette Burns: than moderate change

in gloss and moderate brown staining.

* Laminex Fire Retardant laminate has good colour retention and dimensional stability in normalinterior applications. However, prolonged exposure tosunlight may cause shrinkage and/or some change incolour. Laminex Fire Retardant laminate is therefore notrecommended for external applications or interiorapplications with prolonged exposure to direct sunlight

WHEN SPECIFYINGSurfacing shall be Laminex Fire Retardantlaminate of a nominal thickness of .....mm,as manufactured by The Laminex Group.Colours and/or patterns shall be ..... in .... finish.

SITE WORK NOTESLaminex Fire Retardant can be bonded to a variety of approved fire retardantsubstrates using ResorcinolFormaldehyde or Neoprene adhesivesfor best fire retardant properties.Laminex Fire Retardant is notrecommended for application directly to plaster, plasterboard or concrete.

General Site Work NotesAppendix 1. Handling & Product Application GuidelinesSection 9:1

Laminate Product: Care & MaintenanceAppendix 2. General Care and MaintenanceSection 9:2

Tech

nic

al

Data

: L

am

inex

®B

ran

ded

Pro

du

cts

5



Laminex® Squareform® BenchtopsLaminex Squareform is alaminated bench top producedto a thickness of 39mm andincorporates a square-shapemoulded edge.The radius ofthe moulded edge is 5mmproviding a square look to theprofile. Moisture resistantparticleboard is used to ensuremaximum water resistance.The use of high-pressurelaminate on the surface of thebench top provides ahardwearing and durabledecorative surface.

APPLICATIONSLaminex® Squareform® Benchtops aredesigned for applications such as kitchenworktops, countertops, bathroomvanities and laundry bench tops where adurable decorative surface is required.

PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS

Thickness: 39mmWeight: 25kg / m2

Profile: Square shape, 180 degree rolled edge, 5mm radius moulded top and bottom edges.

Finish: Natural or Flint

Colours & Refer to current

Pattern Range: Squareform™ brochure

The ends of Laminex Squareform Benchtops are not postformed. Colour-matched laminate can be used to capends as required.

FIRE TESTS

(Typically achieved when tested to AS/NZS 1530.3)Indices Result Range



Laminate non-adhered

PROPERTIESLaminex Squareform Benchtops aredecorated using high-pressure laminate.The surface hardness of high-pressurelaminate provides resistance to surfacewear and scratching under normalconditions of use. High-pressurelaminate is adhered to the particleboardsurface using a durable adhesive, whichensures surface bond soundness.The useof moisture resistant particleboard forsubstrate ensures structural integrity andadded protection against high humidityor occasional wetting.

F(AS/NZS 2924.1)PROPERTY RESULTS

Resistance to Initial wear notSurface wear: less than 150 cycles;

Average wear not less than 350 cycles

Resistance to Not less than 2.0scratching: NewtonsResistance to No deteriorationDry Heat other than slightat 180ºC: loss of gloss/colour

Resistance to No deteriorationSteam: other than slight

change of gloss and/or colour

Resitance to Reagents Groups 1Staining: and 2 = no visible

change. Reagents Groups 3 and 4 = moderate change of colour/gloss

Resistance Not more than slightto Colour colour change in XenonChange in arc light (minimum)Artificial Light*: 6 on Blue Wool ScaleResistance to No deteriorationCigarette Burns: other than moderate

change on gloss and moderate brown staining.

* Laminex Squareform Benchtops have good colour retention and dimensional stability in normal interiorapplications. However prolonged exposure to sunlightmay cause shrinkage and/or some change in colour.Laminex Squareform Benchtops are therefore notrecommended for external applications or interiorapplications with prolonged exposure to direct sunlight.



Section 5: 2.2

WHEN SPECIFYINGSurfacing shall be Laminex SquareformBenchop as supplied by The LaminexGroup, Pattern shall be ... in ... sizes and ...profiles.

FABRICATION GUIDELINESStorage and HandlingStore Benchtop elements withprotective paper between each elementkeeping bulk stocks stacked flat andsupported. Avoid exposure to lowhumidity and extreme temperature.Do not slide elements over one anotheras this may damage the decorativesurface, lift carefully instead. Note theweight specification for the product.

PreconditioningPrior to installation Laminex Squareformshould be allowed to reach moistureequilibrium over a period of 48 hourswithin the environment of its end use.Remove the packaging to enable thisprocess to occur.

Machine RoutingVerticle spindle moulding machines withtungsten carbide-tipped cuttersoperating at 18,000 to 22,000 RPM arepreferred for edge finishing and formaking perfect mitres.Twin fluted cutterswith replaceable tips are recommendedfor this process. Equipment must havethe capability to handle the size of thebench top element.

Machine SawingCircular saws with 3-4 teeth per 25mmwith only a slight set and a saw blade tipspeed of 3,000 metre/minute will give aclean cut.Tungsten carbide-tipped blades300mm to 350mm in diameter andoperating at 3,500 to 4,500 RPM arerecommended to achieve this. Alwayscut with face up to minimise surfacechipping. For cutting of double-edgedpost form elements it is recommendedto use a saw with a drop down blade(post form saw or scribing saw).The direction of the edge cut mustalways be towards the post-formed edgeand not away from it. A slow feed speedis important in preventing charring of thebench top element when cutting.

It is advisable to consult machine ortooling suppliers for optimum operatingsettings for routing or sawing equipment.

Hand Tools and Portable ToolsThe use of hand tools and portabletools are not recommended for thepreparation of benchtop joins. Machinerouting and/or machine sawing givesuperior results.

Cut OutsAll cut outs must have clean chip freeedges and a small (2-3mm) internalradius at corners. Ensure that machinededges of cut outs are sanded smoothand that the top edge of the laminate isarrissed to eliminate stress points.Ragged edges with underside chip outor square cut internal corners provideweak spots for cracking to occur.

JoinsWhere two fabricated components areto be joined, lightly sand the ends ofeach component. Apply a completespread of silicone adhesive or ColorfillAdhesive and Sealant to one surface ofthe components before clamping themtogether. Close the join and allow excessadhesive or sealant to squeeze out.Secure the join using work topconnectors and clean away excessadhesive with appropriate solvent. Ifshrinkage of adhesive or sealant occursre-apply a second application to theoutside of the join and wipe awayexcess.Whenever possible avoidplacement of joins close to sink areas.This can minimise the risk of waterdamage to joins.

Where external joins are formed withPostformed components it is importantto dull any sharp edges using fine sandpaper to prevent injury from accidentalcontact.



Tech

nic

al

Data

: L

am

inex

®B

ran

ded

Pro

du

cts

5



Section 5: 3.1

Laminex® RedbackTM LaminateLaminex Redback is a speciallyformulated laminate whichmay be readily heatformeddown to a radius of 10mmwithout cracking or blistering.It will form around internal andexternal bends in any directionto as tight as a 10mm radiuswith no loss of durability orappearance.

APPLICATIONSLaminex® Redback™ is widely used for countertops, vanity units, partitions,store fixtures, sills, bars, benchtops, doorand drawer fronts and other applicationswhere good appearance, durability andresistance to stain and heat fromordinary sources are required.


FIRE TESTS


* **

Ignitability 16 12 0-20Spread of Flame 4 0 0-10Heat Evolved 4 1 0-10Smoke Developed 4 3 0-10

* Laminate adhered to 33mm particleboard with

neoprene adhesive.

** Laminate adhered to non-combustible substrate.

Cone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837(Irradiance of 50kW/m2)Classification Result* Unit/RangeGroup Number 1 1-3Average Specific 196.5 m2 / kgExtinction Area

* Laminate unadhered

Laminex Redback conforms withAS/NZS 2924.1 for high-pressuredecorative laminates.

PROPERTIES

(AS/NZS 2924.1)PROPERTY REQUIREMENT

Resistance to Initial wear not less Surface Wear: than 150 cycles.

Average wear notless than 350 cycles.

Resistance to No deterioration Immersion in other than slight Boiling Water: loss of gloss.

Gain in weight of no more than 14%.

Resistance to No deterioration Dry Heat other than slight loss at 180°C: of gloss/colour.Resistance to Moderate change Steam: of gloss and/or colour.Dimensional Dimensional change Stability: of not more than

0.7% with grain and1.2% across grain.

Resistance to Reagents Groups Staining: 1 and 2 = No visible

change.Reagents Groups 3 and 4 = Moderatechange of colour/gloss.

Resistance Not more than slight to Colour colour change in Xenon Change in arc light (minimum)Artificial Light*: 6 on Blue WoolResistance to No deterioration Cigarette Burns: other than moderate

change in gloss and moderate brown staining.

* Laminex Redback laminate has good colour retention and dimensional stability in normalinterior applications. However, prolonged exposure tosunlight may cause shrinkage and/or some change incolour. Laminex Redback laminate is therefore notrecommended for external applications or interiorapplications with prolonged exposure to direct sunlight.

WHEN SPECIFYINGSurfacing shall be Laminex Redbacklaminate as manufactured by TheLaminex Group. Colours and/or patternsshall be .......... in .......... finish.

GREENfirst PRODUCTLaminex Redback is aGreenfirst™ productand is certified byGood EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.

Sizes 3600mm x 1500mm3600mm x 1200mm3600mm x 900mm3600mm x 750mm

Thickness: 0.7mm (nominal)Weight: 1.0kg/m2 approx.Finish: Gloss, Dimensions,

Natural.Colours and Refer to current Pattern Range: Product Availability

Chart.

Licence NumberLA-2-2006



Section 5: 3.2

PROCESSINGBoard Substrate Bend ProfileLaminex Redback should be fullysupported by substrate when glued. Donot bond directly to plaster, plasterboardor concrete.The correct profile onparticleboard or medium densityfibreboard can be obtained by usingspecially shaped router blades with aradius not less than 10mm. Profile shouldbe uniform along the full length of theboard with none of the following faults:

1. High spots2. Bumps3. Low spots4. Ridges5. No surface dust or chips.

The profile should be smooth and havea gentle taper leading into the profilefrom the board’s surface.

GluingTrade Essentials Sprayable ContactAdhesives are suitable for gluing thelaminate to the boards in conjunctionwith static post-forming machines.

Glue line should be evenly applied toboth contact surfaces avoiding lumps ofglue, sawdust, chips, etc., as they mayfracture the laminate when pressure isapplied during bonding.

Refer to the adhesive manufacturer’sdirections for correct fabrication instructions.

FormingThere are three main steps involved inbending Laminex Redback grade.

1. Heat the area to be bent to therequired bending temperature.

2. Bend immediately while still at the correct temperature.

3. Cooling of laminate to set formed shape.

HeaterThe most common type of heaterconsists of a series of ceramic heatersegments which are coupled together toform a continuous bar. In most cases

these heaters are set up in banks to allowthree heat zones along the machine.

Temperature variations during heatingcan affect the heat up time range andlead to possible failures when bending.As a safeguard against this, regular heatup time checks should be undertaken atthe centre and both ends of themachine.The most common method ofheat up checking is by placing samplepieces of Redback laminate (say 250mm x 75mm) at the threestations mentioned above.

Apply Tempilaq to each piece, time tomelt (should be approx. 30 seconds)and then time to blister. If there is avariation in blister time between any ofthe laminate samples of 5 seconds ormore, then adjustment of the heater barmay be necessary. Refer to the machinemanufacturer for guidance.

Heater Set Up Procedure1. Elements must be centred over

the bend to be made.

2. Usually the heater elements arecloser to the work surface at eachend than at the centre.The reasonfor this situation is to compensate forthe heat loss around each end of the machine.

3. Heater height above the laminatesurface is determined by the time ittakes the laminate surface to reach atemperature of 163°C which shouldbe between 25-30 seconds.

This can be controlled by eitheradjusting the element’s temperature,the height above the laminate’ssurface or speed of motor driveconveyor in the case of a continuousforming type machine.

The surface temperature can bedetermined by using a temperatureindication crayon or liquid,eg.Tempilaq.

4. For a wide bend, the elements can begently moved backward and forwardto give a greater heat spread andmaintain a surface temperature of163°C in 25-30 seconds.

Bending TimeBending times in the order of 30-50 seconds are generally accepted aspractical.To establish bending time, usethe following method:

1. Taking an offcut from a part of thesheet adjacent to the area to beformed, determine the blister time (abubble raised on the heated surface)with a stopwatch. (Normally around45-60 seconds).

2. Bend time: (Time to obtain formingtemperature.) Bend time = 60% of blister time, eg. ifthe blister time was 60 seconds thenbend time would be 60 x 60% = 36seconds.

If any tightness on bending isdetected, there is the potential toincrease the time to 80% of blistertime without any problems.

Note:The pattern colour, sheet thickness, as wellas room, board temperature or speed ofmovement of forming (continuous typemachine) may affect the heating time dueto the differences in heat absorption.

Bend range is normally around 25 seconds if all above steps have been performed.

If no offcut of the material to be formedis available, then the bend time can beapproximated by heating the area to bebent to the required bending temperatureof 163°C at a heat up time to Tempilaqmelt of 30 seconds.Allow a further 5seconds for the core material to reachtemperature then make the bend.

Again, if any tightness is detected, extendtime by a further 5 seconds.

The operating window can be widenedif necessary by slowing the heating timesuch that a surface temperature of163°C is reached in 40 seconds.Theslower heating rate will lengthen theblister time and bending can be achievedat 47 seconds heat time.

Tech

nic

al

Data

: L

am

inex

®B

ran

ded

Pro

du

cts

5



Section 5: 3.3

Making the BendFirstly, the ends of the laminate sheet8cm either side of the centre line of thebend should be filed smooth to removeany edge chips or small cracks.

These may start larger cracks leadinginto the sheet when bending.

The laminate should then be glued flatand pressed down and rolled, leaving thelaminate for the bend clear of the boards.

If using a contact adhesive,ensure adhesive is sufficiently dry and allsolvents evaporated before making the bend.

The laminate and board should then beaccurately located in the formingmachine so that the bend is made in thecorrect position, not pulling the laminatearound the profile under too muchtension.

The sheet is formed immediately afterthe correct heat up procedure iscompleted and is then held in positionwhile the area of the bend is allowed tocool down. Usually 15-20 seconds issufficient to permanently set thelaminate in position and shape.

1. Temperature should have reachedbend temperature along full bending length.

2. If too much bar tension (ie. thebenchtop core is placed in themachine too far forward) on thebend, tension cracks along both top and bottom radius may occur.This cracking is usually evidentimmediately after the top is removedfrom the machine.

3. Too little pressure will leave a gap between the laminate and theboard, leaving this susceptible toimpact cracking.

Use of a hand roller may be requiredto press the moulded laminate ontothe boards so that contact adhesivecan bond properly.

Coved Splashbacks or Up-Stands (also refer to appendix 6.2-6.3regarding proximity of splashbacks to heat sources)

When splashback or up-stand isrequired, it is necessary to lay out thetop to determine the correctdimensions for each section of thebenchtop.

Assume the total width of the benchtopincluding splashback is 600mm with theoverall height of the splash-back being100mm from the top of the benchtop.

Fig. 1.

Having determined the dimensions of each component, prepare the blanksand laminate and bond togetherensuring that a spacer block 14.5mmwide (for 19mm diameter coving rod) isused to guarantee an exact dimensionbetween benchtop blank and splashbackcomponent.

Fig.2.

After bonding of both components to the laminate, care should be takenwhen rolling to ensure edge crackingdoes not occur between the splashbackand top component. Should thesplashback be of a different thickness tothe benchtop, then accurate packers

must be employed to ensure an eventhickness between both components.

The top is now ready for post-forming. Itis important that all other formingfunctions are completed prior to thecoving operation. Premature forming ofthe cove section may result in insufficientroom in the machine to carry out thefront edge forming.

FORMING THE COVERSECTIONOnce all other forming sections havebeen completed, heat up the cove rodon your machine.

a. Invert the benchtop and align the14.5mm grooved section with themachine indexers provided in therecessed aluminium channel, so thesection to be coved will fall directlyover the coving rod. Pull firmly so asto align the back edge of thebenchtop component with the insideof the coving rod.This will ensurecorrect alignment of the benchtop.

Remove the indexers before applyingplaten pressure.

b. Lower the top platen of the press.Apply 163°C Tempilaq to a section ofthe groove, ensuring that a melt timeof around 30 seconds is achieved.

Once the Tempilaq commences tomelt, slight hand pressure should beapplied to the splashback component,it will usually fall down under its ownweight.When the splashbackcomponent has formed to 90degrees and is hard against themachine frame, clamp splashback inposition with clamps provided withthe machine.



Section 5: 3.4

This total operation should take nomore than 45 seconds. Should thetime be faster or slower, thenadjustment of the heat setting on the coving rod will be required.

c. Now fit the timber coving profile inposition and fix in both directionswith screws or staples ensuring thecover section remains hard againstthe machine frame.

Warning: Speed is essential duringthe fixing of the timber coving profileas extensive delay in removing thebenchtop from the machine mayresult in scorching or blistering of thelaminate. Should large tops berequired for fabrication where longdelays would be obvious, then it issuggested that a special table beconstructed to enable the fixing ofthe timber coving profile away fromthe post-forming machine.

d. Once coving profile has been fixedinto position it will be required tocheck that the splashback is square tothe benchtop. Usually the covesection will want to fall away. Avoidingthis will require the fixing oftemporary plates to each end of theblank to hold it square until theadhesive dries along the timbercoving profile and the laminate cools.

Extended Drop-FrontsBenchtopsSome specifications require thefabrication of extended drop-down frontedges usually between 200mm and250mm deep.These applications areusually used in motel and hotel vanityunits, reception counters, etc.It is therefore important to be aware of the formula required to achieve thisresult. Details of the mathematicalspecification for 16mm and 33mmthickness benchtops are as follows:

a. 16mm thickness benchtop with10mm radius

Then allow 0.5 to 1mm for additionalclearance which would give a suggesteddimension at “X” of 12.5mm.

b. 33mm thickness benchtop with15mm radius

In all cases it is important that the 1mmbevel be applied to the bottom of thefront edge of the benchtop section.Thisbevel enables additional clearance forthe drop-down component to clearwhen being bent into position.

The most common problems in post-forming are normally caused by:

Cracks Dirty and/or uneven cores.Rough cores. Cold cores.Insufficient heat. Uneven heat distribution. Element too far from laminate.Wrong heat up rate.

Blisters Uneven heat distribution.Warped material.Too muchheat.

Delamination Insufficient heat.Not enough glue.Insufficient pressure.

Note:a. The rate of forming depends primarily

upon the amount of energy fed in, thethickness of the high-pressurelaminate, the radius of curvature to beformed and whether the laminate isto be formed parallel to, or across, thedirection of its sanding.

But when a laminate must be formedaround a 10mm radius across the direction of sanding, the bend time (of 60% of the blister time) should beadhered to.The laminate will always bend more easily in a direction parallel to the direction of sanding.

b. The formed laminate must be cooledin its shape to prevent it from springingback. In electrically heated equipmentthis is achieved with a draught of coolair or by a wet sponge.

c. Providing it is not exposed to extremesof temperature or high humidity,Laminex Redback should have a shelflife of up to 12 months, however, it isstrongly recommended that stocks berotated as often as possible.

d. This information is intended as aguide and should not necessarily be regarded as applying to allsituations. It is therefore advised thatif problems arise which are notcovered, then the technical servicessection of Laminex should becontacted through your local branch.

e. The data here in is believed to beaccurate to the best of ourknowledge, but users should carryout their own assessment of theproduct to satisfy themselves that it issuitable for their requirements.



GreenfirstSection 3:1

Tech

nic

al

Data

: L

am

inex

®B

ran

ded

Pro

du

cts

5



Section 5: 4.1

Laminex® Chemical Resistant LaminateLaminex® Chemical ResistantSurfaces are a high-pressuredecorative laminatemanufactured to haveimproved chemical, stain andabrasion resistance. It will formaround internal and externalbends to a 15mm radius in thelongitudinal direction withoutcracking or blistering.

APPLICATIONSLaminex® Chemical Resistant Redback™

is unaffected by many solvents, dyes,alkalies, acids and other chemicals. It is anideal surfacing material for laboratories,hospitals, schools and factories whereresistance to chemical attack anddurability is required.

The rounded edges eliminate joins orseams which may permit chemicalpenetration into the edges.


Sizes: 3600mm x 1200mmThickness: 0.8mm (nominal)Weight: 1.0kg/m2 approx.Finish: NaturalColours and Refer to current Pattern Range: Product Availability

Chart.

FIRE TESTSCone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837:1998(Irradiance of 50kW/m2)Classification Result* Unit/RangeGroup Number 1 1-3Average Specific 155.0 m2 / kgExtinction Area

* Laminate unadhered

Laminex® Chemical Resistant Redback™

conforms with AS/NZS 2924.1 for high-pressure decorative laminates.

PROPERTIES(AS/NZS 2924.1)

PROPERTY REQUIREMENT

Resistance to Initial wear not less Surface Wear: than 150 cycles.

Average wear not lessthan 350 cycles.

Resistance to Moderate loss of gloss.Immersion in and/or colour. Gain in Boiling Water: weight of not more than 18%.Resistance to No deterioration Dry Heat other than slight loss at 180°C: of gloss/colour.Resistance to Moderate change of Steam: gloss and/or colour.Dimensional Dimensional change Stability: of not more than 0.7%

with grain and 1.2%across grain.

Resistance to Reagents Groups 1 Staining: and 2 = No visible

change. Reagents Groups3 and 4 = Slight change of colour/gloss.(see chemical list for selected reagents)

Resistance Not more than slightto Colour change in Xenon arcChange in light. Grey Scale: >4 atArtificial Light*: Blue Wool Scale: 6 Resistance to No deterioration other Cigarette Burns: than moderate change

in gloss and moderate brown staining.

* Laminex Chemical Resistant Surfaces has good colourretention and dimensional stability in normal interiorapplications. However, prolonged exposure to sunlightmay cause shrinkage and/or some change in colour.Laminex® Chemical Resistant Surfaces is therefore notrecommended for external applications or interiorapplications with prolonged exposure to direct sunlight

WHEN SPECIFYINGSurfacing shall be Laminex® ChemicalResistant Surfaces as manufactured byThe Laminex Group. Colours and/orpatterns shall be .......... in .......... finish.

PROCESSINGBoard Substrate Bend ProfileLaminex Chemical Resistant Surfaces mustbe fully supported when glued down. Keepjoins away from sink areas. Do not bonddirectly to plaster, plasterboard or concrete.The correct profile on particleboard ormedium density fibreboard can beobtained by using specially shaped routerblades with a radius not less than 15mm.

Bend TimeThe bend time can be approximated byheating the area to be bent to therequired bending temperature of 163°Cat a heat up time to Tempilaq melt ofaround 30 seconds. Allow a further 10seconds for the core material to reachtemperature, then make the bend.

Extended Drop-Front BenchtopsSome specifications require thefabrication of extended drop-down frontedges usually between 200mm and250mm deep. It is therefore important tobe aware of the formula required toachieve this result. Details of themathematical specification for 16mm and33mm thickness benchtops are as follows:



Section 5: 4.2

a. 16mm thickness benchtop with15mm radius

Then allow 0.5 to 1mm for additionalclearance which would give a suggesteddimension at “X” of 10.5mm.

b. 33mm thickness benchtop with15mm radius

In all cases it is important that the 1mmbevel be applied to the bottom of thefront edge of the benchtop section.Thisbevel enables additional clearance forthe drop-down component to clearwhen being bent into position.

Note: Bending across the direction ofsanding is not recommended withChemical Resistant Surfaces. For all otherprocessing details refer to Laminex®

Redback™ Technical Data Sheet.

CHEMICAL RESISTANCELaminex Chemical Resistant Surfaces havebeen rated for the following list of chemicalsand reagents in relation to 16 hourscovered exposure at 20–22 degrees C.Many reagents listed below will notdamage the laminate surface.Thosereagents labelled with an asterisk (*) maycause slight change in gloss or colour,depending upon the duration of exposurewhereas those labelled with two asterisks(**) will cause marked or severe damage.As with all fine cabinetry surfaces, Laminexrecommends prompt cleanup of all spillsusing water, a cloth and mild detergent.Aslight loss of gloss can occur from harshrubbing. Never use abrasive cleaners. It isalways a good idea to obtain large – sizesamples and perform in- situ tests withchemicals most likely to be in contact withthe laminate before purchasing.

SCIENCE LABORATORIESAcidsAcetic Acid, 40%Acetic Acid (Glacial), 98%*Chromic Acid, 60%**Citric Acid, 10%Dichromate Cleaning Solution**Formic Acid, 10%*Formic Acid, 85%*Hydrochloric Acid, 3%* Hydrochloric Acid, 7%**Nitric Acid, 5%**Perchloric Acid, 60%**Phosphoric Acid, 85%* Sulphuric Acid, 5%*Sulphuric Acid, 11%*Sulphuric Acid, 33%**

AlkalisAmmonium Hydroxide, 28%Barium HydroxideCalcium HydroxidePotassium Hydroxide, 15%*Potassium Hydroxide, 42%*Sodium Carbonate, saturatedSodium Hydroxide, 8%Sodium Hydroxide, 24%* Sodium Hydroxide, 50%*Sodium Silicate

SolventsAcetoneAmyl AcetateBenzeneCarbon TetrachlorideCresolDioxaneEthyl AcetateEthyl AlcoholEthylene GlycolFurfuralIsopropanolMethyl AlcoholMethyl Ethyl KetoneMethylene ChlorideMineral SpiritsNaphthaN - hexaneTetrahydrofuran TrichloroethyleneTolueneXylene

Other ReagentsCalcium HypochloriteCopper Sulfate, 10%Ferric Chloride, 10%Phenol, 85%Phenolphthalein, 1%Potassium Permanganate, 2%*Sodium BisulphiteSodium ChlorideZinc Chloride

HOSPITAL AND HEALTH CAREAmyl AlcoholAniline Blue, 2.5%*Bromocresol Green Solution*Bromothymol Blue, 0.1%Carbol FuschinChloroformCoal Tar Solution, 20%Crystal VioletDetachol Adhesive RemoverEosin Solution*Ethyl AlcoholEthyl EtherEucalyptolFerric Subsulphate Purified, 13-14%Formaldehyde, 37%Gentian Violet, 1% solution*Giemsa Bloodstain*Glycerinum Iodine Compositum*Haematoxylin*Hydrogen Peroxide, 3%Hydrogen Peroxide, 20% Iodine Tincture, USP, 2%*Isopropyl AlcoholMethyl Alcohol

Methyl Orange, 0.04%Methyl RedMethylene BlueMineral OilPetroleum JellyPovidone Iodine*PVP Iodine Swab*Silver Nitrate, 10%*Steri-strip, 1544 Benzoin TinctureSudan IIITincture Benzoin CompoundWrights Blood Stain*Zephiran Chloride, 17%Zinc Oxide

DENTAL SUPPLIESAcrylic Bonding Cement*AmalagamDisclosing TabletsEnthat Phosphoric Acid Etch, 37%*EugenolFluoride RinseGermicidal Disposable Cloth

GENERAL REAGENTSCellosolveDetergent DisinfectantKeroseneDisinfectantMethylated SpiritsNail Polish RemoverPetroleum JellyPine OilSodium Hypochlorite, 5% (White King®) Sodium Hypochlorite, 13% (White King®)Trisodium Phosphate, 30%Unleaded petrolUrea, 6.6%Vegetable Oil

HARSH HOUSEHOLD PRODUCTSBluing*: Bluo® liquid blue laundry brightness.Ceramic Cook Top Cleaners*: Cook Top cleaningcrème for smooth top ranges.Chlorine Bleaches:White King® regular bleach,Pine O Cleen® bathroom power foam bleach.Coffeepot Cleaners*: Glitz® calcium scale and rustremover, Rubbedin® descale magic.Countertop Cleaners: Ajax® Spray n’Wipe,WhiteKing® multi surface spray, Pine O Cleen® orangeoil antibacterial.Crystal Drain Openers*: Drano® drain cleanercrystal sachet, Diggers® caustic soda.Hair Colourings*: Miss Clairol® crème formula– black velvet, Clairol Pure White® crème developer Lime Removers*: Rubbedin® kettle magic, Lime-A-Way.Liquid Drain Openers*: Drano® drain cleaner gel.Metal Cleaners*: Brasso® metal polish, Silvo® metalpolish.Mildew Removers: Selleys® rapid mould killer,Pine O Clean® bathroom power foam bleach,Exit Mould® stain remover.Oven Cleaners*: Mr Muscle® heavy duty ovencleaner, Easy-Off® Oven heavy duty cleaner.Rust Removers**: C L R® all purpose cleaner,Wattyl® kill rust, Dulux® quit rust.Toilet Bowl Cleaners:Toilet Duck® fresh pine toiletcleaner, Harpic® white & shine bleach gel toiletcleaner, Pine O Cleen® foam bathroom cleaner,White King® lemon fresh toilet gel cleaner,

Note: Some reagents will become moreconcentrated if allowed to evaporate onthe laminate. It is therefore recommendedthat all spillages be washed and rinsed offthe laminate as soon as possible.





Section 5: 5.1

Tech

nic

al

Data

: L

am

inex

®B

ran

ded

Pro

du

cts

5

Laminex® Metallics™

Laminex Metallics are highpressure laminatesmanufactured with genuinedecorative metallic foils.The surface of these productsis coated with a protectivelacquer similar to a goodquality timber lacquer.

APPLICATIONSLaminex® Metallics™ are ideal for walls,doors, feature paneling, room dividers,exhibition stands and shop fittings(displays, stands, etc.). Other uses includefireplace and kitchen hoods, lift liningsand many other areas where a metalliclook is desired.

Metallic finishes are recommended forlight duty interior applications only.Theyare not recommended for heavy usageareas such as worktops, bars, tables,kitchen splashbacks or kick boardsLaminex Metallics are not heat formable.

PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICSSizes: 2400mm x 1200mmThickness: 0.8mm to 1.3mmWeight: 1.5kg/m2 approx. (1mm)

FIRE TESTS(Typically achieved when tested to ConeCalorimeter, AS/NZS 3837 (Irradiance of 50kW/m2)Classification Result* Unit/RangeGroup Number 1 1-3Average Specific 80.3 m2 / kgExtinction Area

*0.8mm Laminate unadhered

WHEN SPECIFYINGSurfacing shall be Laminex Metalliclaminate as supplied by The LaminexGroup. Colour/Finish shall be ..........

CARE & MAINTENANCECautionLaminex Metallics are intended forinterior use in vertical decorativeapplications.The lacquered surface ofLaminex Metallics has similar propertiesto a high quality wood lacquer, thus thesurface could be damaged by hardobjects and some solvents.The metallicsurfaces have low resistance to impactsand low resistance to abrasion.

Avoid the use of solvents for cleaningpurposes. Any spillage of liquids shouldbe removed as soon as possible. Do notuse abrasive cleaners, even those inliquid form.

Laminex Metallics should be cleanedwith a soft, moist cloth or moist chamoisleather and then dried with a soft, drycloth. A mild cleaning agent such as glasscleaner can be used to remove smudgesand smears.

Do not place hot objects on or near thesurface nor expose the surface to hotwater or steam. Laminex Metallicslaminates are not recommended for usein areas of high humidity such as inbathrooms or laundries as exposure to

moisture for prolonged periods cancause corrosion of the metallic surfaceand/or delamination. Protect fromstrong, direct sunlight as continuousexposure may cause discolouration orfading to the surface over time.

SITE WORK NOTESLaminex Metallics laminates comeprotected with a plastic film that shouldbe left attached while the laminate isbeing processed.The plastic film shouldnot be exposed to direct sunlight as itmay degrade making removal moredifficult and the film should be removedwithin 6 months of receiving thelaminate. Ensure that checks for colour,colour uniformity and surface defectsare performed before the job is started.Use laminate from one productionbatch for a job as small variations inappearance can occur batch to batchdue to the production process of themetallic foils.

Laminates should be stored horizontally.If this is not possible, it is recommendedto store the sheets propped up on theirlong edge against a wall but fullysupported at an 80 degree angle.Condition for at least 48 hours in thesame environment as the substrate.



When processing, ensure that theadjoining sheets are running in the sameorientation otherwise variations inappearance may occur.

Laminex Metallics can be sawn, drilledand milled like standard high pressurelaminates. It is advisable to usecarbide-tipped cutting tools. Whencutting, the decorative surface shouldalways face upwards.

Laminex Metallics should be bonded toTrade Essentials Particleboard orCraftwood MDF using Trade EssentialsContact Adhesives or Cross-Linking PVAadhesives. Laminate should be fullysupported when glued.

Do not bond directly to plaster,plasterboard or concrete. If heatingadhesives the temperature should notexceed 60°C (140°F).Two componentepoxide glues and polyurethaneadhesives can also be used but caremust be taken that the glue residues arecompletely removed from the surfacebefore they harden. Condensation resinglues such as urea are notrecommended as the acid releasedduring hardening can adversely affect themetallic foil.

When pressing the laminate to asubstrate, a thin protective soft layer (eg.paper) should be placed on top of themetallic surface. Avoid excess gluecoming in contact with the unprotectedmetallic surface. Use only sufficientpressure to ensure a good bond.

During cutting and machining a slightburring may occur on the new edge.This can be removed by careful use of afine file.

Note:This technical data does not applyto Brushed Stainless Steel or Steel Wave.

For these products refer to the LaminexStainless Steel Technical Data Sheet.





Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 6.1

Laminex® Aquapanel®

Laminex Aquapanel is amelamine surfaced high-pressure decorative laminatespecifically designed for areaswhere resistance to moisture isrequired. The strong anddurable 2.7mm sheets feature ablack core allowing thedistinctive black edge to beexposed in applications.

Laminex® Aquapanel® has a moistureresistant backing, and a balancedconstruction ensures board flatness. It hasexcellent impact strength, which is morethan adequate for normal applications,enabling supporting framework to bespaced at 450mm centers. It is availablein a range of finishes and colours /patterns.

APPLICATIONSLaminex Aquapanel is ideal for :• Lining in shower recesses, bathrooms,

and laundries,• Splashbacks over sinks, basins and

laundry troughs • Lining buses, caravans and boats.• Shopfitting and commercial applications• Wall Panelling and Partitioning

Although Laminex Aquapanel is designedfor use in wet areas, this material must notbe immersed in water for lengthy periodsnor should it be continuously exposed tosaturated moisture conditions.

Decors and Patterns Refer to current Laminex Aquapanelbrochure for decors and patterns available.

AccessoriesRefer to Section 5:28 for Fixing SystemsProduct information. Refer to Section5:33 for Laminex Wall Systems AdhesiveProduct information. Refer to Section5:34 for Laminex Wall Systems SiliconeProduct information.

PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICSFinishes: (Finishes vary by

colour/pattern)Glaze, Gloss,Tile, Ripple

Colours: Refer to product brochureThickness: 2.7mm (Nominal) Weight: 4.4kg/m2 approx.Decorated: One Sided

(Double sided by special order enquiry)*

Core: Black

Sheet Dimensions: (Sheet sizes vary by décor)1800mm x 900mm2400mm x 900mm2400mm x 1200mm3000mm x 1200mm**

Warranty: (Australia) 7 Year Limited Warranty

* Tile and Ripple not made double sided.** Tile and Ripple only.

COMPLIANCELaminex Aquapanel is tested to AZ/NZS2924.1 for high-pressure decorativelaminates and has been approved bygovernment bodies. It conforms withbuilding code Australia and specific stateregulatory (where applicable) for moistureresistant classification.

WHEN SPECIFYINGMaterial shall be Laminex Aquapanel assupplied by The Laminex Group. Colouror pattern shall be … in ….. Finish.

CARE AND CLEANINGLaminex Aquapanel is easy to clean.Clean the sheet surface with warmwater and mild liquid detergent only.Do not use abrasive cleaners, waxes orpolish on the surface.

SITE WORK NOTESStorage and TransportSheets should be transported flat withminimum flex. Bulk stocks of Aquapanelshould be stored flat on pallets andcovered with a polythene type sheeting toavoid dust penetration. Before installationstore sheets upright on the longest edgeand face to face on the decorated surface.Keep the work area clean. Lift sheetscarefully. Do not slide on decorativesurface or use as a work surface.

PreconditioningAquapanel should be unpacked andprotective cover removed at the fittingsite and allowed to stand for at least 48hours prior to cutting and installing toallow the sheets to breathe and reachmoisture equilibrium.

PreparationChoose your starting point with thewhole job in mind. Starting off withstraight and plumb walls will help withwhole job. Mark areas that need packingusing a straight edge or square.Checking your levels and plumbsregularly will keep the job tidy and assistwith installation. Check the LaminexAquapanel for squareness in case re-sizingis needed. If using Laminex fixing systemprofiles check for fit and if necessaryplane or sand the back edge of thelaminate to ease the fitting.


Section 5: 6.2

PROPERTIES

Preparation cont’dLaminex recommends that Aquapanel shouldbe attached to a dressed timber frame withno more than 450mm between horizontaland vertical studs or battens.

Cutting and DrillingAlways cut sheets with the decorativesurface face up. Cutting stroke should bedown into the decorative surface.To cutuse a fine tooth hand or power saw, (10– 12 teeth per mm), masonry cuttingdisc, fine tooth band saw or fibro

cement cutters. Note: Jig saws are notrecommended but if using cut with anupward stroke and cut from back ofsheet). Clean all edges with a fine file,sand paper or plane to ensure there areno burrs or flattened edges.This willassist in inserting the sheet into fixingsystems with minimum fuss. As with allwoodworking, always ensure you wearthe appropriate safety gear, includingdust mask, eye protection and hearingprotection.

Drill holes into the sheet with high-speed twist drills. Use a hole saw forholes for edges larger than 18mm indiameter. Drill holes 2mm oversize toallow for expansion.

Fixing SystemsWhen using Laminex fixing systems,using the Laminex Mitre Box and Saw isrecommended to assist in creatingcorrect mitred angles on profiles. Placesticky tape over the section of profile orkeep in protective cover when placing inthe Mitre Box to keep the profile ingood condition.

Preparing the Substrate andInstallingIdeally sheets should be attached to adressed timber frame with no more than450mm centers.You will need to installbatons at 450mm intervals and at thesheet joins if there are not existing batonsin place. Standard plasterboard can alsobe used in low humidity applications suchas corridors. When adhering toplasterboard and cement sheet board inwet area, it must be moisture resistant.

Property Unit Measure StandardApplication VGS (Vertical General-

Purpose Standard)†

Dimensional Tolerance mm +10/– 0mmCone Calorimeter AS/NZ 3837

BCA Group Number Rating 3Average Specific Extinction Area m2/kg 134

Resistance to surface wear‡ Initial wear not less AS/NZS 2924.1than 50 cycles. Average wear not less than 150 cycles.

Resistance to immersion in No deterioration other than AS/NZS 2924.1Boiling Water: slight loss of gloss. Gain in

weight of not more than 4.0%Resistance to dry heat at 180°C: No deterioration other than AS/NZS 2924.1

slight loss of gloss &/or colourResistance to Steam: No deterioration other than AS/NZS 2924.1

slight change of gloss and/or colour

Dimensional Stability: Dimensional change of not AS/NZS 2924.1more than 0.3% with grain and 0.65% across grain.

Resistance to impact by large No visible damage at a drop AS/NZS 2924.1diameter ball (324g) height of 100cm other than

an indent of ≤ 10mm diameterResistance to Scratching Min. 1 Newton force AS/NZS 2924.1Resistance to Staining: Reagents groups 1 & 2 = no AS/NZS 2924.1

visible change, Reagents groups 3 & 4 = slight change of colour and/or gloss

Resistance to Colour Change in Not more than slight colour AS/NZS 2924.1Artificial Light*: change in Xenon arc light

(minimum).Blue Wool: 6

Resistance to Cigarette Burns: No deterioration other than AS/NZS 2924.1moderate change in gloss and moderate brown staining

Resistance to Crazing (Test 25): No worse than hairline cracks AS/NZS 2924.1across surface and/or edges,visible under x6 magnification

Resistance to Moisture at 65ºC# No worse than a slight AS/NZS 2924.1change of gloss/colour, orhairline edge cracks or slightedge swelling after 2 days

† Additional relevant properties included.* Laminex Aquapanel has good colour retention in normal interior applications.

However prolonged exposure to sunlight may cause some change in colour.Laminex Aquapanel are therefore not recommended for exterior applications or interior applications with prolonged exposure to direct sunlight.

# Slight to moderate gloss change can occur in glossy laminate due to the high gloss level.‡ Not applicable to Ripple – low duty wear, average wear point of 10 cycles




Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 6.3

Measure your areas carefully.Then cutfixing systems and sheets one at a timeas they are required.

To begin, install the fixing system profilesalong the first edge. Internal cornersrequire the use of an internal 90° profileso it is important to ensure the facingwalls are square and plumb. Measure theheight of the fixing profile required.Depending on the height of the walls ofyour room, the fixing profile may requirea join. Mark and cut to required length.Keep in mind that if the fixing profileruns down to a shower base, you shouldnot fix the profile below the top of thebase.This will prevent water fromseeping behind your wall.

Double check measurements and cutthe internal corner profile to length andinstall using galvanised flat head nails.Ensure you punch in the heads of anynails. Now you’re ready to install yourfirst sheet.

Insert Step 2

Measure the size of sheet and cut asrequired. If fixing around pipes or taps,you can drill straight through the sheet tocreate the hole size required. For largercutouts begin by drilling small pilot holes.

If installing the capping profile along the topedge of the sheet, make sure to cut theinternal joiner 7mm shorter than the sheet.

If installing a base profile along thebottom edge of the sheet, make sure tocut the internal joiner 3mm shorter thanthe sheet. Refer to mitre joints for moreinformation.

Next, seal the joins by squeezing a beadof Laminex Wall System Silicone downthe inside edge of the fixing profile.

Do not over fill expansion gap withsilicone sealant as this will preventnatural movement of the sheet.

Insert Step 5

Apply a 5mm bead of Laminex WallSystems Adhesive to the frame, where itwill come into contact with the sheet.

Put the sheet that has been cut to sizeinto place. Then, apply a little pressureagainst the sheet, so it comes into firmcontact with the adhesive. Now gentlyremove the sheet and allow theadhesive to become tacky.This takesapproximately five to fifteen minutesdepending on climatic conditions.

Insert Step 6

Place the sheet back into the fixingprofile.You can put the next fixing profileinto place while the first sheet is stillslightly tacky.

Now firm the sheet with a tap to easethe sheet into its fixed and final position.DO NOT fix the sheet too tightly intothe fixing system.They are specificallydesigned with a stop on the inside ofthe trim that allows for the sheet toexpand or contract with changing roomtemperatures and humidity levels.

Insert step 7

Divisional ProfileDivisional profiles are designed for wallsthat require two or more sheets to spanthe area. Make sure the previous sheet isinstalled square and plumb, then slidethe Divisional profile onto the sheetedge, checking measurements oncemore. Allow for 7mm overlap if you areplanning to install the capping profile or3mm for base profile.

Once you are satisfied with the fit andalignment, remove the Divisional profile;apply a bead of Silicone down the insideedge of the profile.Then simply slide theprofile back into place. Nail the Divisionalprofile in place.



Fit the next sheet as before, ensuringthat the appropriate method of adheringis followed.

External CornersExternal corners are also required to be90°. Carefully measure the sheet toensure the fit into the previous profile iscorrectly aligned, then mark off the edgeto be cut, taking care to ensure that thefixing profile is square and plumb withthe edge of the wall and the sheet.

Once satisfied that the sheet is correctlyaligned, mark the sheet and cut as before,ensuring that the edges are smooth andfree from burrs or flattened ends.

Check the fit in the external profile toensure accurate fit with the wall andre-check your levels once more. Apply abead of Silicone down the inside edge ofthe External profile and slide the profileonto the sheet, remembering to allow forthe Capping or Base profile if required.Nail the External profile in place.

Capping and BaseCapping and base profiles complete theinstallation by finishing the top andbottom of the sheet neatly. Capping andbase profiles are best installed as acontinuous length across the sheets.Youmay need to run these around corners,depending on your job.

Firstly, starting from an internal orexternal corner, measure up therequired length for installation. Simpledivisional profiles can be run flush up tothe Capping profile at 7mm from thetop, or down to the Base profile at 3mmfrom the bottom.

Corners are more detailed but are stilleasy. Measure the length required, andthen, to allow for the join, measure up arebate to cut from the Capping end.Where a Capping profile joins with avertical (divisional, external, internal)profile, you need to allow for overlap.Trim the back flange of the cappingprofile to accommodate the overlap.

After you have located the rebate, checkthe fit once more.

Mitred JointsIf you need to cut mitred joints, werecommend you use the patentedLaminex Mitre Box and Laminex MitreSaw to help you cut 45° and 90° angles.The Mitre Box has a unique basespecially designed to fit the LaminexFixing System.

To cut 90° angles, insert the fixing profileinto the Mitre Box. Using the LaminexMitre Saw, make a straight cut throughthe profile. Always check yourmeasurements.

45° cuts can be made in both inwardand outward faces.This allows for bothinternal and external corners, giving yourjob a professional finish.

Refer to the Fixing Systems Productinformation (pg 5.28).

Completing the InstallationCarefully seal all gaps around anyexposed edges of the sheet withLaminex Wall Systems Silicone. Payparticular attention to wet areas such asshower bases and around any cut-outsin the sheets.

Capping profile

Base profile

Divisional profile

Divisional profile

7mm

3mm



Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 6.5

When inserting fixtures, make sure thatthe holes and cut-outs are slightly largerto allow for expansion. Always ensurethat the holes are sealed with silicone toprevent moisture penetration.

If fitting a load bearing item such as atowel rail or shelving, fix through thesheet and into a wall stud or noggin.Make sure you apply Laminex WallSystem Silicone to seal any penetrations.

SILICONE JOINSIf Laminex fixing profiles are not beingused to join sheets, a simple butt join canbe used.The cutting and machining ofeach sheet (tile and patterns particularly)is critical to the overall appearance of thefinished job.Apply bond breaker tape tothe timber frame at the centre of the joinbefore fixing sheet to wall.

Always leave a minimum 3mm gapbetween the sheets. (Use an offcut ofthe sheet as a spacer). Sheets are theninstalled as previously detailed with a5mm bead of adhesive applied to allstuds in contact with the sheet.

Run masking tape down the sides of eachjoin and apply Laminex Wall SystemsSilicone to fill the expansion gap betweenthe two sheets. Trowel off any surplus,remove masking tape and wipe off anyexcess silicone on the surfaces using adamp cloth or mineral turpentine.

ToolingAll sealant must be tooled into place.This action forces the sealant into thejoint and assists the sealant to ‘Wet Out’

the sides of the joint. The tooling actionshould positively force the sealant intothe joint.

Note: The thickness of any solid materialinserted between gaps must be addedonto the recommended gapmeasurements.

Fill the gap with silicone, slightlyoverfilling.

Figure 10 Product Catalogue

Use a wet spatula to trowel off theexcess and remove the strips of tape.

Figure 11 Product Catalogue

Use a damp cloth or mineral turpentineto immediately remove any excesssilicone from the sheet to preventetching of the surface.

INSTALLATION ONPLASTERBOARD AND CEMENTSHEETSAlthough not recommended, Aquapanelcan be fitted to walls that are alreadylined with a flat sheet, such asplasterboard and cement sheeting. Referto warranty for further information.

Standard plasterboard sheeting can onlybe used in low humidity applications,such as corridors. In areas of relative

humidity greater than 65%, standardplasterboard should not be used.

In wet areas, moisture resistantplasterboard or cement sheeting isrequired.Walls subject to possibledampness or high moisture pick-upshould not have Aquapanel fixed direct,but installed to dressed timber frame orthe wall surface must be waterproofedwith an impermeable membrane.

Installation requires the following:• All surfaces must be clean and free of

grease, oil, dust and paint.• Walls must be completely dry. If

subject to possible dampness then a timber frame must be used, or the wallcompletely sealed.

• Walls must be flat and square.Aquapanel will not conform to an uneven surface.

• Clean surface with a solvent such as IPA (Isopropyl Alcohol) or white spiritsusing a two wipe method. (Apply the solvent with a clean cloth, then dry off with a second clean cloth before the solvent has flashed off).

• Use fixing system profiles in these applications.

Method of ApplicationAs described for typical installations forprofiles, except the sheet is bondeddirectly to the moisture resistantplasterboard or cement sheet using thefollowing method:• Run a 5mm bead of adhesive around

the edge of the sheet.• Use a zig zag pattern of 5mm bead of

adhesive making sure that the bead is within 15 - 20mm of the edges of thesheet.

• Press the sheet against the wall to transfer the adhesive to the wall.

• Remove the sheet and hold away fromthe wall to allow adhesive to become tacky. This will take approximately 5 – 15 minutes depending on climaticconditions.

• Once tacky, press the sheet back against the wall and continue as before.

BondBreaker Tape



INSTALLATION ON BRICK ANDCEMENT BLOCK WALLSAlthough not recommended, Aquapanelcan be fitted to brick, cement renderand cement blockwork. Refer to thewarranty for further information.

The wall must be dry and beimpermeable to water. The wall mustbe sealed with suitable waterproofing membrane. It is essential that the wall isflat and free of protruding grout.

Sealing the WallWalls should be flat and free from looseparticles. Coat the wall with an evenlayer of Trade Essentials ContactAdhesive or Laminex Wall SystemsAdhesive with sufficient coverage toensure a continuous film to provide aneffective moisture barrier. Leave tocompletely dry for 24 hours.

Fixing to WallRefer to application instructions foradhering to plasterboard and cementsheets.

HELPFUL HINTS•Check fit of profiles on Aquapanel sheets

before starting a job. Plane or sand backedge of sheet if necessary.

•Directionally embossed designs mayrequire retrimming for squarenessdepending on required installationtolerances.

• Ensure walls and corners are plumb,straight and square.

• Leave expansion gaps at all joins if buttjoining and around cut-outs.

• Seal all joins and corners with LaminexWall Systems Silicone.

• Clean off excess adhesive or silicone from the sheet surface immediately.

• Clean the sheet surface with warm water and mild liquid detergent only.

• DO NOT fit the sheet to wet or damp walls.

• DO NOT use mechanical fixing such as nails and screws without providing an expansion gap.

• DO NOT force the sheet into the fixing system past the small expansion lug.

• DO NOT fit the sheets tightly together.• DO NOT use abrasive cleaners, waxes

or polish on the sheet surface.• DO NOT attempt to align embossed

panels of opposing sheet orientation.



Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 6.7

LAMINEX FIXING SYSTEM PROFILES

Base Profile Divisional Profile Capping Profile

Internal ProfileExternal Profile

LAMINEX FIXING SYSTEMS

TYPICAL DETAIL - SHOWER TYPICAL DETAIL - BATH

50 x 25mm Timber Adhesive

Internal Corner Profile

Divisional Profile

External Corner Profile

50mm x25mmTimber

25mm(min.)

Aquapanel

Aquapanel

Silicone

Silicone

Nogging

StudWall

BathNoggings Fulllength of bath

MouldedShower Base



LOW PRESSURE LAMINATES


Laminex Structural MR®

Laminex Structural MR is a moisture resistantparticleboard, factorylaminated on both sides with ahardwearing decorativemelamine surface. Layers of Kraft paper laminatedbeneath the decorativemelamine surface give LaminexStructural MR superior impactresistance together with thewear and abrasion propertiesapproaching that of high-pressure laminate.

APPLICATIONSLaminex Structural MR® is designed forboth horizontal and vertical applicationsand has similar hardwearing attributes ofstandard laminates being resistant tonormal wear and abrasion.

It is designed for interior applicationssuch as: table tops, cupboard doors,built-in furniture, partitions, commercialshelving, office furniture, school desksand furniture and hospital fitouts.

Laminex Structural MR is also availablein the lower formaldehyde emissionlevel E0.

FIRE TESTS(Typically achieved when tested to AS/NZS 1530.3)Indices Result Range



SURFACE FINISHFlint, Natural.

DECORATIVE SURFACEPROPERTIESWhen tested in approved mannercomplies with the relevant sections ofAS/NZS 1859.3 surface properties.

RESISTANCE TO WEARSolid ColorsTypical results >700 cycles.

Patterns and WoodgrainsTypical results >150 cycles.

RESISTANCE TO STEAMNo noticeable permeability effects.

RESISTANCE TO DRY HEATWhen Structural MR is exposed totemperature higher than 180°C, slightdulling of the surface may occur.

IMPACT RESISTANCE>40 cm, in accordance with the above standard.

SHEET SIZES, THICKNESSES AND COLOURSRefer to the Laminex Product Availability Chart.

GREENfirst PRODUCTLaminex Structural MRE0 is a Greenfirstproduct and is certifiedby Good EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.



Board Product: Site Work NotesAppendix 3. Handling & Product ApplicationSection 9:3

Board Product: Shelf LoadingsAppendix 3. Handling & Product ApplicationSection 9:3



LA-2008GECA 28-2006–




Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 8.1

Laminex® Stainless SteelLaminex Brushed StainlessSteel and Steel Wave are high-pressure laminatesmanufactured with genuinestainless steel metallic foils.They are resistant to solvents,chemicals and householdreagents and have an extremelyhard wearing surface. LaminexBrushed Stainless Steellaminate is also post formable.Special fabrication conditionsapply as a consequence of thephysical properties of stainlesssteel foils.

APPLICATIONSLaminex® stainless steel laminates aresuitable for both vertical and horizontalapplications such as feature panelling,benches, table tops, bar tops, doors,exhibition stands, shopfitting or any areawhere a decorative metal look isrequired.They are not suitable forexterior applications.

PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICSSizes:Brushed Stainless Steel 2400 mm x 1000 mmSteel Wave 2400 mm x 1200 mmThickness:Brushed Stainless Steel 0.8 mmSteel Wave 1.0 mmWeight:Brushed Stainless Steel 1.7 kg per m2 approx.Steel Wave 1.9 kg/m2 approx.

* Steel Wave laminate has a seam join down the centre ofthe sheet

FIRE TESTS(Typically achieved when tested toAS/NZS 1530.3)Indices Result RangeIgnitability 0 0-20Spread of Flame 0 0-10Heat Evolved 0 0-10Smoke Developed 0 0-10

Cone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837(Irradiance of 50kW/m2)Classification Result* Unit/RangeGroup Number 1 1-3Average Specific 80.3 m2 / kgExtinction Area* 0.8mm Laminate unadhered

WHEN SPECIFYINGSurfacing shall be Laminex Metalliclaminate as supplied by The LaminexGroup. Colour/Finish shall be ..........

CARE AND MAINTENANCEAlthough Laminex stainless steellaminates are resistant to most commonhousehold chemicals and solvents, it isgood practice to always clean up spills asthey occur. Avoid the use of abrasivecleaners for routine maintenance, eventhose in liquid form.

Laminex stainless steel laminates shouldonly be cleaned with a soft, moist clothor moist chamois leather and then driedwith a soft, dry cloth. For morepersistent marks, use a blue windowcleaner such as Extra Strength Windex™

or methylated spirits. Proprietarystainless steel cleaner can also be used ifnecessary.

Do not place hot objects on stainlesssteel laminate benchtop surfaces – alwaysuse insulating mats. Laminex stainless steellaminates should not be exposed totemperatures in excess of 80ºC.

Just as for solid stainless steel sheeting,Laminex stainless steel laminates willscratch under certain conditions. Nevercut on the surface and use protectivemats in high traffic areas to minimise thelikelihood of scratching. Always liftobjects on or off the surface, do notslide or drag.

Keep strong chemicals away from thesurface – even stainless steel cancorrode if exposed to the wrongreagents. Apart from the cleaningrecommendations given above, a goodrule of thumb is that if the substance inquestion doesn’t go into food, then itshould not come into contact with thelaminate surface.

SITE WORK NOTESSpecial machining requirements arenecessary for fabricating Laminexstainless steel laminates (see informationcontained within the following pages)therefore it is not practical to carry outon-site fabrication. It is critical that thedesign for any particular applicationrelies on shop machining, with onlyminimal on site finishing to be employed.



Laminex stainless steel laminates aresupplied with a protective film on thesurface.This should be left intact duringtransport, handling and fabrication. In thecase of Brushed Stainless Steel, theprotective coating can be left on duringpost forming.

Warning: do not expose the stainlesssteel laminate with protective film toprolonged periods of direct UVexposure, as this will cause the filmadhesive to harden, making removaldifficult. If for any reason the filmbecomes firmly adhered to the laminatesurface, removal may be facilitated bythe gentle application of hot air tosoften the adhesive. It is only necessaryto heat the laminate so that it feelswarm at the back – care must be takennot to heat the laminate above 80ºC.Residual adhesive may be removed usingacetone or petroleum based solvents.

FABRICATIONLaminex stainless steel laminates can bebonded to a range of suitable substratessuch as MDF, particleboard or plywoodusing conventional adhesives such as crosslinking PVA, contact or epoxy adhesives.

Note: Urea-formaldehyde adhesives arenot suitable.

Laminex Stainless Steel should be fullysupported when glued. Do not bonddirectly to plaster, plasterboard orconcrete.

See also other general site work notesin Appendix 1, section 9.1.

MACHININGThe tools, cutters and methods that arenormally used to process high pressurelaminates are not designed to be usedwith such a hard surface as stainlesssteel, and if applied to stainless steellaminates it will result in damagedequipment, burring of the edges of thestainless steel foil, and delamination ofthe stainless steel foil from the phenolicimpregnated kraft backing.

Machining of stainless steel laminates canbe carried out using point-to-point orsimilar routering equipment and cuttersdesigned for use with stainless steel (seebelow).

Required parts:300 x 300 Z96 Saw Blade Leitz PartNo. 68800

16mm Spiral roughing cutter Leitz partNo. 42507

18mm Up and down spiral cutter Leitzpart. No. 42538

or Leitz equivalent part.

Notes:1.The cutters detailed above are

designed for the trimming function only. All components must first be cut to a dimension no greater than 4 mm oversize to the finished dimensions. It is recommended that a waste board be clamped to the laminate surface prior to saw cutting to obviate saw "chatter" that might lead to delamination of the foil surface. Use a feed speed of 7m/min. and a blade speed of 3000 RPM.

2.Where the product is to be fabricatedinto a post formed component with a Mason's Mitre joint, then this joint section must be machined to an undersize dimension before applying the stainless steel laminate, once again ensuring a dimension of 4mm is left on for final machining.

3.The stainless steel laminate is to be cut to the same dimensions as the oversize board blanks, ensuring that any excess laminate is removed from the area of the Mason's Mitre joint location.

4. Fabricate stainless steel laminate to substrate in the normal manner.

MACHINING CRITERIAFor use with point-to-point orsimilar routers.1. Programme the head in the Z

direction to enable the cutter to continually and gradually pass verticallythrough the panel during each machining leg, from say 1mm to 10mm,depending on the panel thickness and the cutter length.This action considerably increases cutter life.

2. Cutter speed 2500 RPM (Twist direction of the tool so that the cutting edge always presses the stainlesssteel laminate against the substrate.

3. Feed speed 2 lineal metres per minute.

4. Initial cutting by 16mm spiral roughing cutter to remove 2-3 mm of waste.

5. Final machining of 1 mm (maximum) with 18mm up and down spiral-finishing cutter.

POST FORMINGLaminex Brushed Stainless Steel laminatecan be post formed down to a 10mmradius, in both longitudinal and crossdirection, using conventional postforming equipment.

It is important to be aware that thebending temperature for stainless steellaminate is much lower thanconventional laminates.

THE BENDING TEMPERATUREFOR LAMINEX BRUSHEDSTAINLESS STEEL LAMINATE ISBETWEEN 110 AND 120DEGREES CENTIGRADE.Higher temperatures will result indelamination of the surface foil from thekraft backing.The use of 114ºCtemperature indicating crayon, availablefrom The Laminex Group, isrecommended.



Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Note: Due to the lower formingtemperatures for this product, bondingfailure may be experienced when formingon continuous post forming machineswhere cross linking PVA adhesives areused. It may therefore be necessary toconsider other adhesive forms, such assprayable contact adhesive.

COLD FORMINGStainless steel laminates with non-embossed surfaces and a thickness of1mm or less, can be cold formed to thefollowing radii:• Convex bend, lengthwise or cross

direction 80mm minimum.• Concave bend lengthwise or cross

direction 130mm minimum.

These figures are based on test materialstrips 50mm in width, and representradii which can be achieved undernormal conditions, where constantpressure is distributed uniformly overthe entire surface.

Factors such as the degree of moisturein the laminate, temperature, method ofbending, and uneven pressure orsubstrate profile can all have an effect onthese results.

EDGINGIt is possible to produce edge laminatestrips from off-cut product, but it isimportant to ensure that chattering of thelaminate does not occur as the laminatepasses through the saw blade. If chatteringoccurs then minor delamination of thestainless steel foil may result.

It is preferable that any edging beproduced using a guillotine. Small toolssuch as the Virutex hand guillotine canbe used for this function. Care should betaken in determining the dimensions ofthe laminate to be guillotined due to theextremely hard nature of the stainlesssteel foil, therefore it is suggested thatminimal over trim be used, to enable afast and clean finishing off of the laminateedge to both faces of the panel.

Slight burring may be removed bycareful use of a fine file, only applyingpressure on the downward stroke in thedirection of the laminate surface toprevent delamination.

COLOUR CONSISTENCYBy their nature, the metal foils used inthe production of Laminex stainless steellaminates may vary slightly in colourfrom batch to batch.

Where colour consistency betweenadjacent panels is important, it is criticalthat manufacture dates or batchnumbers (printed on the back of thelaminate) are checked to ensure thatthey are the same.This will avoid theneed to remove protective film to checkcolour or to take special steps whereshop/warehouse lighting conditions arenot ideal.



Laminex DiamondGloss is ahigh gloss laminate with markand scuff resistance superior totraditional laminates. It may bereadily heat formed down to aradius of 8 mm in the machinedirection (MD), using specialequipment without loss ofdurability or appearance.

Laminex® DiamondGloss® Surfaces

APPLICATIONSLaminex® DiamondGloss® is widely usedfor countertops, bench tops, vanity units,bars, store fixtures and otherapplications where good appearance,resistance to marking and scuffing, andresistance to stain and heat fromordinary sources is required.

PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICSSize: 3595mm x 1395mmThickness: 0.7mm nominal

(-0.1+ 0.1mm)Weight: 1.0kg/m2 approx.Finish: High GlossColours and Refer to currentPattern Range: Product Availability

Chart

FIRE HAZARD INDICES(Typically achieved when tested toAS/NZS 1530.3)Indices Result Range


*Laminate tested free standing

Cone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837Classification ResultGroup Number# 1 Average Heat Release Rate 49.0kw/m2

Average SpecificExtinction Area+# 64.2m2/kg

+ Refer to Specification C1.10a section 3(c) of the Building Code of Australia

# Refer to Specification A2.4 of the Building Code of Australia

* Laminate tested free standing

PROPERTIES(AS/NZS 2924.1)PROPERTY RESULTS

Resistance to Initial wear not Surface Wear: less than 150 cycles.


Resistance to No more than a marked Immersion in change of gloss and/or Boiling Water: colour. Gain on weight

of not more than 19%Resistance to No more than a Dry Heat moderate change ofat 180°C: gloss and/or colourResistance to Marked change of Steam: gloss and/or colourDimensional Dimensional change Stability: of not more than



change.Reagents Groups 3 and 4 = No morethan a moderate changeof gloss and/or colour

Resistance to Not more than slightColour Change colour change in in Artificial Xenon arc lightLight*: Minimum 6 on

Blue Wool Scale

Resistance to No deterioration Cigarette Burns: other than moderate

change in gloss and/or moderate brown staining.

* Laminex DiamondGloss laminate has good colourretention and dimensional stability in normal interiorapplications. However, prolonged exposure to sunlightmay cause shrinkage and/or some change in colour.Laminex DiamondGloss laminate is therefore notrecommended for external applications or interiorapplications with prolonged exposure to direct sunlight.

SCUFF RESISTANCEMore than 95% gloss retention afterbeing scrubbed with a 3M Scotch- Brite™

Heavy Duty scouring pad attached to aSheen Model 903 Wet Abrasion ScrubTester, using 800 gram applied weight and30 scrubs.

WHEN SPECIFYING Surfacing shall be LaminexDiamondGloss laminate as supplied byThe Laminex Group. Colours and/orpatterns shall be ...........



Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 9.2

PROCESSINGBoard Substrate Bend ProfileLaminex DiamondGloss should be fullysupported when glued. Do not bonddirectly to plaster, plasterboard or concrete.The correct profile on particleboard ormedium density fibreboard can be obtainedby using specially shaped router blades witha radius not less than 8mm. Profile shouldbe uniform along the full length of theboard with none of the following faults toeither substrate or profile:1. High spots2. Bumps3. Low spots4. Ridges5. No surface dust or chips.

For consistent results it is recommendedthe profile be smooth and have a gentletaper leading into the profile from theboard’s surface.

Gluing and Bonding tipsAll high gloss laminates, due to their highreflective surface have an inherent tendencyto display undulations.To minimise thiseffect the following recommendations mayassist to provide the best results.

1. Cross linking PVA Gluing (CPVA) System:CPVA glue is a water based adhesive that when applied to a substrate causes the fiber to swell. Adding heat to the process produces steam,which exacerbates the swelling. High gloss laminates have a greater tendency to show this swelling/unevenness through to the top of the sheet.Too much glue will amplify unevenness because of the higher water content. Ensuring that glue is not applied above the required bonding level will reduce the effect; as will maintaining a uniform glue line quality and consistency. Similar to adhering all laminate, the glue line should be evenly applied avoiding lumps of glue,sawdust, chips, etc, as they may fracture the laminate when pressure is applied during bonding or cause blistering during post-forming.

Reference the adhesive manufacturer’sdirections. If the glue is not evenlydistributed, at the time of pressing,high points can be telegraphed by thegloss surface.

2. Using a Poly Urethane glue (PUR),which contains no water, will provide a better result.

3. Low temperatures and pressures on the press bonding equipment will provide best results.The lower the pressure the better the surface appearance.

It is important to note that for a given press pressure the actual pressure applied to the work piece is dependent of the size of the piece. A large piece will be exposed to less pressure than a smaller piece, if for example the press gauge pressure remains unchanged.To achieve a consistent finish calculate the pressure requirement vs work piecesize for your installed equipment (this information is generally available from the equipment manufacturer).

Using a flat surface or pad, such as 3mm MDF to press against the decorative surface provides for smoother results.

4. Maintain glue applicators to avoid contamination. Contamination may result in pressing imperfections into laminate surface. Similarly, maintain pressing surfaces free of dints and lumps.

5. Contact glue is generally not recommended for high gloss surfaces;mainly due to visual appearance of the finished laminate, which has a tendency to amplify unevenness of the glue line.The expectation of appearance and decision of acceptability is that of the customers not of The Laminex Group.

More uniform results may be achieved using spray application;however the appropriate OH&S

technique and work practices are theresponsibility of the fabricator.

FORMING PROFILELaminex DiamondGloss grade isdesigned to be post-formed usingcommercially specific post-formingmachines.• Forming to an 8mm radius in the

machine direction (MD) is recommended.

• Forming in the cross direction (CD) / ”end roll”, is not recommended.(Guideline for the CD radius is 15 timesthe individual laminate sheet thickness.Choosing to form an end roll in the CD of the laminate is the decision of the fabricator).

Laminex DiamondGloss grade has verygood operating tolerance between theheat required to bend and theadditional heat exposure time requiredbefore the laminate blisters.Theaverage tolerance between, heat timeexposure to bend is approximately 20to 28 seconds and the additional timeto blister is approximately 15 to 30seconds.

PROFILE TIPS• Determining the heat-up rate control

becomes important to the thinner, thelaminate, and Laminex DiamondGloss is no exception.With reference to thetemperature indicator 163ºC tempilaq, set the heat up rate to achieve melt in 26 to 28 seconds.With the heat-up rate set, 8mm or 10mm radius bends may be achieved slightly before tempilaq at 22 to 25 seconds. Note if the heat-up rate of the laminate is too rapid, overshoots or if heat applied is variable random failure due to blistering may occur.

• As a safeguard against this, it isrecommended that regular heat up time checks are undertaken to track machine performance, temperature control fluctuations (i.e. overshoot,undershoot and stability).



Note: The sheet thickness, as well asambient temperature and drafts close tothe work piece, board temperature orspeed of movement of forming mayaffect uniform heating and overall heatingtime over the distance of the profile.

MAKING THE BENDFirstly, the ends of the laminate sheet8cm either side of the centre line of thebend should be filed smooth to removeany edge chips or small cracks. Removalof these will help prevent any largercracks from propagating into the sheetwhen bending.

Accurately locate the laminate andboard in the forming machine so thatthe bend is made in the correctposition, not attempting to pull thelaminate around the profile under toomuch tension.

If too much tension is developed on thebend, tension cracks along both top andbottom radius may occur. This crackingis usually evident immediately after thetop is removed from the machine.

Too little pressure will leave a gapbetween the laminate and the board,leaving this susceptible to impactcracking.

PROBLEM SOLVINGThe most common problems in post-forming are normally caused by:

Cracks:Contaminated and/or uneven substrate,unsuitable profile, unsanded roughprofile, or cold substrate, insufficientheat, uneven heat distribution or heat uprate requires optimising.

Blisters:Uneven heat distribution, warpedmaterial, too much heat or too fast heatup rate, too much or unevenlydistributed CPVA.

Delamination:Insufficient heat, Insufficient suitableadhesive, insufficient bonding.

PROTECTIVE FILMLaminex DiamondGloss grade issupplied with a Polyester protectivefilm which provides a protective layerto the high gloss surface for transportand handling.The film can be heatedwhen the laminate is subjected topost-forming processes and can bereleased afterwards.

During film application some smallparticles may become trapped betweenthe laminate and film.These particles cancause an indentation when the laminateis subjected to press bonding. It isrecommended that the surface isinspected and any specks removed priorto pressing. Consequently the film maybe removed and the laminate cleanedprior to pressing and post-forming andthen the finished laminated work piecerecovered for delivery to the worksite.

The Polyester film has a shelf life and canbe difficult to remove after nine monthsfrom application to the laminate, this isthe nature of the film.It is recommended that if laminate is tobe stocked at the fabricators for anextended period the film be removed.

This information is intended as a guideand should not necessarily be regardedas applying to all situations. It is thereforeadvised that if problems arise which arenot covered, then the technical servicessection of The Laminex Group shouldbe contacted through your local branch.

The data in here is believed to beaccurate to the best of our knowledge,but users should carry out their ownassessment of the product to satisfythemselves that it is suitable for theirrequirements.





Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s

Section 5: 10.1

5

Laminex Fusion Surfaces is arevolutionary new concept insurface design. Fusion surfacesoffer design professionalsgreater choice, flexibility andease-of-use than ever before.You can choose from hundredsof exclusive designs andcolours. Or, design your ownimage (called Customart). AllFusion laminates are custommade in quantities of one sheetto thousands.

APPLICATIONSLaminex Fusion Surfaces have wideinterior application in all segments,wherever there is a surface. Examplesinclude: benchtops, table tops, wallpaneling, reception desks, retail displays,furniture, P.O.S. displays, toilet partitions,cupboard doors, wall murals etc.

GRADES OF FUSIONLAMINATES AVAILABLE:Standard Laminate– 1mm general purpose laminate (non postforming).

Laminex Fusion Standard Laminate mustbe fully supported when bonded tosubstrates such as particleboard ormedium density fibreboard. Do notdirectly bond Fusion Standard Laminateto plaster, plasterboard or concrete.

PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICSSheet Size: 3600mm x 1200mm(nominal)Thickness: 1.0mm - 13.0mm(nominal)Weight: 1.0mm: 1.7kg/m2 approx.

2.7mm: 4.4kg/m2 approx.6.0mm: 9.9kg/m2 approx.13.0mm: 13kg/m2 approx.

Finish: Natural, Gloss,Dimensions

Fusion Standard Laminate - laminatetested to AS/NZS 2924.1 and ISO 4586.1

PROPERTIES(AS/NZS 2924.1)PROPERTY RESULTS

Resistance to Initial surface wear not Wear: less than 150 cycles.


Resistance to Minimal blistering Immersion in evident. No delaminationBoiling Water:Resistance to No deterioration Dry Heat other than slight loss at 180°C: of gloss/colour.Resistance to No deterioration Steam: other than slight loss

of gloss/colour.Dimensional Dimensional change Stability: of not more than



change.Reagents Groups 3 and 4 = Slight changeof colour and/or gloss.

Resistance to Not more than slightColour Change colour change in in Artificial Xenon arc lightLight*: Minimum 6 on

Blue Wool ScaleResistance to No deterioration Cigarette Burns: other than moderate

change in gloss and moderate brown staining.

* Fusion Standard Laminate has good colour retention innormal interior applications. However prolongedexposure to sunlight may cause some change in colour.Fusion Surfaces Standard Laminate is therefore notrecommended for exterior applications.

FIRE TESTSTypically achieved when tested toAS/NZS 1530.3Indices Result Range

* **Ignitability 14 12 0-20Spread of Flame 5 0 0-10Heat Evolved 4 2 0-10Smoke Developed 5 4 0-10

* Laminate adhered to 33mm particleboard withneoprene adhesive.

** Laminate adhered to non combustible substrate

Typically achieved when tested to AS/NZS 3837 (Cone Calorimeter Irradianceof 50kW/m2)Classification Result* Unit/RangeGroup Number 1 1-3Average Specific 136.9 m2 / kgExtinction Area* Laminate unadhered

GREENfirstPRODUCTLaminex FusionSurfaces is a Greenfirst™

product and is certifiedby Good EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentally preferable.

Laminex®Fusion® Surfaces




Aquapanel Wall lining panel for both wet and dryareas.

For product applications andcharacteristics see the Aquapanel section5.6 within this Product Catalogue.Nominal thickness is 2.7mm.

Compact Laminate A self-supporting strong, highly durablepanel.

For product applications andcharacteristics see Compact Laminatesection 5.11 within this ProductCatalogue. Nominal thicknesses are6.0mm and 13.0mm.

Sign Grade Designed for single sided or double-sided Customart signage applications.Product characteristics are as perAquapanel (Section 5.6 within thisproduct catalogue). Nominal thickness is2.7mm.

WHEN SPECIFYINGSurface material shall be Fusion Surfaceslaminate as manufactured by The Laminex Group. Surface design shallbe either (Fusion surfaces design # FD........ or customart design). Forinformation or to place orders go tolaminex.com.au.




COMPACT LAMINATES


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 11.1

Laminex® Compact LaminatesLaminex® Compact Laminatesare an innovative and durabledecorative panel made fromthermosetting resins,homogeneously reinforced withcellulose fibres andmanufactured under highpressure and temperature.Assuch, the panels are strong, selfsupporting, moisture resistantand durable.

Laminex Compact Laminates come inthree ranges, each with its own particularproperties, applications, and colours.Multipurpose Compact Laminates,Innovations Compact Laminates, andLaboratory Compact Laminates.

MULTIPURPOSE COMPACTLAMINATESFinish Natural Colours 27 Standard Colours Fire Resistance Not Standard Thickness 13mm x 27 colours

18mm x 4 colours Decorated Double SidedCore Black Panel Dimension 3670x1820mmApplications: Shower & Toilet Cubicles,

Office Worktops, InteriorWall Cladding, Lockers,Kitchen Benchtops & Cabinetry, Educational Furniture, Durable Furniture

INNOVATIONS COMPACTLAMINATESFinish Natural Colours 6 Standard Colours Fire Resistance Not Standard Thickness 13mmDecorated Double Sided Core Black Panel Dimension 3670x1820mmApplications: Same as Multipurpose

Compact Laminates

Finish Natural Colours 3 Standard Colours Fire Resistance Not Standard Thickness 16mmDecorated Single Sided

Core Black Panel 2550x1860mmDimension 3050x1530mmApplications: Laboratory Worktops,

Laboratory Furniture

PROPERTIES

LABORATORY COMPACT LAMINATES

Physical Properties Specific Gravity (mimimum) kg/m3 1350 1350 1350 EN 438-4Weight 13 mm thickness kg/m2 18.5 18.5 -Weight 16 mm thickness kg/m2 - - 22.5Weight 18 mm thickness kg/m2 25.2 - -Panel Tolerance EN 438-4Length mm ± 5 ± 5 ± 5Width mm ± 5 ± 5 ± 5Thickness 13 mm mm ± 0.60 ± 0.60 ± 0.60Thickness 16 mm & 18 mm mm ± 0.70 ± 0.70 ± 0.70Flatness mm/m ≤ 3 ≤ 3 ≤ 3Optical Properties AS/NZS 2924.1Colour Stabilities Grey Scale Minimum 4 Minimum 4 Minimum 4

Blue Wool Scale Minimum 6 Minimum 6 Minimum 6Stain Resistance Groups 1 and 2 Rating Pass Pass PassStain Resistance Groups 3 and 4 Rating Pass Pass PassMechanical PropertiesModulus of Elasticity Mpa ? 9000 ? 9000 ? 9000 EN 438-4Tensile Strength Mpa ? 60 ? 60 ? 60 EN 438-4Flexural Strength Mpa ? 80 ? 80 ? 80 EN 438-4Craze Resistance Rating Pass Pass Pass AS/NZS 2924.1Impact Resistance cm Pass Pass Pass AS/NZS 2924.1Immersion in Boiling Water - Pass Pass Pass AS/NZS 2924.1Scratch Resistance# N Pass Pass Pass AS/NZS 2924.1Stability at elevated temperature % Pass Pass Pass AS/NZS 2924.1Wear Resistance Cycles Pass Pass Pass AS/NZS 2924.1Wet Heat Resistance at 100 °C Rating Pass Pass Pass EN 438-4Steam Resistance Rating Pass Pass Pass AS/NZS 2924.1Thermal Properties Thermal Conductivity Coefficient W/mK ± 0.3 ± 0.3 ± 0.3 DIN 52612Cigarette Burns Rating Pass Pass Pass AS/NZS 2924.1Dry Heat at 180 °C Rating Pass Pass Pass AS/NZS 2924.1Fire Properties Fire Hazard Indicies Range AS/NZS 1530.3Ignitability 0 - 20 10 12Spread of Flame 0 - 10 0 0Heat Evolved 0 - 10 2 4Smoke Developed 0 - 10 4 3Cone Calorimeter Group Number 1 - 3 3 3Average Specific Extinction Area m2/kg 8 31* AS/NZS 2924.1: compact general purpose standard (CGS) material type.# Minimum 1N for darker colours

Property Unit Standard*Compact Laminates Material Properties

Multipurpose Innovations Laboratory

COMPACT LAMINATES


WHEN SPECIFYING Materials shall be Laminex Multipurpose,Innovations, or Laboratory CompactLaminates of nominal thickness of ..........mm, as supplied by The Laminex Group.Colour shall be .................................................................................................

Laminex Compact Laminates areincluded in the Greenfirst range ofenvironmentally preferable products.

SITE WORK NOTES FabricationLaminexCompact Laminates can be cut,drilled and machined with standardwoodworking equipment fitted withtungsten carbide edges. Surface mountedobjects should be secured using self-tapping screws in pre-drilled holes.

Screws into the edges should be avoided.

Metal brackets are recommended forsecuring the panels together. Mitring ofedges should be avoided as they arevulnerable to damage.

Standard tools for hardwood can beused for machining or processing suchas sawing, drilling and routing. Neitherthe surface nor the sawn edges need tobe protected or sealed. Panels willpresent a distinctive black edge.

CUTTING DOORS OR PANELSCompact Laminate is a wood basedproduct and it’s movement is influencedby humidity absorption.

Similarly to other laminates; CompactLaminates will expand more in the widththan in the length due to the graindirection of the cellulose fibres in thepaper-paper core.

To minimise warpage of doors andpanels it is recommended that panelsmust be cut with the long edge parallelto the length of the sheet.Warpage

occurs when both sides of a door orpanel are not exposed to the samehumidity level.

The longer a sheet is, the larger theimpact of warpage will be. Ensure as faras possible that ambient conditions arethe same on each side of a panel whereit is used, mounted on a wall orenclosing a cabinet for example.

Incorrect:door cut out of width of a sheet,warpage vertically

Correct:door cut out of length of a sheet,warpage horizontally

Note: An exception is when CompactLaminate is used for sash doors.Thepanels have to be cut out of the widthof the basic sheets instead of the length.If a sash door is cut out of the length ofa sheet the horizontal bow will interferewith the sliding action of the door. It ispreferable to have a vertical bow for thisapplication and cutting out of the widthof the basic sheet is recommended.

GLUEINGCompact panels can be glued to eachother and to almost any other materialwith one or two part adhesives, e.g.epoxy or polyurethane adhesive systems,

Glueing is usually carried out togetherwith a mechanical joint to providesufficient pressing during drying.

Glue Type Epoxy/Polyurethane Application 100-250 g/m2

Open Time Depends on typeApplication Pressure 0.2 N/mm2

Time 4-8 hours at 20ºC

Front view

Front view

Top view

Side view

lowhumidity

highhumidity

lowhumidity

highhumidity✗

✗

✓

COMPACT LAMINATES


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 11.3

Please follow the instructions below forthickening the edges of panels.

Panels and strips must have the same"grain direction".

Panels, strips and adhesive must be pre-conditioned in the same way(temperature and humidity preferably thesame as the future conditions of use).

Remove grease from surfaces to beglued, slightly roughen them and ensurethey are dust-free.

PROCESSING (Sawing)Stationary circular saw.The followingrequirements are required:

Section 300mm 350mm 400mmTeeth 72 84 96Number of Revolutions 6,000 5,000 4,000Blade Thickness 3.4mm 4.0mm 4.8mmHeight Setting 30mm 35mm 40mm

Feed - 7 -22 m/min.Tooth - Alternate or trapezoidial flat tooth with carbide or diamond tip.

Jig saw - Carbide-tipped, interior cornersof cut-outs should be drilled first with 6mm hole diameter.

Entering tooth - At the decorative sideof the panel if only this side will be inview.

Cut edges - The best results are obtainedwith stationary machines. Any sharpedges can be removed with sand paper.

Rake angle - A rake angle of 45° givesthe best performance.

Corner profiles - First cut to length, thensaw to the correct length. Measure thelength of leg from the corner.

Routering - If panels are supplied with aprotective film do not remove it untilthese are assembled. If the film burns ormelts during routering, remove only thefilm in the edge areas.

Manually operated routing cutter

Manually operated spindle moulder

Diameter 20-25mmNumber of Revolutions 18,000-24,000Speed 20-30m/sec

Diameter 125mmNumber of Revolutions 6,000-9,000Speed 40-60m/secStart 5-15 m/min

Routering shapes • Straight and slanted bits for cutting

edges and bevelling.• Hollow or round bits for rounded

edges.• Diamond groove-circular saw

blades for grooves.

Materials - Cutters made of hard metalor diamond.

DRILLINGHSS drill, top angle 60-80°. Panels shouldbe drilled with support sheets.

Section 5mm 8mm 10mmNumber of Revolutions 3,000 2,000 1,500Start 60-120 40-80 30-60

mm/min mm/min mm/min

Large holes, e.g. for suspension andlocking equipment, are to be drilled withcombination drills without a centeringpoint.

Saw-blade height

Alternate toothTrapezoidialflat tooth

Edge cutter

Groove-circular saw

COMPACT LAMINATES


INTERSECTIONS

JOINTS

SPLASHBACKS

External Corner

Internal Corner

T-Intersection

Pass-through Objects




EDGES & NOSINGS

Built-Up Edge

Edge with Sliding Doors

Standard Edge

COMPACT LAMINATES


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 11.5

CARE & CLEANINGThe non-porous surface is easy to clean.For general cleaning of standard interiorapplications, household cleaners, wateror soap are highly recommended.Theuse of abrasive or polishing materialsshould not be used.

Both the decorative surface andhomogenous core of Laminex CompactLaminates are impervious and resistantto most commonly used cleaning agentsand disinfectants.

The surfaces of Laminex CompactLaminates furniture can be easily cleanedwith a dry or damp cloth and, if necessary,a mild household cleaner. Wipe dampsurfaces with an absorbent cloth.

Alternatively, the panels can be steamcleaned.

Removing Severe SoilingSeverely dirty surfaces or areas wherenormal soiling* has built up over a longperiod of time are easy to clean withhot water and an interior detergent- orsoap-based cleaning agent, applied with asponge or soft nylon brush.

Apply the diluted cleaning agent to thesurface and leave it to soak for a while.Then rinse off with clean water and drywith an absorbent cloth.

* dust, pencil, ball pen, ink, coffee, tea, fruit juice, lipstick,grease, nicotine stains, shoe polish, soap residues, limescale,water-soluble paints and adhesives.

Removing Special StainingSolvent-based varnishes and adhesives(nail varnish, rubber stamp ink, aerosolpaint) should be removed with organicsolvents such as acetone, white spirit,turpentine or petroleum.

Remove wax from candles or crayonsimmediately with water and a mildhousehold cleaning agent. Dried waxstains may first have to be scraped offwith a wooden or plastic spatula and theremainder removed with an organic solvent.

Two part paint or adhesive, syntheticresin and the like should be removedimmediately with water or an organicsolvent. Once these products have set,they cannot be removed withoutdamaging the surface.

Limescale can be removed with acidiccleaning agents containing approximately10% acetic acid or citric acid.

The manufacturer's instructions must bestrictly followed. Rinse surfaces andedges very thoroughly!

Paint, varnish, ink, shoe polish, lipstick, tarand other soluble (but strong stains) canbe removed with organic solvents suchas acetone, white spirit, turpentine orpetroleum.

Rub silicone off dry or use siliconeremover.

Both the decorative surface and core ofLaminex Compact Laminates are highlyresistant to most commonly-useddisinfectants such as:• alcohol, preferably up to 70% solution

in water.• aldehydes, although not in, or in

combination with, quartenary ammonia compounds.

• chlorine blending compounds.

(However, long term use of theseproducts can cause certain pigments tofade.)

• phenols, not to be used for kitchen disinfection.

• peroxide compounds (hydrogen peroxide and organic peracids)

• quarternary ammonium compounds

Some manufacturers offer productscontaining both cleaning and disinfectingcomponents.These are known asdetergent sanitisers, and are intended forsimultaneous cleaning and disinfection oflight to medium soiled surfaces in roomswhere there is no great risk of infection.

HANDLING & STORAGEDuring transportation, use flat, stablepallets of at least the same dimensionsas the panel.

When moving a sheet, lift it to preventscratches on the surface.

The sheets should be stored in anenclosed area, protected againstmoisture and heat.

For horizontal storage on pallets, thesheets should be supported over theentire surface with a protective layerbetween the pallet and the bottomsheet and also on the uppermost sheet.

For vertical storage the sheets should beplaced on their sides, exactly vertical andbe supported over the full height.

Remove stickers before installation.

COMPACT LAMINATES


LAMINEX LABORATORY COMPACT LAMINATEChemical Resistance

No effect Excellent Good Fair FailureAcidHydrochloric Acid 37% XSulphuric Acid 33% XSulphuric Acid 98% XNitric Acid 20% XNitric Acid 30% XNitric Acid 65% XPhosphoric Acid 85% XAcetic Acid 99% XHydrofluoric Acid 48% XChromic Acid 60% XBasesAmmonium hydroxide 28% XSodium hydroxide 46% XSaltSilver Nitrate 1% XPotassium permanganate 10% XFerric (III) chloride 10% XCopper Sulphate 10% XSodium hypochlorite 13% XSodium chloride 10% XOrganic ChemicalsFormaldehyde 37% XFurfural XPhenol 85% v/v water XSolvents**Acetone XEthylalcohol XEthylene glycol XMethylethyketone XDichloromethane XEthylacetate XAcetic anhydride Xn-Butyl acetate Xn-Hexane XMethylalcohol XMethylisobutylketone XTeyrahydrofurane XToulene XTrichloroethylene XXylene XBiological StainAcridine orange 1% XBasic fuchsin 1% XCarbol fuchsin 1% XMalachite green oxalate 1% XMethylene blue 1% XMethyl violet 2B 1% XWright stain 1% XGentian violet (dye) 1% XHalogensIodine 0.05M XMost conventional cleaning agents X

Test Procedure:The test was conducted by applying 5 drops of each reagent on the surface covered with a watchglass (except for those marked**). Chemicals marked ** were tested using a saturatedcotton wool ball covered by a bottle.The chemicals were tested over a period of 24 hours, rinsed off with water and evaluated. No effect: No detected stain, loss of gloss or change in work surfacematerial. Excellent: Slight stain or loss of gloss, but no change to the function, smoothness of life of the work surface material. Good: A clearly discernible stain or loss of gloss, but no change to thefunction, smoothness or life of the work surface material. Fair: Unacceptable staining or discernible deterioration or etching of the work surface material. Failure: Severe stain or moderate deterioration,pitting cratering or etching of work surface material. All information is based on our current knowledge. It is intended as information concerning our products and their application possibilities, and istherefore not intended for any form of guarantee with regard to any specific product characteristic.Test results differ per colour. Please note: Laminex Laboratory Compact Laminate samples are availableupon request.We recommend that you test the Laminex Laboratory Compact Laminate material in situ with the chemical most likely to be in contact with the product before purchasing.



Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 12.1

Laminex Vertiboard®

Laminex Vertiboard is apredecorated particleboardsubstrate with a hardwearingmelamine surface on both sides.

APPLICATIONSVertiboard® can be used in all applicationsaway from high humidity, such as wallunits, built-in furniture, bedroom furniture,shelving and wall lining.

Vertiboard is also available in the lowerformaldehyde emission level E0.

COLOURSA full range of colours, patterns andwoodgrains are available. Please checkyour local branch for availability.

SURFACE PROPERTIESVertiboard, when tested in approvedmanner complies with the relevantsections of AS/NZS 1859.3 substrateproperties as follows:

FINISHFlint and Natural.






SHEET SIZES AND THICKNESSESRefer to the Laminex Product Availability Chart.

GREENfirst PRODUCTLaminex Vertiboard E0is a Greenfirst™ productand is certified byGood EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.

SUBSTRATE PROPERTIES(Typical physical properties when tested to AS/NZS 1859.2-2001 Int.)

THICKNESS RANGE & TYPICAL VALUESSpecifications Units 9-12mm 13-22mm 23-33mm >33mm

Thickness Tolerance mm +/-0.2 +/-0.3 +/-0.3 +/-0.3Density kg/m3 660 640 610 580Internal Bond MPa 0.60 0.60 0.50 0.30Modulus of Rapture MPa 14.5 14.5 13.5 9.5Modulus of Elasticity MPa 2300 2200 2100 1700Surface Soundness MPa 1.0 1.2 1.2 0.9Screw Holding, Face N 600 600 600Screw Holding, Edge N 700 700 700Thickness Swell (24hr) % <12 <12 <12 <12

* Values reflect new testing methods for screw holding properties in AS/NZS 4266.13-2001 (Int).In most instances the performance characteristics of the particleboard exceeds the minimum requirement of AS/NZS1859.1-2001 (Int). However for minimum property values refer to AS/NZS 1859.1-2001 (Int).

WEIGHTThickness 9mm 12mm 16mm 18mm 25mm 33mm

kg per m2 6.0 7.8 10.4 11.5 15.5 20.1




IMPORTANT NOTEA slight variation exists between finishes on Laminexmelamine faced board products (Lamiwood MR,Decorwood,Vertiboard,Vertiboard MR, Structural andContour Doors) and the Laminex high-pressurelaminate products.

LA-2008GECA 28-2006–




Section 5: 13.1

Laminex Vertiboard MR®

Laminex Vertiboard MR is amoisture resistantparticleboard, factorylaminated on both sides with ahardwearing melaminedecorative surface.The superiorperformance of Vertiboard MRis due to the bonding of thewood particles with a specially blended moisture resistant resin system.

APPLICATIONSVertiboard MR® is suitable for use in the following applications: Kitchencupboards, laundry cupboards, vanity units,shelving, wall linings, partitions, built-infurniture, all detail joinery where a moistureresistant decorative board is required.Vertiboard MR is also available in thelower formaldehyde emission level E0.

COLOURSA full range of colours, patterns andwoodgrains are available. Please checkyour local branch for availability.

FINISHFlint, Natural, Satin.

MOISTURE RESISTANCELaminex Vertiboard MR complies with theWet Cyclic Test for moisture resistanceproperties as specified in AS/NZS 1859.1.Refer to Properties table for details.

RESISTANCE TO WEARSolid ColorsTypical results >700 cycles.Patterns and WoodgrainsTypical results >150 cycles.

DECORATIVE SURFACEPROPERTIESWhen tested in approved mannercomplies with the relevant sections ofAS/NZS 1859.3 ref to substrate surfaceproperties table:





SHEET SIZES AND THICKNESSESRefer to the Laminex Product AvailabilityChart.

GREENfirst PRODUCTLaminex Vertiboard MR E0 is aGreenfirst™ product and is certified byGood Environmental Choice Australia asenvironmentally preferable.

SUBSTRATE PROPERTIES(Typical physical properties when tested to AS/NZS 1859.1)

THICKNESS RANGE & TYPICAL VALUESSpecifications Units 9-12mm 13-22mm 23-33mm >33mm

Thickness Tolerance mm +/-0.2 +/-0.3 +/-0.3 +/-0.3Density kg/m3 660 640 610 630Internal Bond MPa 1.00 0.80 0.70 0.60Modulus of Rapture MPa 20.0 17.0 15.5 17.5Modulus of Elasticity MPa 2700 2300 2400 3000Surface Soundness MPa 2.0 1.6 1.6 1.7Screw Holding, Face N 700 800 800Screw Holding, Edge N 900 900 900Thickness Swell (24hr) % <5 <6 <5 <5Wet Bending Strength (Me) MPa 5.5 4.5 4.5 5.5

* Values reflect new testing methods for screw holding properties in AS/NZS 4266.13In most instances the performance characteristics of the particleboard exceeds the minimum requirement of AS/NZS 1859. However for minimum property values refer to AS/NZS 1859.1.


kg per m2 6.0 7.8 10.4 11.5 15.5 20.1



Laminate Product: Care & MaintenanceAppendix 2. General Care and Maintenance, Section 9:2

Board Product: Site Work NotesAppendix 3. Handling & Product Application, Section 9:3


LA-2008GECA 28-2006–




Section 5: 14.1

Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Laminex Lamiwood MR®

Laminex Lamiwood MR is amoisture resistant mediumdensity fibreboard, factorybonded with hardwearingmelamine impregnateddecorative paper to bothsides, suitable for use in areasof high humidity or whereaccidental wetting may occur.However, Lamiwood is a woodbased panel and will react tochanges in moisture as willnatural timber.

APPLICATIONSLamiwood is designed for interior use,such as kitchen cupboards, doors,bathroom vanities, laundry cupboards,shelving, wall panelling and allcommercial and domestic furniture.

Lamiwood can be machined and facerouted with all conventional woodworking tools achieving clean sharp edges.

Lamiwood is available in most of theLaminex range of colours, patterns andwoodgrains. Lamiwood is also availablein the lower formaldehyde emissionlevel E0.

DECORATIVE SURFACEPROPERTIESLamiwood, when tested in approved mannercomplies with the relevant sections of AS/NZS 1859.3 for surface properties.


Prints and WoodgrainsTypical results >150 cycles.

Resistance to SteamNo noticeable permeability effects.

FIRE TESTS(Typically achieved when tested to

AS/NZS 1530.3)Indices Result Range




FINISHFlint, Mineral, Natural.


THICKNESS

Property Unit 9mm- 13mm- 23mm-12mm 22mm 33mm

Thickness Tolerance mm +/- 0.2 +/- 0.3 +/- 0.3Density kg/m3 760 730 710Internal bond MPa 1.00 0.90 0.70Modulus of Rapture MPa 46.0 43.0 38.5Modulus of Elasticity MPa 3600 3600 3400Surface Soundness MPa 1.3 1.7 1.8Screw Holding, Face N 1000 1000Screw Holding, Edge N 1600 1600Thickness Swell (24hr) % <7 <4 <4Wet Bending Strength (Me) MPa 10.5 9.7 8.5

* Values reflect new testing methods (Method A) for screw holding properties in AS/NZS 4266.13


kg per m2 6.9 9.0 11.7 13.1 18.0 23.0



Section 5: 14.2

MOISTURE RESISTANCELaminex Lamiwood MR complies withmoisture resistance properties asspecified in AS/NZS 1859.2. Refer toSubstrate Properties table.

GREENfirst PRODUCTLaminex Lamiwood MRis a Greenfirst™ productand is certified byGood EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.







LA-2008GECA 28-2006–




Section 5: 15.1

Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Laminex Decorwood®

Laminex Decorwood is amedium density fibreboardbonded on both sides with ahardwearing melaminedecorative surface. Decorwoodcan be machined and facerouted using conventionalwood working tools. However,Decorwood is a wood basedpanel and will react to changesin moisture as will naturaltimber.

APPLICATIONSDecorwood® can be used in thefollowing applications, in all areas awayfrom high humidity, such as wall units, bedroom furniture,office furniture, wall lining, shelving.

Decorwood is also available in the lowerformaldehyde emission level E0.

Note:Laminex Decorwood is for interior useonly and should not be exposed todamp conditions or high humidity.

DECORATIVE SURFACEPROPERTIESDecorwood, when tested in approvedmanner complies with the relevantsections of AS/NZS 1859.3 as persubstrate properties table below:




COLOURSDecorwood comes in a limited range ofcolours. Please contact your local branchfor availability.

FINISHFlint, Natural, Mineral.


GREENfirst PRODUCTLaminex Decorwood isa Greenfirst™ productand is certified byGood EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.


THICKNESS

Specifications Unit 5mm- 9mm- 13mm- 23mm-8mm 12mm 22mm 33mm

Thickness Tolerance mm mm +/-0.2 mm +/-0.2 mm +/-0.3 mm +/-0.3Density kg/m3 780 760 730 720Internal Bond MPa 0.90 0.75 0.60 0.50Modulus of Rapture MPa 40.0 38.5 34.5 31.0Modulus of Elasticity MPa 3500 3600 3400 3400Surface Soundness MPa 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.4Screw Holding, Face N 800 800Screw Holding, Edge N 1000 1000Thickness Swell (24hr) % <16 <10 <6 <6

* Values reflect new testing methods for screw holding properties in AS/NZS 4266.13


kg per m2 6.9 9.0 11.7 13.1 18.0 23.0

LA-2008GECA 28-2006–




Section 5: 15.2

FIRE TESTS(Typically achieved when tested to AS/NZS 1530.3)

Indices Result RangeIgnitability 14 0-20Spread of Flame 8 0-10Heat Evolved 7 0-10Smoke Developed 4 0-10








Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5


TIMBER VENEERS

Section 5: 16.1

Laminex® Finished Designed Timber VeneersLaminex® Finished DesignedTimber Veneer is amultilaminar wood veneer pre-finished with a polyurethanecoating. It unites the beauty ofreal wood with the practicalityof a high pressure laminate.Each timber veneer has aspecifically designed surfacefinish ranging from texturedand tactile effects to a deepgloss that enhances the beautyof the veneer.

PRODUCT OPTIONSLaminex® Finished Designed TimberVeneers are available in the followingoptions:• Timber Veneer laminate sheets

(1mm thick)– Sheet size is 2440mm x 1220mm

• Pre-laminated MDF Panels (19mm finished thickness)– MDF MR panels size is 2400mm x

1200mm (veneer on front face and white laminate on back).

– MDF MR panels with veneer on two sides are made to order.

– Other panel options including STD MDF and particleboard panels are available as a special order.

• Edging 0.55mm thick– 22mm wide unglued edging is

available for all species in a matchingfinish.

• Doors and Drawers – Made to measure and finished as a

square edge profile.– Made to measure doors, drawers &

panels can be specified as horizontalgrain.

APPLICATIONSLaminex Finished Designed TimberVeneer is suitable for both commercialand residential interior applications andfor use on vertical and light usehorizontal applications. It can be used tomake tables, furniture and general joinery. It is not recommended for highwear applications such as kitchenbenchtops.

Laminex Finished Designed TimberVeneer laminate has good colourretention and dimensional stability innormal interior applications. However,prolonged exposure to sunlight maycause shrinkage and/or some change incolour.

Laminex Finished Designed TimberVeneer laminate is therefore notrecommended for external applicationsor interior applications with prolongedexposure to direct sunlight.

TECHNICAL PROPERTIES (This table shows typical values when tested by a NATA accredited laboratory)

Wax & Sandblasted Finish Gloss Finish

Nominal Thickness 1.0mm 1.0mmSheet Size 2440 x 1220mm 2440 x 1220mmNominal Weight per m2 1.2kg 1.2kgDimensional Stability at 20°C- Longitudinal 0.4% 0.4%- Transverse 1.2% 1.2%Resistance to Surface Wear (AS/NZS 2924.1:1998) > 1150 cycles > 1150 cyclesResistance to Staining Reagents Group 1 to 4 = Reagents Group 1 to 4 = (AS/NZS 2924.1:1998) no visible change no visible changeColour fastness to artificial light: Xenon arc fading lamp ≥ 3 (Blue wool 6) ≥ 3 (Blue wool 6)(ISO 105-B02)


TIMBER VENEERS

Section 5: 16.2

Fire Properties – Cone Calorimeter Test Typically achieved when tested to AS/NZS3837:1998.Tests conducted on FinishedDesigned Timber Veneer MDF Panel(18mm)Indices Unit Result

Average Heat Release Rate KW/m2 73.7

Average SpecificExtinction area m2/kg 9.6

BCA Classification Group 3

TECHNICAL PROPERTIES(VENEERED MDF &PARTICLEBOARD PANELS)

Please refer to the product literature forCraftwood MDF and Particleboardproducts from The Laminex Group, or visitwww.thelaminexgroup.com.au/tradeessentialsto view this information.

DIMENSIONAL STABILITY(VENEERED MDF &PARTICLEBOARD PANELS ONLY)Length 0.4%.Thickness 5.0% withchanges from 35% Relative Humidity to85% Relative Humidity (relative todatum point of 65% relative Humidity).

COLOUR CONSISTENCYAs with traditional veneers, it is notpossible to guarantee an absoluteconsistency in colour of LaminexFinished Designed Timber Veneersbetween one batch and another.Therefore, a slight colour differencebetween two sets of laminates or panelscannot be considered a defect.

EXPOSURE TO WATER &SUNLIGHTVeneer products, including LaminexFinished Designed Timber Veneers, beingpartially comprised of natural timberswill react to direct and indirect light.Therefore, a change of the surfacecolour and appearance over time is anatural characteristic, not a defect.Additionally, heat and humidity willinteract with light to accelerate theageing process.

If exposed to direct and strong lighttimber veneer products may undergosudden and irregular changes from theoriginal colour. As little as an hour’sexposure to sunlight may change thecolour of timber veneer. For moreinformation visit www.laminex.com.au.

Water will stain face veneers if allowedto ‘pool’ on the surface.

We recommend that all timber veneersbe stored within closed sheds wherethey will not be exposed to sunlight andmoisture.

VENEER GRAINIt is normal practice in Australia tospecify dimensions of veneered panels‘length by width by thickness ‘.The firstnominated dimension specifies thedirection the veneer grain runs eg.2400 x1200 – the veneer length is2400mm long and can be referred to aslong band.

All Laminex Finished Designed TimberVeneer inventory is long band.

STORAGE & HANDLINGLaminex Finished Designed TimberVeneer Laminates and Panels can behandled and stocked as a traditional HPLor wood panel with a melamine overlay.However, some specific features oftimber surfaces require particular care.Laminex Finished Designed TimberVeneer Laminate should always bestacked horizontally, face to face, at amoderate ambient temperature (about20°C) and a relative humidity of around60%.

Laminex Finished Designed TimberVeneer Panels should always be stackedhorizontally, face to face or face to backstacking is acceptable. Moderate ambienttemperature (about 20°C) and a relativehumidity of around 60% is ideal.

As with all veneer surfaces, they must beprotected from sunlight with a coversheet or non-transparent plastic,preferably dark, in order to assurestability.

The Laminates and Panels are always tobe handled by two people.

The storage area should be protectedfrom sun, rain and wind to minimiserapid changes in temperature andhumidity. Open sided sheds should notbe regarded as dry stores.

• All packs should be evenly supported at each end and at intervals of not more than 600mm.Where packs are multiple stacked, all supports should be vertically aligned.

• To avoid staining and fading, the sheets should not be exposed to the weather while awaiting installation.

• Keep the surface free of contaminantssuch as dust, oil and adhesives that will affect the surface finishes.




Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5


TIMBER VENEERS

Section 5: 17.1

Laminex® Timber VeneersLaminex Timber Veneerspresent all the beauty ofnatural timber.Thin layers oftimber veneers are factorybonded to both sides ofLaminex Craftwood orParticleboard providing thenatural beauty of timber, withthe versatility, machinabilityand strength of Craftwood orParticleboard substrates.Laminex Timber Veneer Panelsare usually available good twosides or with a downgrade orBAMO back. (Back atManufacturer’s Option).

RANGE STRUCTUREThe Laminex® Timber Veneer panelrange includes:1. Natural Timber Veneer Panels - classic

Natural timbers with timeless beauty2. Designer Timber Veneer Panels -

reconstructed & retoned veneers thatdeliver a modern, sophisticated & consistent effect with the warmth & beauty of timber veneer

3. FSC Veneer Panels - an environmentally preferable range of classic Timber Veneers & Harmony retoned Veneer panels with Forest Stewardship certification contributing to Greenstar credits.

For more information on LaminexTimber Veneers please ask for :1. The Laminex Natural Timber Veneer

Brochure2. The Laminex Designer Timber

Veneers Brochure.3. The Laminex FSC Timber Veneer

Panels Brochure.

APPLICATIONSLaminex Timber Veneered panels arehighly suitable for all detail joinery,high quality furniture, feature walls,shelving and kitchens and commercialprojects.

Note:Laminex Timber Veneers are for interioruse only.

SUBSTRATE PROPERTIESPlease refer to the Trade EssentialsGuide for Craftwood and Particleboardproducts from The Laminex Group, orvisit www.thelaminexgroup.com.au/tradeessentials to view this information.

INSULATION PROPERTIESThermal conductivity varies withthickness. Usual range is 0.05 to 0.08 kcal/(m2.Sec. °C)

DIMENSIONAL STABILITYLength 0.4% Thickness 5.0% withchanges from 35% Relative Humidity to85% Relative Humidity (relative todatum point of 65% relative humidity).

TECHNICAL INFORMATIONFor detailed technical application relatingto veneer specifications, health andsafety, finishing and precautions withfinishing, please refer to the TechnicalInformation section within the LaminexTimber Veneers brochure.

IMPORTANT NOTE:FinishingThe type of finishing system used withTimber Veneers can be critical to the appearance of the product inboth the short and long term. Pleaserefer to Appendix 3, Section 9.3 forFinishing Guidelines and Precautions.

SHEET SIZES ANDTHICKNESSESVeneered Board offer is – Standard MDF 5.75, 17 & 19mm.– HMR Particleboard 17 & 19mm.• 2400 x 1200mm Sheet size.• Other species, sheet sizes and

substrates are available as madeto order – please enquire on 132 136.

FIRE TESTSCone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837:1998(Irradiance of 50kW/m2)Classification Result Unit/RangeGroup Number 3 1-3Average Specific 51.7 m2 / kgExtinction Area

18mm thick using standard particleboard core

FSC VENEERSStandard offer is only MR MDF.MR, E0, MDF 2400x1200, and2700x1200 in 17, 19, 26 and 33mmthicknesses.

TIMBER VENEERS


For detailed information on TheLaminex Groups FSC Timber VeneerPanels range and technical information,please refer to FSC Timber VeneerPanels brochure.

Note: A wide range of veneer optionsare available, please contact 132 136 foradditional information.

GREENfirst PRODUCTLaminex FSC™ TimberVeneer Panels is aGreenfirst™ productand is certified byGood EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.



Finishing of Timber Veneer PanelsSection 5:17



Freestyle® 12mm SurfacesFreestyle® 12mm Surfacessheet material is manufacturedfrom a polyester/ acrylic hybridresin, pigments for colour andalumina trihydrate as the filler.Sheets are made using a batchsheet cast forming line.

Freestyle 12mm Surfaces canbe fabricated using standardwood working equipment.

APPLICATIONSFreestyle 12mm Surfaces are suitable forany interior surface or cladding application.It is ideal for kitchen and bathroombenchtops, counters, reception desks, walland column cladding, commercial bars andmany other vertical and horizontalapplications.

Freestyle 12mm Surfaces comes in 5colour ranges:a. Solid coloursb. Speckle coloursc. Special coloursd. Mica colourse. Artifacts

(Please refer to the Freestyle 12mmSurfaces brochure for a complete range ofcolours and availabilities.)

Freestyle 12mm Surfaces construction is non-porous with consistent colourthroughout the sheet. It cannotdelaminate, is UV stable and resists many stains. It has excellent hygienicperformance.

SUPPLY AND WARRANTYFreestyle 12mm Surfaces is supplied onlythrough authorised fabricators.

The product is covered by a 15 yearlimited warranty by The Laminex Groupwhen fabricated and installed accordingto the Installation Manual.

SURFACE PROPERTIESFreestyle 12mm Surfaces is made froma hybrid polyester/acrylic resin system.

Freestyle Surfaces has high resistance tomany chemicals and is therefore, an ideallaboratory benchtop material. However, inall cases, purpose testing of chemicals andstains should be undertaken prior to anyfinal decision, due to the wide and variedchemical types and concentration.

Note: Test Results may vary due tocolour and exposure time. It is highlyrecommended that all stains areremoved as quickly as possible toreduce the staining of the surface

LIMITATIONSFreestyle Surfaces withstands normalwear and tear. Here are some guidelinesto assist in Freestyle Surfaces applicationand use:

Avoid leaving hot appliances or utensilsin direct contact with Freestyle Surfaces,use a trivet for hot pans or utensils toprotect the surface.

Freestyle Surfaces is intended for interioruse only.

Certain chemicals may damage FreestyleSurfaces. Refer to the Freestyle Surfaceschemical and stain resistance section forspecific recommendations.

Refrain from sliding hard or heavyobjects across the counter top surfaceas this may cause scratching. Scratchingon darker surfaces will be more visiblethan on lighter colours and will requiremore ongoing maintenance. Refer tomaintenance section.

It is not possible to create a seamlessjoin when fabricating Mica colours dueto the randomness of the design.

Do not allow dry ice to come intocontact with Freestyle Surfaces.

Do not cut directly on FreestyleSurfaces.

SOLID SURFACE


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Material Remark

MMA Methyl Methacrylate ResinPET Polyester ResinAL (OH)3 Alumina Trihydrate FillerUV Absorbers, Cross Linking Agents,Stabilisers, Curing Agents, Etc Additives

FREESTYLE CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Base Component Remark

MMA Methyl MethacrylateLMA (Lauryl Methacrylate)Fillers & AdditivesSBS Block Rubber

Hardner DBP (Di Butyl Phthalate)Benzoyl peroxide

FREESTYLE ADHESIVE CHEMICAL COMPOSITION



Cone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837(Irradiance of 50kW/m2)Classification Result Unit/RangeGroup Number 3 1-3Average Specific 117.8 m2 / kgExtinction AreaAverage Heat 63.9 kW/m2

Release Rate

FIRE TESTS Note:Test Results may vary due to colour andparticular size, however result changeswill only be minor.

PRODUCT RANGE1. Standard sheet size:

Length = 3683 -0/+10 mmWidth = 762 -0/+5 mm.

2. Standard thickness: 12 mm - 0/+ 0.5mm

WHEN SPECIFYING SHEETSAsk for : Freestyle 12mm Surfaces fromLaminex in .... colour.

TYPICAL SPLASHBACK DETAILS

PROPERTY SPECIFICATIONSProperty Test Method Units Typical Results

Specific Gravity ASTM D792 g/cm3 1.7Flexural Strength ASTM D790 MPa 42Flexural Modulus ASTM D790 GPa 9.5Water Absorption ASTM D570 % wt <0.13%Rockwell M Hardness ASTM D785 Rockwell units 92Thermal Expansion ASTM D696 mm/mm°C 3.24x10-5

UV Stability NEMA LD3 slight effectWear and Cleanability ANSI Z124.6 Visual rating 3-4Gloss (60º Gardner) ANSI Z124 Gloss units 5 - 20Impact Resistance NEMA LD3 Drop ht. = 2.4m no fracture with

Ball wt. = 224g backerBoiling Water Surface Resistance NEMA LD3 Visual rating very slight effectHigh TemperatureResistance NEMA LD3 Visual rating no effectColour consistency L.a.b Units E < 1.0Stain Resistance ANSI Z124.6 Visual rating passesStain Resistance ANSI Z124.3 Visual rating passesFungi & Bacteria ANSI Z124 no effect

SOLID SURFACE


FABRICATIONThe fabrication and installation of allcomponents using Freestyle Surfacesshould be carried out by an authorisedFreestyle Surfaces Fabricator.

MAINTENANCEOn a day-to-day basis, Freestyle Surfaces can be kept clean using asponge and soapy water. For any marks,stubborn stains etc., or even for athorough cleaning - use an abrasivecleanser (like Ajax) and Grey 448Scotch-Brite pad. Using these regularlyhelps to maintain a beautiful, satin lustreon your surfaces.

More severe stains, burns or damage canbe removed using a very fine sandpaper(220-320 grit).To repair large chips, deepscratches, severe burns etc., anAuthorised Freestyle Solid SurfacingFabricator must be contacted.

Should further information on FreestyleSurfaces be required, contact TheLaminex Group on 132 136 fromanywhere in Australia, for fabricator,display and general advice.

FOOD SERVICE COUNTERTOPSBain MarieFood service countertops will requiredifferent design, fabrication and installationtechniques due to the Freestyle Surfacesbenchtop’s possible exposure to greatertemperature stresses than the normalresidential installation.

It is a requirement of the manufacturerof the stainless steel tank equipment tomanufacture all hot tank sections withinstalled double walls.

Freestyle is a hybrid polyester/acrylicsolid surface product with a high level ofAlumina Trihydrate content as a filler,which provides superior heat stabilityand resistance to stains and chemicals.The exposure time to the chemicals willhave a direct effect on ease of removal.

Exposure to harsh chemicals should beavoided at all times. In case of surfacecontamination, quickly wash affected areawith a domestic gritty cleaner and water.Sand if necessary. Surface damage mayvary with the chemical strength andexposure time.

PERFORMANCE REPORT FOR CHEMICALS AND STAINS

FREESTYLE CHEMICAL AND STAIN RESISTANCE

Classification % Gritty Cleaner Scotch Brite™ or Water or Sand Paper

Acetic Acid 5% ✓Acetic Acid 10% ✓Acetic Acid 90% ✓Acetic Acid 98% ✓Acetone ✓Aqua Regia ✓Ammonia 10% ✓Ammonium Hydroxide 5% ✓Ammonium Hydroxide 28% ✓Benzene ✓Calcium Thiocyanate 78% ✓Chloric Hydroxide 20% ✓Chloroform 100% ✓Citric Acid 10% ✓Dimethyl Formamhide ✓Ethanol 95% ✓Ethyl Ether ✓Formic Acid 88% ✓Formaldehyde ✓Furfural ✓Gasoline ✓Hydrochloric Acid 10% ✓Hydrochloric Acid 20% ✓Hydrochloric Acid 37% ✓Isopropyl Alcohol ✓Kerosene 20% ✓Methyl Alcohol 5% ✓Methyl Ethyl Ketone ✓Mineral Oil ✓Nitric Acid 10% ✓Nitric Acid 30% ✓Nitric Acid 40% ✓Nitric Acid 70% ✓Phenol 40% ✓Phenol 85% ✓

SOLID SURFACE


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

TEST METHODTest method is based on 16 Hoursexposure per chemical

For exposures to chemicals other thanabove, it is recommended to test on asample piece of Freestyle to confirm thesuitability for the application.

Common domestic residues such asexamples listed below, may be removedwith water or domestic cleaners.

Alcohol CoffeeCurry Powder JuicesMustard SaltSugar VinegarBallpoint Pen Ink Cooking OilEye Brow Pencil LipstickNail Polish Shoe PolishTea WhiskyCigarette CrayonHair Dyes LotionsPencil Lead Soy SauceTomato Sauce Wine


Phosphoric Acid 25% ✓Phosphoric Acid 85% ✓Silver Nitrate 10% ✓Sodium Hydroxide 10% ✓Sodium Hydroxide 25% ✓Sodium Hydroxide 40% ✓Sodium Hypochlorite 5% ✓Sodium Sulphate ✓Sulphuric Acid 25% ✓Sulphuric Acid 30% ✓Sulphuric Acid 77% ✓Sulphuric Acid 96% ✓Toluene ✓Xylene ✓Zinc Chloride ✓

SOLID SURFACE


SOLID SURFACE


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Freestyle® 30mm SurfacesFreestyle® 30mm Surfacessheet material is manufacturedfrom a polyester/acrylic hybridresin, pigments for colour andalumina trihydrate as the filler.Sheets are made using a batchsheet cast forming line.

Freestyle 30mm Surfaces canbe fabricated using standardwood working equipment.

APPLICATIONSFreestyle 30mm Surfaces are specificallydesigned for many applications, such askitchen and bathroom benchtops,counters, reception desks, commercial barsand many other horizontal applications.

30mm sheet thickness offers the addedbenefit of a greater finished benchthickness without the need for edgebuild downs.

30mm comes in 2 colour ranges:a. Solid colours - Arctic White,Tapenade,

Coconut Milk, Zucchero, SmoothConcrete,

b. Speckle colours - Kosciusko, BiancoQuartz, Nero Quartz

Freestyle 30mm Surfaces construction isnon-porous with consistent colourthroughout the sheet. It cannot delaminate,is UV stable and resists many stains. It hasexcellent hygienic performance.

SUPPLY AND WARRANTYFreestyle 30mm Surfaces is supplied onlythrough authorised fabricators.

The product is covered by a 15 yearlimited warranty by The Laminex Groupwhen fabricated and installed accordingto the Installation Manual.

SURFACE PROPERTIESFreestyle 30mm Surfaces is made froma hybrid polyester/acrylic resin system.

Freestyle 30mm Surfaces has highresistance to many chemicals and istherefore an ideal laboratory benchtopmaterial. However, in all cases, purposetesting of chemicals and stains should beundertaken prior to any final decision,due to the wide and varied chemicaltypes and concentration.

Note: Test Results may vary due tocolour and exposure time. It is highlyrecommended that all stains areremoved as quickly as possible toreduce the staining of the surface.

LIMITATIONSFreestyle Surfaces withstands normalwear and tear. Here are some guidelinesto assist in Freestyle Surfaces applicationand use:

Avoid leaving hot appliances or utensilsin direct contact with Freestyle Surfaces,use a trivet for hot pans or utensils toprotect the surface.

Freestyle Surfaces is intended for interioruse only.

Certain chemicals may damage FreestyleSurfaces. Refer to the Freestyle Surfaceschemical and stain resistance section forspecific recommendations.

Refrain from sliding hard or heavyobjects across the counter top surfaceas this may cause scratching. Scratchingon darker surfaces will be more visiblethan on lighter colours and will requiremore ongoing maintenance. Refer tomaintenance section.

It is not possible to create a seamlessjoin when fabricating Mica colours dueto the randomness of the design.

Do not allow dry ice to come intocontact with Freestyle Surfaces.

Do not cut directly on FreestyleSurfaces.

SOLID SURFACE


FABRICATIONThe fabrication and installation of allcomponents using Freestyle Surfacesshould be carried out by an authorisedFreestyle Surfaces Fabricator.

MAINTENANCEOn a day-to-day basis, Freestyle Surfaces can be kept clean using asponge and soapy water. For any marks,stubborn stains etc., or even for a thoroughcleaning, use an abrasive cleanser (likeAjax) and Grey 448 Scotch-Brite pad.Using these regularly helps to maintain abeautiful, satin lustre on your surfaces.

More severe stains, burns or damage canbe removed using a very fine sandpaper(220-320 grit).To repair large chips, deepscratches, severe burns etc., anAuthorised Freestyle Solid SurfacingFabricator must be contacted.

Should further information on FreestyleSurfaces be required, contact TheLaminex Group on 132 136 fromanywhere in Australia, for fabricator,display and general advice.

FOOD SERVICE COUNTERTOPSBain MarieFood service countertops will requiredifferent design, fabrication and installationtechniques due to the Freestyle Surfacesbenchtop’s possible exposure to greatertemperature stresses than the normalresidential installation.

It is a requirement of the manufacturerof the stainless steel tank equipment tomanufacture all hot tank sections withinstalled double walls.

Material Remark

MMA Methyl Methacrylate ResinPET Polyester ResinAL (OH)3 Alumina Trihydrate FillerUV Absorbers, Cross Linking Agents,Stabilisers, Curing Agents, Etc Additives

FREESTYLE CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Base Component Remark

MMA Methyl MethacrylateLMA (Lauryl Methacrylate)Fillers & AdditivesSBS Block Rubber

Hardner DBP (Di Butyl Phthalate)Benzoyl peroxide

FREESTYLE ADHESIVE CHEMICAL COMPOSITION



Cone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837(Irradiance of 50kW/m2)Classification Result Unit/RangeGroup Number 3 1-3Average Specific 122.7 m2 / kgExtinction AreaAverage Heat 59.0 kW/m2

Release Rate

FIRE TESTS Note:Test Results may vary due to colour andparticular size, however result changeswill only be minor.

PRODUCT RANGE1. Standard sheet size:

Length = 3073 -0/+10mmWidth = 762 -0/5mm

2. Standard thickness: 30mm +/-0.5mm

WHEN SPECIFYING SHEETSAsk for : Freestyle 30mm Surfaces fromLaminex in .... colour.

PROPERTY SPECIFICATIONSProperty Test Method Units Typical Results

Specific Gravity ASTM D792 g/cm3 1.7Flexural Strength ASTM D790 MPa 42Flexural Modulus ASTM D790 GPa 9.5Water Absorption ASTM D570 % wt <0.13%Rockwell M Hardness ASTM D785 Rockwell units 92Thermal Expansion ASTM D696 mm/mm°C 3.24x10-5

UV Stability NEMA LD3 slight effectWear and Cleanability ANSI Z124.6 Visual rating 3-4Gloss (60º Gardner) ANSI Z124 Gloss units 5 - 20Impact Resistance NEMA LD3 Drop ht. = 2.4m no fracture

Ball wt. = 224gBoiling Water Surface Resistance NEMA LD3 Visual rating very slight effectHigh TemperatureResistance NEMA LD3 Visual rating no effectColour consistency L.a.b Units E < 1.0Stain Resistance ANSI Z124.6 Visual rating passesStain Resistance ANSI Z124.3 Visual rating passesFungi & Bacteria ANSI Z124 no effect

SOLID SURFACE


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

® B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Freestyle is a hybrid polyester/acrylicsolid surface product with a high level ofAlumina Trihydrate content as a filler,which provides superior heat stabilityand resistance to stains and chemicals.The exposure time to the chemicals willhave a direct effect on ease of removal.

Exposure to harsh chemicals should beavoided at all times. In case of surfacecontamination, quickly wash affected areawith a domestic gritty cleaner and water.Sand if necessary. Surface damage mayvary with the chemical strength andexposure time.

PERFORMANCE REPORT FOR CHEMICALS AND STAINS

FREESTYLE CHEMICAL AND STAIN RESISTANCE


Acetic Acid 5% ✓Acetic Acid 10% ✓Acetic Acid 90% ✓Acetic Acid 98% ✓Acetone ✓Aqua Regia ✓Ammonia 10% ✓Ammonium Hydroxide 5% ✓Ammonium Hydroxide 28% ✓Benzene ✓Calcium Thiocyanate 78% ✓Chloric Hydroxide 20% ✓Chloroform 100% ✓Citric Acid 10% ✓Dimethyl Formamhide ✓Ethanol 95% ✓Ethyl Ether ✓Formic Acid 88% ✓Formaldehyde ✓Furfural ✓Gasoline ✓Hydrochloric Acid 10% ✓Hydrochloric Acid 20% ✓Hydrochloric Acid 37% ✓Isopropyl Alcohol ✓Kerosene 20% ✓Methyl Alcohol 5% ✓Methyl Ethyl Ketone ✓Mineral Oil ✓Nitric Acid 10% ✓Nitric Acid 30% ✓Nitric Acid 40% ✓Nitric Acid 70% ✓Phenol 40% ✓Phenol 85% ✓

SOLID SURFACE


TEST METHODTest method is based on 16 Hoursexposure per chemical.

For exposures to chemicals other thanabove, it is recommended to test on asample piece of Freestyle to confirm thesuitability for the application.

Common domestic residues such asexamples listed below, may be removedwith water or domestic cleaners.

Alcohol CoffeeCurry Powder JuicesMustard SaltSugar VinegarBallpoint Pen Ink Cooking OilEye Brow Pencil LipstickNail Polish Shoe PolishTea WhiskyCigarette CrayonHair Dyes LotionsPencil Lead Soy SauceTomato Sauce Wine


Phosphoric Acid 25% ✓Phosphoric Acid 85% ✓Silver Nitrate 10% ✓Sodium Hydroxide 10% ✓Sodium Hydroxide 25% ✓Sodium Hydroxide 40% ✓Sodium Hypochlorite 5% ✓Sodium Sulphate ✓Sulphuric Acid 25% ✓Sulphuric Acid 30% ✓Sulphuric Acid 77% ✓Sulphuric Acid 96% ✓Toluene ✓Xylene ✓Zinc Chloride ✓

CABINET DOORS


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 20.1

Laminex ColourTech® DoorsLaminex ColourTech Doorsare produced on 18.0mm thickwhite singled sided MR MDFwith a two pack polyurethanepaint, ready for thetradesperson to install.TheColourTech colour rangecovers all Laminex laminateplain colours, and is availablein either a textured, satin orgloss finish.

APPLICATIONSColourTech® Doors, whilst specificallydesigned to be installed in kitchen, bathroomand laundry applications, and have manyalternate applications within the domesticand commercial furniture industries.

It is important to be aware that due tothe MR MDF core, ColourTech Doorsare only recommended for interiorapplications.

An extensive range of sizes are available dueto the large board size that the doors aremade from. Some size restrictions do applydue to machining constraints (Refer to theLaminex ColourTech easy reference chart).

DOOR INSTALLATIONAs the door substrate is a wood basedpanel, it will react to changes in moisture,as will natural timber, and hence humidity

variations will influence the extent towhich doors will bow.The effect of doorbow can be minimised by the installationinstructions.

Minimum specification for number of hingesper door depending on heightDoor Height Hinge Quantity

0-850mm 2851mm-1350mm 31351mm-1800mm 41801-2400mm 5

Door bow can further be minimised byavoiding large size doors and bar panels.For example, split pantry doors (ratherthan one tall door) and individual doorsfor bar panels are recommended.

WEIGHTThickness: 18mm

kg per m2: 13.0

FIRE TESTS(Typically achieved when tested toAS/NZS 1530.3)Indices Result Range



THICKNESS18mm.

DOOR DESIGN RANGEColourTech Doors are available in 12 differentprofiles with seven co-ordinating glaze doorsto match.Coupled with an extensive choiceof Laminex colours,ColourTech co-ordinates with the Laminex product range,and can create any kitchen or bathroomdesign from country, classic through to themost contemporary looks.To see the fullrange phone 132 136 for a copy of theLaminex ColourTech Doors brochure.


THICKNESS RANGE

Property Unit 18mm

Board Density kg/m3 735Internal Bond KPa 900av.Modulus of Rupture MPa 43av.Modulus of Elasticity MPa 3600av.*Screw Holding – Face N 1000av*Screw Holding – Edge N 1600avSurface Soundness MPa 1.7Thickness Swell 24hr % <4Moisture Resistance MOR(A) MPa 9.7

*Values reflect new testing methods for screw holding properties in AS/NZS 4266.13-2001 (Int).



Board Product: Shelf LoadingsAppendix 3. Handling & Product Application, Section 9:3

CABINET DOORS


Laminex Contour® Doors The Laminex Contour Doorsrange is produced on aselected range of standardLamiwood MR colours. It isimportant to be aware thatdue to the complexity of thedecorated papers construction,not all of the standardLamiwood MR colour rangecan be used to produceContour Doors.

APPLICATIONSContour® Doors are suitable for use inall areas of high humidity, such as kitchencupboard doors, bathroom vanities,laundry cupboards, shelving, wallpanelling and all domestic andcommercial joinery applications.

WEIGHTThickness 18mm

kg per m2 13.1

THICKNESSES18mm.


DECORATIVE SURFACEPROPERTIESLamiwood, when tested in approvedmanner complies with the relevantsections of AS/NZS 1859.3 for substrateproperties as below.


Ignitability 13 0 to 20Spread of Flame 6 0 to 10Heat Evolved 6 0 to 10Smoke Developed 4 0 to 10

Cone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837(Irradiance of 50kw/m2)Classification Result Unit/RangeGroup Number 3 1-3Average Specific 64.7 m2 / kgExtinction Area

MOISTURE RESISTANCELaminex Craftwood MR complies withWet Cyclic Test Moisture ResistanceProperties as specified in AS/NZS1859.2.

RESISTANCE TO WEARSolid ColoursTypical results 700 cycles.

Patterns and WoodgrainsTypical results 150 cycles.


STANDARD COLOUR RANGEContour Doors are available in a rangeof 60 colours and prints.To see the fullrange of Contour Doors call 132 136for a copy of the Laminex ContourDoor brochure.

DIMENSIONAL AND EDGINGSPECIFICATIONSPanels are produced using 18mm thickLamiwood for normal door andfurniture panels.

PROFILES90° for door and panel applications.180° for kitchen end panels where thedoor radius is required on both sides ofthe panel to give balance.


THICKNESS

Property Unit 18mm

Board Density kg/m3 735Internal Bond KPa 900av.Modulus of Rupture MPa 43av.Modulus of Elasticity MPa 3600av.*Screw Holding – Face N 1000av.*Screw Holding – Edge N 1600av.Surface Soundness MPa 1.7Thickness Swell 24 hrs % <4Moisture Resistance MOR(A) MPa 9.7


CABINET DOORS


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 21.2

EDGINGSupplied with a choice of either 1mmor 2mm ABS edging on ends of doorsor panels.

PANEL DIMENSIONSAn extensive range of sizes are availabledue to the large board size the doorsare made from. Some size restrictionsdo apply due to machining constraints.

Minimum Height: 115mmMaximum Height: 2400mmMinimum Width: 125mmMaximum Width: 1600mm

DOOR INSTALLATIONAs the door substrate is a wood basedpanel, it will react to changes inmoisture, as will natural timber, andhence humidity variations will influencethe extent to which doors will bow.

MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONSFOR NUMBER OF HINGES PERDOOR DEPENDING ON HEIGHTDoor Height Hinge Quantity

0-850mm 2851mm-1350mm 31351mm-1800mm 41801mm-2400mm 5

GREENfirst PRODUCTLaminex Lamiwood isa Greenfirst™ productand is certified byGood EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.




IMPORTANT NOTEA slight variation exists between the Flint finish on Laminex melamine faced board products(Lamiwood MR, Decorwood,Vertiboard,VertiboardMR, Structural and Contour Doors) and the Flint finishon Laminex high-pressure laminate products.

Licence NumberLA-2005

CABINET DOORS

Section 5: 22.1Issued September 2009

Laminex Contour® Finedge™ DoorsThe Laminex Contour FinedgeDoors range is produced on aselected range of standardLamiwood MR colours.TheseDoors and Panels feature acontemporary sleek 3mmradius profiled edge to providea streamlined seamless edge.Contour Finedge Doors areavailable in a selected range ofdecors from the LaminexColour Palette.

APPLICATIONSContour Finedge Doors are suitable foruse in all areas of high humidity, such askitchen cupboard doors, bathroomvanities, laundry cupboards, shelving, wallpanelling and domestic and commercialjoinery applications.


kg per m2 13.1

THICKNESSES18mm.


DECORATIVE SURFACEPROPERTIESLamiwood, when tested in approvedmanner complies with the relevantsections of AS/NZS 1859.3 for substrateproperties as below.




MOISTURE RESISTANCELaminex Craftwood MR complies withWet Cyclic Test Moisture ResistanceProperties as specified in AS/NZS1859.2.




STANDARD COLOUR RANGEContour Finedge Doors are available ina range of 68 solid colours, woodgrainsand patterns.To see the full range ofContour Finedge Doors call 132 136 fora copy of the Laminex Contour FinedgeDoor brochure or visit laminex.com.au.

DIMENSIONAL AND EDGINGSPECIFICATIONSPanels are produced using 18mm thickLamiwood for normal door andfurniture panels.

PROFILES90° for door and panel applications.


THICKNESS

Property Unit 18mm



CABINET DOORS


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 22.2

EDGINGSupplied with a choice of either 1mmor 2mm ABS edging on ends of doorsor panels.

PANEL DIMENSIONSAn extensive range of sizes are availabledue to the large board size the doorsare made from. Some size restrictionsdo apply due to machining constraints.

Minimum Height: 115mmMaximum Height: 2400mmMinimum Width: 125mmMaximum Width: 1600mm

DOOR INSTALLATIONAs the door substrate is a wood basedpanel, it will react to changes inmoisture, as will natural timber, andhence humidity variations will influencethe extent to which doors will bow.


0-850mm 2851mm-1350mm 31351mm-1800mm 41801mm-2400mm 5

GREENfirst PRODUCTLaminex Lamiwood is aGreenfirst® product andis certified by GoodEnvironmental ChoiceAustralia asenvironmentallypreferable.




IMPORTANT NOTEA slight variation exists between the Flint finish on Laminex melamine faced board products(Lamiwood MR, Decorwood,Vertiboard,VertiboardMR, Structural and Contour Doors) and the Flint finishon Laminex high-pressure laminate products.

LA-2008 GECA 28-2006–


Section 5: 23.1

CABINET DOORS


Laminex® Timber DoorsLaminex Timber Doors aremanufactured from solidtimber as well as acombination of solid timberand natural timber veneeredCraftwood.The doors are supplied alreadylacquered ready for thetradesman to install.

APPLICATIONSTimber Doors are designed for use in manydomestic and commercial furnitureapplications, such as kitchen cupboard doors,bathroom vanities, laundry cupboards,built-in cupboards and display units.

THICKNESSAll door frames are 20mm thick. Thethickness of the centre panel ranges from6mm, for styles with a timber veneeredcentre panel, to 17mm for a raised panel style.

FIRE TESTSCone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837(Irradiance of 50kw/m2)Classification Result Unit/RangeGroup Number 3 1-3Average Specific 60.8 m2 / kgExtinction Area20mm thick door

DOOR DESIGN RANGELaminex Timber Doors are available in acomprehensive range of highly desirabletimber species.The natural warmth ofthe timber species, combined with thepolished Two Pac acid cat finish, providea finished result that is rich in appeal andageless in appearance.

The doors are available in a range ofstyles that offer a traditional, country andcontemporary look.

The veneered panel styles require 40%less solid timber to manufacture whilenot taking away from the solid timberdoor appearance.

All timber species supplied are fromsustainable managed forests that allow forthe production of cabinet doors that willnot distort or crack over their service life.All door frames are 73mm in width.

The Timber Door offer is completed by the inclusion of polished timberveneer panels in almost any size, cornicecapping, tambour appliance cupboarddoors and dressed all round timber, toenable trades people to offer acompletely timber finished product.

DOOR FINISHAll doors are supplied lacquered withMirotone (or equivalent) mirotech3600/30, a low yellowing two-pack AcidCat lacquer with a 30% gloss level. Alllacquered doors have their centre panelsealed before the door is assembled.Thisis quite unique to the Laminex TimberDoor and delivers two significantbenefits:1) The centre panel is less likely to move

with changes in humidity;2) If the centre panel does move, the

movement will not expose unsealed timber.

DOOR CARE INFORMATIONCleaning InstructionsDusting:Use only a soft dry cloth or featherduster.

Polishing:Apply a light spray of MirotoneSPRAYGLOW Furniture Polish orMIROMAX Wood Finishing Wax. Polishthe surface using a soft dry cloth.Excessive use of SPRAYGLOW mayleave a greasy film on the surface (seenotes on cleaning of greasy marks)

Spillages:All spillages should be cleaned with adamp cloth as soon as possible.

Greasy Marks:Greasy marks may be removed bywiping the surface with a clothdampened with Mineral Turpentine.Wipe clean with a soft dry cloth andleave to dry.To restore the finish apply aliberal amount of SPRAYGLOWFurniture Polish or MIROMAX WoodFinishing Wax to the door surface andpolish using a soft clean cloth, makingsure to rub off any excess.

CABINET DOORS


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 23.2

WARNINGSMechanical Damage:To avoid surface damage, do not allowsharp objects to be rubbed or draggedacross the surface of any panels.Abrasive nylon pads and metal cleaningpads will damage the door lacquer.

Chemicals and Alcohol:All chemical substances and alcoholshould be removed immediately fromdoor surfaces if spilled.

Furniture Polish:We do not recommend furniturepolishes that contain silicone as theymay cause re-coating or refurbishmentproblems at a later date. Abrasivepolishes should also be avoided.

Moisture:Moisture may cause damage to doorcoatings. Use a soft dry cloth whereverpossible to clean doors and avoid use ofthe doors in a damp environment.

The best guarantee for long life of anycoated timber door is to follow theguidelines listed below:

1. Avoid high humidity build up. Ensurethe kitchen is properly ventilatedthrough the opening of window orturning on air extractor fans.

2.Wipe up any spills as they occur anddon’t miss those spots at the bottomof doors or any other area water maypool.These are the most commonpoints of failure.

3. Avoid damage to the protectivecoating through physical impact, likemop handles.

4. Avoid the use of abrasive materialsand cleansers.The use of abrasivematerials will dramatically shorten thelife of the protective coating.

5.The regular use of a wax-based,silicone free non-abrasive polish maybe beneficial in reducing thetransmission of moisture through thefilm. A silicone free polish such asMirotone’s Sprayglow furniture polishis recommended to avoid anyproblem with repair of recoat workthat may be carried out within the lifeof the timber door.

Direct Sunlight:Direct sunlight should be avoided on alldoors and panels as fading, bleaching oryellowing may occur.

DOOR INSTALLATIONNatural timber will react to changes inmoisture and hence humidity variationswill influence the extent to which thedoors will bow.The effect of a doorbow can be minimised by the followinginstallation instructions.


0-850mm 2851mm-1350mm 31351mm-1800mm 41801mm-2400mm 5



CABINET DOORS


Laminex® Timber Veneer DoorsLaminex Timber Veneer Doorsare produced on 18mm whitesingle sided satin LamiwoodMR with thermoformednatural timber veneer face.Thelook of a solid timber door hasbeen carefully created throughface profiled doors and pressedon all four edges with naturaltimber veneer. The doors aresupplied already lacquered withTwo Pack Polyurethane, readyfor the tradesman to install.

APPLICATIONSTimber Veneer Doors are designed foruse in many domestic and commercialfurniture applications, such as kitchencupboard doors, bathroom vanities,laundry cupboards, built-in cupboardsand display units.

THICKNESS18mm.

DOOR DESIGN RANGELaminex Timber Veneer Doors areavailable in three classic styles (PencilRound, Bevelled and Square Edge) in astandard range of 20 richly appealingAustralian and Exotic timber species.Tosee the full range call 132 136.

Solid doors and glazing frames areavailable in all three styles.

You can create the look of a timberdoor in a range of species that may beotherwise unaffordable or unavailable insolid timber.

The Timber Veneer Door offer iscompleted by the inclusion of polishedtimber veneer panels in almost any sizeand cornice capping to enable tradespeople to offer a completely timberfinished product.

For Laminex Timber Veneer Doors –Substrate Properties (Refer same sheetas for Vinyl Doors in section 5.25).Moisture Resistance (Refer same sheetas for Vinyl Doors in section 5.25).



Cone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837(Irradiance of 50kw/m2)Classification Result Unit/RangeGroup Number 3 1-3Average Specific 44.9 m2 / kgExtinction Area20mm thick door

DOOR CARE INFORMATIONCleaning InstructionsDusting:Use only a soft dry cloth or featherduster.

Polishing:Apply a light spray of MirotoneSPRAYGLOW Furniture Polish orMIROWAX Wood Finishing Wax. Polishthe surface using a soft dry cloth.

Excessive use of SPRAYGLOW may leave a greasy film on the surface(see notes on cleaning greasy marks).

Spillage’s:All spillages should be cleaned with a damp cloth as soon as possible.

SUBSTRATE PROPERTIES(Typical physical properties when tested to AS/NZS 1859.2-2001)

THICKNESS

Property Unit 18mm



CABINET DOORS


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 24.2

Greasy Marks:Greasy marks may be removed bywiping the surface with a clothdampened with Mineral Turpentine.Wipe clean with a soft dry cloth andleave to dry.To restore the finish apply aliberal amount of SPRAYGLOWFurniture Polish or MIROWAX WoodFinishing Wax to the door surface andpolish using a soft clean cloth, makingsure to rub off any excess.

WARNINGSMechanical Damage:To avoid surface damage, do not allowsharp objects to be rubbed or draggedacross the surface of any panels.Abrasive nylon pads and metal cleaningpads will damage the door lacquer.

Chemicals and Alcohol:All chemical substances and alcoholshould be removed immediately fromdoor surfaces if spilled.

Furniture Polish:We do not recommend furniturepolishes that contain silicone as theymay cause re-coating or refurbishmentproblems at a later date. Abrasivepolishes should also be avoided.

Moisture:Moisture may cause damage to the doorcoating. Use a soft dry cloth whereverpossible to clean doors and avoid use ofthe doors in a damp environment.

Direct Sunlight:Direct sunlight should be avoided on alldoors and panels as fading, bleaching oryellowing may occur.

DOOR INSTALLATIONAs the door substrate is a wood basedpanel, it will react to changes in moisture,as will natural timber, and hencehumidity variations will influence theextent to which doors will bow.Theeffect of door bow can be minimised.


0-850mm 2851mm-1350mm 31351mm-1800mm 41801mm-2400mm 5



CABINET DOORS


(Typical physical properties when tested to AS/NZS 1859.2-2001)THICKNESS

Property Unit 18mmBoard Density kg/m3 735Internal Bond KPa 900av.Modulus of Rupture MPa 43av.Modulus of Elasticity MPa 3600av.*Screw Holding – Face N 1000av.*Screw Holding – Edge N 1600av.Surface Soundness MPa 1.7Thickness Swell 24 hrs % <4Moisture Resistance MOR(A) MPa 9.7


Laminex® Vinyl DoorsLaminex Vinyl Doors areproduced on 18.0mm thickPolar White single sidedLamiwood MR withthermoformable vinyl foil,ready for the trades person toinstall.The Vinyl Door rangeincludes gloss, satin andtextured surface finishes with aquality sheen that is durableand easy to clean.

APPLICATIONSVinyl Doors are designed for use inmany domestic and commercial interiorfurniture applications, such as kitchencupboard doors, bathroom vanities,laundry cupboards, built-in cupboardsand display units.

It is important to be aware that due to theCraftwood MR core,Vinyl Doors are onlyrecommended for interior applications.

Whilst the door size range covers alldomestic componentry doorrequirements, some minimum sizerestrictions do apply due to the machiningconstraints (refer to the Laminex VinylDoor Easy Reference Chart).

THICKNESS18mm.

SUBSTRATE PROPERTIES

DOOR DESIGN RANGEThe vinyl gloss and satin finish doors areavailable in 7 solid door designs and 7co-ordinating glazing doors to match.

Vinyl textured finish doors are availablein 11 door designs and 13 co-ordinatingglazing doors to match.

The vinyl textured door offer iscompleted by the inclusion of vinylsurfaced panels in almost any size,matching cornice capping and loose foil,to enable trades people to offer acompletely vinyl finished product.

The Vinyl Door range allows for creationof country, classic through to the mostcontemporary looks for interiorfurniture.The doors also come with a 7-yearlimited warranty.

To see the full range phone 132 136 fora copy of the Laminex Vinyl Doorbrochure.


kg per m2 13.3

MATCHING VINYL DOORS WITHOTHER PANEL MATERIALSDifferent surface materials, such as vinyl,paint and melamine have differentdegrees of UV stability.This should beconsidered if mixing materials in the oneapplication, such as a kitchen, as thedifferent surface materials may fade atdifferent rates over time.


0-850mm 2851mm-1350mm 31351mm-1800mm 41801mm-2400mm 5


CABINET DOORS


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 25.2

Surface Finish Care and CleaningDo not use abrasive powder, solventbased or cream cleaners, scouring pads,wire/steel wool etc.

Do not allow hot objects – such assaucepans or irons to come in contactwith your vinyl surface finish.

Doors/Panels can easily be cleaned usingwarm soapy water and a soft cloth orsponge, (a soft nail or tooth brush maybe used for hard to reach areas) toweldry afterwards.

Stubborn stains and marks (such as ball-point ink) should be removed as soon aspossible by gently wiping the area withmethylated spirits.

Direct exposure to sunlight should be avoided on all doors and panels as fading, bleaching or yellowing may occur.

Precautions where Wall Ovens are installedDo not allow heat, hot gases and fumesproduced by a wall oven to come incontact with the cupboard doors andpanels surrounding the wall oven.Werecommend ducted exhaust installation(see the wall oven manufacturersspecifications), and regular inspection ofthe oven door function including thecondition of the door seal, to avoiddamage such as delamination ordiscoloration caused by leakage.

With all ovens ensure that oven doors are securely closed to avoid heat escape.

A heat deflector shield will have to be installed if the oven front panelexhaust is used which would allow hot gases to come in contact withcupboard doors or panels, please checkwith the wall oven manufacturer.(see top right)

Precautions where benchtop HotPlates are installedDo not use benchtop hot plates withoutthe rangehood exhaust fan activated.The hot plates when in use will generatehigh temperatures and cooking fumes,which if not exhausted efficiently, willlead to excessive heat build up and willdamage the cupboard doors or panelssurrounding the cooktop.We alsorecommend regular inspection of theexhaust fan function including filtercondition for efficient operation.

DOOR INSTALLATIONAs the door substrate is a wood basedpanel, it will react to changes inmoisture, as will natural timber, andhence humidity variations will influencethe extent to which doors will bow.Theeffect of door bow can be minimised byfollowing the minimum specifications fornumber of door hinges per door.

FIRE TESTS - SUBSTRATE(Typically achieved when tested to AS/NZS 1530.3)Indices Result Range


FIRE TESTS OF COMPLETE DOORCone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837(Irradiance of 50kw/m2)Classification Result Unit/RangeGroup Number 3 1-3Average Specific 65.3 m2 / kgExtinction Area

Oven sideview withductedexhaust

✓Oven sideview withfront exhaust

✗



(Typically achieved when tested to AS/NZS 1530.3)Gloss Satin & Texture

Indices Result Result Range


FIRE TESTS- VINYL SURFACE

CABINET DOORS AND PANELS


Laminex® CrystalGloss® surfacesLaminex CrystalGloss Panels areproduced using the latest clearHigh Gloss coating technology overdecorated Laminex Lamiwood MR,ready for the tradesperson tofabricate or install. LaminexCrystalGloss surfaces are availablein full sheets for fabricating usingmatching gloss ABS for edgefinishing or as fabricated doors andpanels.The colour range covers acontemporary selection from theLaminex Colour Palette.CrystalGloss surfaces are alsoavailable in a range of fully edgedand coated stunning High GlossMetallic finishes.

APPLICATIONSCrystalGloss Panels have beenfabricated for installation in kitchen andbathroom cabinetry applications, andalso to bring fresh life to commercialinteriors as cabinetry, joinery andfeature panels. Being a high gloss finish,CrystalGloss surfaces are suitable forvertical applications only.

It is important to be aware that due tothe MR MDF core, CrystalGlossproducts are only recommended forinterior applications.

CrystalGloss Clear products areavailable in 2400mm x 1200mm sheetsor as Made To Order doors and panelswith matching gloss ABS edging oftensizes of up to 3000mm x 1500mm arealso available as special request. (Referto The Laminex CrystalGloss surfacesorder form) Double sided coating canalso be offered.

CrystalGloss Metallic products areavailable as either Made To Order sizeswith a minimum order of 7m2 or as2400mm x 1200mm sheets. Other sheetsizes of up to 3000mm x 1500mm arealso available as special requests. Refer tothe Laminex CrystalGloss surfaces orderform. Sidecoating can also be offered.

SUBSTRATE PROPERTIES(Typical physical properties when tested toAS/NZS 1859.2)

THICKNESS RANGE

Property Unit 18mm


*Values reflect new testing methods for screw holdingproperties in AS/NZS 4266.13-2001 (Int).

DOOR AND PANELINSTALLATIONAs the substrate is a wood based panel,it will react to changes in moisture, aswill natural timber; and hence humidityvariations will influence the extent towhich doors and panels will bow.Theeffect of door bowing can be minimisedby the installation instructions.


0-850mm 2851mm-1350mm 31351mm-1800mm 41801-2400mm 5

Bowing can further be minimised byavoiding large door sizes and panels. Forexample, split pantry doors (rather thanone tall door) and individual doors forbar panels are recommended.


kg per m2: 13.0

FIRE TESTS(Typically achieved when tested toAS/NZS 1530.3)Indices Clear Metallic Range


Cone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837(Irradiance of 50kW/m2)Classification Clear Met. Unit/RangeGroup Number 3 3 1-3Average Specific 31.6 28.9 m2 / kgExtinction Area

THICKNESS 18mm.

COLOUR RANGE CrystalGloss Clear surfaces: areavailable in a range of contemporarycolours from the Laminex ColourPalette that are richly enhanced by theclear High Gloss finish.

CrystalGloss Metallic surfaces: areavailable in an inspiring collection of richlustrous metal effects.

To see the full range phone 132 136 orvisit laminex.com.au for a copy of theLaminex CrystalGloss surfaces brochure.



Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 26.2

WHEN SPECIFYINGMaterials shall be Laminex CrystalGlosssurfaces of specified dimensions……mm x …….mm, as supplied by TheLaminex Group.The Colour shall be……………………

SITE WORK NOTES StorageCrystalGloss products should bestacked flat, be completely supportedand maintain protection of the Glosscoated surfaces.

Avoid storing in direct sunlight orhumidity and temperature extremes.

If stored in direct sunlight for extendedperiods of time, the removal of theprotective film may also become moredifficult.

CrystalGloss surface panels are packagedand despatched with a self-adhesivepolyethylene film on the coated surfaceto protect these gloss finishes fromdamage. It is recommended that thisprotective film is left on the productduring transport, storage, fabrication andinstallation stages.

HandlingKeep work area clean to avoid marringand scratching of coated surfaces.

Avoid contact with abrasive surfaces or grit.Lift panels carefully, do not slide on coatedsurfaces. Do not use as a work surface.

Leave protective film on coated surfacesuntil installation is complete.

FABRICATION GUIDELINES Cutting of Panels For cutting of CrystalGloss surfacespanels, best results will be obtained usinga point-to-point or CNC router. Similarresults will be achieved using a millingmachine on an edge bander.

If using a beam or bench saw to cutCrystalGloss surfaces panels then ensurethat the blade is sharp and in good

operating condition. If not, the quality ofthe cut may be affected, with thepossibility of excessive chip out ordelamination of the coated surface.

CARE AND MAINTENANCE Laminex CrystalGloss surfaces aredurable materials for verticalapplications, but like all materials can bedamaged if used without some careand maintenance.

The following information should help inassisting you maintain the surface of yourCrystalGloss surfaces product with theminimum of time and effort.

CleaningDo wipe off all food and drink spillsimmediately.

Do use warm soapy water for generalcleaning together with a soft fibre cloth.

Greasy marks can be removed with asoft fibre cloth dampened with mineralturpentine.

Do use a mild streak-free glass cleanertogether with a soft fibre cloth toremove surface streaks in line with themanufacturers recommendations forthese cleaning products.

Do Not dry wipe at any time. Spillagesshould be cleaned with a damp soft fibrecloth immediately.

Do Not ever use abrasive cleaners, padsor powders.

Do Not use harsh or aggressive cleaningagents such as Bleach, Acetone,Thinnersor Methylated Spirits.

PolishingHigh gloss finish can be maintained usingMirotone Sprayglow Furniture polish.Minor scratches or scuffing can beremoved by hand using soft micro fibrecloths and non silicone liquid polishessuch as 3M Finesse. Moderate scratchescan be removed using 3000 grit wet

and dry paper followed by buffing with3M Perfect It Extra Cut and 3M Finessefinal polish.

Warning:When cleaning, take care notto rub excessively.This may cause an areaof uneven shine or mar on the area.

Follow these simple rules and yourLaminex CrystalGloss surfaces productswill look good and serve you well inyour kitchen, bathroom or commercialenvironment.



Laminex® Surround™ Coated Doors and PanelsLaminex Surround Coated Doorsand Panels are produced usingworld leading powder coatingtechnology over LaminexCraftwood MR,ready for thetradesperson to install.LaminexSurround Coated Doors andPanels are processed using a‘Coat-To-Size™’ operation,whichmeans every panel is fullyenveloped by a durable andenvironmentally preferablecoating,providing a finishedsolution that is GECA certified.The colour range covers apopular contemporary selectionfrom the Laminex Colour Palette.

APPLICATIONSSurround Coated Doors and Panels havebeen developed to be installed in kitchenand bathroom cabinetry applications.Theyare equally suited to decorative joineryneeds for commercial and residentialinteriors as furniture, wall linings andfeature panels. Surround Coated Doorsand Panels are suitable for vertical interiorapplications such as workstations, livingareas and bedroom furniture.

It is important to be aware thatSurround Coated Doors and Panels areonly recommended for interior use.

Surround Coated Doors and Panels areavailable in a range of Made To Order sizesup to a maximum of 2700mm x 1200mm.A range of edge and face profile optionsare available (see Surround Coated Doorsand Panels Order Form for details)

SUBSTRATE PROPERTIES(Typical physical properties when tested toAS/NZS 1859.2)

THICKNESS RANGE

Property Unit 18mm


*Values reflect new testing methods for screw holdingproperties in AS/NZS 4266.13-2001 (Int).

DOOR AND PANELINSTALLATIONAs the substrate is a wood based panel,it will react to changes in moisture, aswill natural timber; and hence humidityvariations will influence the extent towhich doors and panels will bow.Theeffect of door bowing can be minimisedby the installation instructions.


0-850mm 2851mm-1350mm 31351mm-1800mm 41801-2400mm 5

Bowing can further be minimised byavoiding large door sizes and panels. Forexample, split pantry doors (rather thanone tall door) and individual doors forbar panels are recommended.


kg per m2: 13.1



Cone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837(Irradiance of 50kW/m2)Classification Result Unit/RangeGroup Number 3 1-3Average Specific 56.4 m2/KgExtinction Area

THICKNESS 18mm.

COLOUR RANGE Surround Coated Doors and Panels areavailable in a range of contemporarycolours from the Laminex ColourPalette in an inviting Suede finish.To seethe full range phone 132 136 or visitlaminex.com.au for a copy of theLaminex Surround Coated Doors andPanels brochure.

GREENfirst® PRODUCTLaminex SurroundCoated Doors andPanels is a Greenfirstproduct and is certifiedby Good EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.

LA-2008 GECA 28-2006–




Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 27.2

WHEN SPECIFYINGMaterials shall be Laminex SurroundCoated Doors, or Panels of specifieddimensions ……mm x …….mm, assupplied by The Laminex Group.TheColour shall be …………………… inSuede finish.

SITE WORK NOTES StorageSurround Coated Doors and Panelsproducts should be stacked flat, becompletely supported and maintainprotection of the coated surfaces.

Avoid storing in direct sunlight orhumidity and temperature extremes.

Surround Coated Doors and Panelsare packaged and despatched in aspecific crate or package per order.Thiswill protect the integrity of the coatedsurfaces from in-transit damage. Careshould be taken not to damage thesecrates or packages, or store heavyobjects on top of these crates thatmay pierce or crush the packaging.

HandlingKeep work area clean to avoid marringand scratching of coated surfaces.

Avoid contact with abrasive surfacesor grit. Lift panels carefully, do not slideon coated surfaces. Do not use as awork surface.

FABRICATION GUIDELINES Cutting of Panels Being a fully enveloped panel, it is notrecommended to cut Surround CoatedDoors and Panels, as this would breakthe coated panel envelope.

When specific panel sizes are required(up to 2700mm x 1200mm), then takeadvantage of the Surround ‘Coat ToSizeTM’ process offering. In this wayyour Made To Order panel can beprovided with all edges and both facescoated, avoiding the need to cut andedge panels.

Doors or panels can be ordered withhinge hole drilling if required (seeSurround Coated Doors & Panels OrderForm for details). Hinge holes are drilledbefore the coating process, in this waythe hinge holes will also be coated aspart of the enveloped finished product.

INSTALLATIONCare should be taken not to installSurround Coated Doors and Panels inareas of direct sunlight, as some slightcolour change may result.

CARE AND MAINTENANCE Laminex Surround Coated Doors andPanels are durable surfaces for verticalinterior applications, but like allmaterials can be damaged if usedwithout proper care and maintenance.

The following information should helpin assisting you maintain the surface ofyour Surround Coated Doors andPanels product with the minimum oftime and effort.

CleaningDo wipe off all food and drink spillsimmediately.

Do use a soft micro-fibre style clothdampened with warm soapy water towipe over the Surround Coated productto remove finger marks and smudges.Dry immediately. Any spots or spillsshould be wiped over and driedimmediately.

Do use mild citrus based cleaners (suchas Orange Power Multipurpose cleaner),Nifti liquid cleaner or Spray and Wipetype cleaning agents (avoid baking soda)for stubborn stains. Apply the cleaningagent directly to a soft micro-fibre cloth.Using firm pressure, work the cleanerover the entire area in a circular motion.Follow up immediately with waterdampened soft micro-fibre cloth andbuff dry. Always follow themanufacturers recommendations forthese cleaning products.

Do use a mild streak-free glass cleaner(such as Windex) together with a softmicro-fibre cloth to remove surfacestreaks in line with the manufacturersrecommendations for these cleaningproducts.

Do Not use harsh or aggressive cleaningagents such as Bleach, Ammonia, Acid,Caustic Products, Acetone,Thinners,MEK (methyl ethyl ketone), Solvents,Turpentine, Methylated Spirits or anyother organic solvent-based products.Never use oven cleaners, steel wool,scourer pads or sandpaper.

Whilst Surround Coated Doors andPanels are generally resistant to solvents,avoid the use of aggresive cleaningagents where possible.

Warning:When cleaning, take care notto rub excessively.This may cause an areaof uneven shine or mar on the area.

Follow these simple rules and yourLaminex Surround Coated Doors andPanels will look good and serve you wellin your kitchen and bathroom cabinetryor interior decorative joinery applications.

FURNITURE SYSTEMS


Laminex® Partitioning SystemsLaminex offer Toilet andShower Partitioning Systemsthat are easy to use and high inperformance.The LaminexPartitioning Systems aresupplied in Laminex laminatedboard as well as LaminexCompact Laminates that coverall levels of toilet and showerpartitioning requirements.

The partitioning systems applicationtypes and appropriate board typessupplied are:

13MM LAMINEX COMPACTLAMINATES13mm Laminex® Compact Laminate is aflat decorative panel based onthermosetting resins, homogeneouslyreinforced with cellulose fibres andmanufactured under high pressure andtemperature.

Using special techniques, the panels havean integrated, decorative surface madeof melamine-impregnated paper.

13mm Applications

Applications or recommended areas ofuse for the Laminex CompactLaminates Premium Shower and ToiletPartitioning Systems are Schools,Colleges, Caravan Parks, Gymnasiums,Sporting Change Rooms, Hotels, Clubs,Shopping Centres, Public Areas orwherever a highly water resistant, tough,hard-wearing and easy-to-care forsurface is the desired outcome.

For further information on the productperformance and technical specificationsof Laminex Compact Laminates refer tothe Laminex Compact Laminatessection of the product catalogue onpage 5.11

18MM LAMINEX STRUCTURALBOARDThe Laminex Structural 18mm board isa Laminex Aquaboard core, pre-finished on both sides with adecorative water-resistant and hardwearing melamine surface.

18mm Applications

Applications or recommended areas ofuse are areas subject to low abusewhere a decorative and easy-to-care forsurface is the desired outcome. Such asOffices, Hotels, Restaurants andShopping Centres, excluding areas thatare hosed for cleaning.

For further information on the productperformance and technical specificationsof Laminex Structural MR – refer to theLaminex Structural MR section of theproduct catalogue on page 5.7.

The Complete Partitioning System When accurate dimensions areprovided, Laminex Partitioning Systemsare supplied with all of the panels, footassemblies, head and wall chanelling andhardware (including screws) neatlypacked into a solid wooden box.Thepanels are accurately cut and almostcompletely pre-drilled. The partitioningsystems even include the necessary drillbits, silicone sealant and installation planto make installation as straight forwardas possible.

Please note that three hinges aresupplied with the hardware kit and allhinges must be used.

Care and MaintenanceIf you have a soiled surface, built-upgrime or a light stain, clean with warmsoapy water or a detergent.To maintaina highly decorative surface, hard abrasivecleaners are not recommended.

For further information on the completeLaminex Partitioning System productoffer, installation guidelines and coloursavailable – refer to the LaminexPartitioning Systems brochure or call132 136.

ACCESSORIES


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 29.1

Laminex® HandlesWhether you select LaminexContour, ColourTech,Vinyl,Timber or Timber VeneerDoors, you can give your designthat finishing touch withLaminex’s comprehensiverange of handles.

The range includes:• Metal• Timber

Whatever the chosen style, there is a Laminex handle to compliment and complete your kitchen, bathroom, laundry orfurniture look.

For the full range of Laminex handles call 132 136 to obtain a copy of the handles brochure.

ACCESSORIES


Laminex® Thin Melamine Unglued Edging

APPLICATIONSLaminex® Continuous Melamine Edgingis recommended for all types of edgetreatment for particleboard, mediumdensity fibreboard and plywood. It issupplied unglued for bonding with hot melts.

PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICSRoll Sizes (nominal):Unglued 100m Width (nominal): 22mm

Some Natural Laminex ContinuousMelamine Edging is available to matchthe current Vertiboard/Lamiwoodrange of colours. Special widths can bemanufactured to order dependent onminimum order quantities.

WHEN SPECIFYINGEdging shall be Continuous MelamineEdging as manufactured by The LaminexGroup. Colour and/or pattern shall be.......... in .......... natural finish.

STORAGERolls of Laminex Continuous MelamineEdging should be stored in dry conditionsat temperatures not below 18°C.


Wear Value: Average wear not lessthan 50 cycles

Stain Resistance: Pass AS/NZS 2924.1type VLS

APPLICATIONRECOMMENDATIONSFor best adhesion, the room, equipmentand material temperature will be ideallymaintained at minimum of 18ºC.Machine components such as pressurerollers, which are in contact with edging,can cause heat loss and should bemaintained at equal to or above 18ºC tomax 40ºC. Substrate moisture content:8 -10%.

HINTS FOR EDGE BANDINGAs this is a thermally reliant process,cold air draughts can affect satisfactoryinterface bonding temperaturessignificantly. Ensure edge bander is notsubject to cold air draughts. For bestadhesion, the room, equipment andmaterial temperature should not be lessthan a minimum of 18ºC, to max 40ºC.

Other Hints:• Keep edging clean and store edging in

a dry place

• To maintain satisfactory molten adhesive do not allow adhesive tank torun down before refilling . Keep tank full by adding to adhesive tank as required

• Adhesive tanks should be inspected and cleaned regularly

• Similarly, if using a cartridge system,maintain a charged system

• Be careful not to contaminate adhesives by allowing dirt, dust or foreign matter to be mixed with the adhesive

Generally adhesives begin to degrade overtime at temperatures above 180ºC. It isgood practice to lower temperatures to120ºC if the machine is not intended to beused for prolonged periods.

To effectively complete heat transfer andbonding of both materials, adequate use ofpressure on pressure roller is required. 3.5Bar in a range of 3 to 5 Bar is generallysufficient.

Substrate temperature can affect rapid heatloss when applying adhesives.Therefore it isrecommended to use a heating fencewhere possible if minimum temperaturescannot be maintained.

Periodically check accuracy of temperatureguages supplied on the edge bandermachines. If left un-calibrated they canindicate inaccuraely by as much as +\-20ºC.

Laminex Melamine Edging isformulated to achieveexceptional performance.The combination of modifiedmelamine thermosettingresins and continuous hotpressing, ensures high wearand stain resistance.

ACCESSORIES


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 30.2

Hot Melt TypesThere are many commercial hot meltsavailable. It is recommended thatadhesive products chosen are specificallyformulated for use with melaminelaminate edge strip. Ensure that OH&Sprocedures, technical support andapplication technology of useinformation is available and wellsupported by the adhesive supplier.

Unglued Edging ApplicationHot Melt Adhesive loading:3.5 to 4.0 gms per lineal meter (21mmwidth) or as determined by edge banderoperator required to achieve satisfactoryresults dependent on type of hot meltadhesive used.

Hot Melt Applicator Temperature:190° to 200°C

Hot melt Temp at Pressure Roller:180° minimum

Pressure Roller Temperature:18°C minimum40ºC maximum

Feed Speed:6.5 to 20 meters/min

Helpful Hints for Unglued EdgeBandingAs this is a thermally reliant process,cold air draughts can affect satisfactoryinterface bonding temperaturessignificantly. Ensure edge bander is notsubject to cold air draughts. For bestadhesion, the room, equipment andmaterial temperature should not be lessthan a minimum 18°C.

GREENfirst PRODUCTLaminex Thin MelamineUnglued Edging is aGreenfirst™ productand is certified byGood EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.





ACCESSORIES


Laminex® Thin Melamine Preglued Edging

APPLICATIONSLaminex® Continuous MelaminePreglued Edging is recommended for alltypes of edge treatment forparticleboard, medium densityfibreboard and plywood. It is suppliedpre-glued with a hot melt.

PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICSRoll Sizes (nominal):Preglued 100m

25mWidth (nominal): 22mm

Some natural Laminex ContinuousMelamine Edging is available to matchthe current Vertiboard/Lamiwoodrange of colours. Special widths can bemanufactured to order dependent onminimum order quantities.

WHEN SPECIFYINGEdging shall be Continuous MelamineEdging as manufactured by The LaminexGroup. Colour and/or pattern shall be.......... in .......... finish.

STORAGERolls of Laminex Continuous MelamineEdging should be stored in dry conditionsat temperatures not below 18°C.



Stain Resistance: Pass AS/NZS 2924.1 type VLS

BONDINGa. General. Because this product is

basically a melamine laminate and nota coated paper, it requires higheroperating temperature at the glue line.To ensure a successful bond thefollowing recommendations should be followed:

1. Avoid cold air draughts in the areawhere the edgebanding operation isperformed.

2. Store edging in a dry place, maintainingtemperature at or above 18°C.

3. Use adequate pressure on pressure roller.

4. Always use heating fence where fitted.5. Periodically check the accuracy of

temperature gauges; these can be out by as much as 50°C.

6. Do not use Laminex Continuous Melamine Edging if the material has been allowed to become damp or wet, or if its temperature is less than 18°C. Substrate moisture contentshould be 8-10%.

b. Pre-glued Continuous MelamineEdging. To achieve adequate bonding,a glue film temperature at the point ofcontact of 140°C must be achieved.Commercial edge banders with a feedspeed of 6-8m/min. and a hot airtemperature of 300°C, willsuccessfully bond Laminex Pre-gluedContinuous Melamine Edging.For an ‘iron-on’ operation temperaturesgreater than 250°C are recommendedto achieve a glue film temperature of140°C.This is achieved normally after10-15 seconds (under pressure) andan ‘iron-on’ speed of 60-70 secondsper metre length.

GREENfirst PRODUCTLaminex ThinMelamine PregluedEdging is a Greenfirst™

product and is certified by GoodEnvironmental ChoiceAustralia as environmentally preferable.

Laminex Melamine Edging isformulated to achieveexceptional performance.The combination of modifiedmelamine thermosettingresins and continuous hotpressing, ensures high wearand stain resistance.






Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

ACCESSORIES

Section 5: 32.1

Laminex® ABS Edging

ADVANTAGES• ABS can be applied around tight

corners. Although it will ‘whiten’ on thebend, original colour can be restored by applying heat such as with a hot air blower, to the affected area.

• Normal waste disposal procedures areacceptable.

• It does not give off toxic fumes when burning.

• It is recognised as being environmentallyfriendly.

APPLICATIONSSuitable for use as a matching orcontrasting edge finish for furniture, desktops, cupboard doors and drawers,shopfittings and display panels etc.,where a high impact aestheticallyappealing edge is required.

WHEN SPECIFYINGLaminex® ABS Edging as supplied by TheLaminex Group. Colour shall be ..........

Note:Woodgrains are through woodgrain,patterns are patterned edging.

SITE WORK NOTES• Rolls of edging should be stored in dry

conditions at a temperature of 18-25°C.• All Laminex ABS Edging is supplied

primed ready for use with conventional hot melt adhesives.

• Avoid cold air draughts in the area where the edgebanding operation is performed.

• Use a high melting point hot melt witha loading of 3.5-4.0 gr/lineal metre (22mm width).

• Use adequate pressure on pressure roller.• Periodically check the accuracy of

temperature gauges, as these can be out by as much as 50°C.

• Always use heating fence where fitted.• Do not use edging if it has been

allowed to become damp or extremely cold.

• A glue tank temperature of 190°C-210°C and applicator roll temperature of 200°C-215°C are recommended. Bond failure may occurif glue temperature at the applicator roller is below 190°C.

• Maintain constant glue level in glue tank by adding glue often. Do not let

tank run down and then add large quantity as this will dramatically reduceglue temperature in tank even though gauges may still indicate required temperature.

• Machine speeds of a minimum of 20m/min are recommended.

• Four bladed milling cutters of approx.70mm diam. and running at 12000 RPM will give an excellent finish.

• A hot air source of between 375°C-450°C and feed speed of 6-8m/min will successfully bond pre-glued edging.

Cleaning• Removal of hot melt adhesive residues

from the surface of ABS edging can be accomplished by rubbing with a soft cloth containing Laminex ABS Cleaner or white spirits or similar aliphatic hydrocarbon solvent.

• Care must be exercised with rubbing as severe rubbing can result in gloss change to the surface.

• Solvents are hazardous. Please read the Material Safety Data Sheet for the solvent before it is used.

Width: 21mm, 22mm. Other widths available subject to enquiry.

Thickness: Solid Colours,Woodgrain and Prints2mm. Plus 1mmoption

Roll Length: 100LM25 LM

Colour Range: Most popular solid colours and a selected range of patterns and woodgrains are available.


Laminex ABS Edging isavailable in a range of coloursdesigned to match LaminexContour Doors, Laminexlaminates and board products.It is light fast under normalinternal applications and hashigh dimensional stability. It isresistant to commonhousehold cleaning agents,weak acids and alkalines.However, strong acids,aromatic hydrocarbons, estersand ketones will all attack ABS.

WALL SYSTEMS ADHESIVE


Laminex® Wall Systems AdhesiveLaminex Wall SystemsAdhesive is a high strength,polychloroprene rubber basedadhesive/sealant supplied in aready to use cartridge. It curesto form a tough, flexible heatresistant bond.

APPLICATIONSLaminex® Wall Systems Adhesive isrecommended for bonding a widevariety of materials in dry and wet areasincluding timber, tileboard, hardboard,gyprock, steel, aluminum and cementsheeting etc.

It is not suitable for the bonding ofpolystyrene foam.

PROPERTIESColour: Pale YellowSolids: 42% approx.Viscosity: 180,000 CPS @ 25°C

approx.Specific Gravity: 0.95 Kg/LtCoverage: A 300ml cartridge will

form 15 metres of a 5mm bead

DIRECTIONSSurfaces to be bonded must be cleanand free from paint, oil, grease, dust, etc.Apply a 4-5mm bead of Laminex WallSystems Adhesive to each stud, battenor frame section be be covered.

On flat surfaces apply bead aroundperimeter and space zig-zag beads400mm apart vertically and horizontally.

Position material to be bonded and presstogether ensuring a transference ofadhesive to back of panel over total area.

Pull the two surfaces apart and allowthe adhesive to become tacky for 5 – 15 minutes depending on weatherconditions. Press the two surfacestogether. Use a rubber mallet or ahammer and clean block of wood toensure a complete bond.

The joint will continue to gain strengthfor 2-3 days and maximum stress loadingshould not be applied until such time.

CLEAN UPLaminex Trade Essentials AdhesiveCleaner or mineral turpentine.



WALL SYSTEMS SILICONE


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s5

Section 5: 34.1

Laminex® Wall Systems SiliconeLaminex Wall Systems Siliconeis a neutral cure siliconesealant which is applied directlyfrom the cartridge.The curedsealant will retain itselastomeric qualities underharsh conditions andtemperature extremes with apermanently flexible jointcapable of accommodating upto 35% total join movement.Mould and mildew resistant, itwill not crack or crumble.

APPLICATIONSA Silicone sealant for installation ofLaminex Aquapanel providing awaterproof seal for bathrooms, showerrecesses, laundries and for sealingaround kitchen benchtops, cupboards,splashbacks and around sinks.

FABRICATIONLaminex® Wall Systems Silicone issuitable for internal and external use on glass, wood, aluminium, glazedceramics, fiberglass, stainless steel,vitreous enamel, rigid PVC, ABS andzincalume. Install Laminex Aquapanelleaving a 3mm gap for Laminex WallSystems Silicone application.

Ensure surfaces to be sealed are dry and free from oil, dirt or grease.Clean surfaces with solvent such as WhiteSpirits, Isopropyl Alcohol or Prepsol.

Cut cartridge nozzle to desired beadwidth. Apply Laminex Wall SystemsSilicone in a steady continuous beadensuring firm contact between LaminexWall Systems Silicone and gap surfaces.

Tool off sealant to a smooth finish with aspatula. Clean off any excess LaminexWall Systems Silicone on the surfacewith a damp cloth, Laminex TradeEssentials Adhesive Cleaner or mineralturpentine.

Note: Although Laminex Wall SystemsSilicone is waterproof it should not beused in situations where it is continuallyimmersed in water.

Laminex Wall Systems Silicone cannotbe overpainted due to paint films havinglow adhesion values to silicone rubbercomponents.

PROPERTIESAppearance: Colour matched to theLaminex Aquapanel colours. Refer toproduct brochure.

Base: Neutral cure.Reactive with atmospheric moisture.

Cured State: Permanently elastic.Mid modulus.

Service Temperature: -50°C to +150°CApplication Temperature: -10°C to +40°CTooling Time: 10 minsPackaging: 410 gram CartridgeStorage: Cool dry conditions

not more than 25°CShelf Life: 12 months if stored

correctly.

Please read the Material Safety DataSheet for this product before it is used.

Section 6

POSTFORMING GRADE LAMINATE

Section 6: 1.1

Formica® Decorative LaminateFormica® Decorative Laminateis a postforming high pressuredecorative laminate. Internal orexternal curves can be formeddown to a recommendedminimum radius of 10.0mm.

Benchtops, breakfast bars,special shapes and otherproducts can be manufacturedby independent fabricators toindividual specifications.

APPLICATIONSFormica® Decorative Laminate can beused in a variety of applications.Theseinclude: counters, bench and table tops,store fixtures, office furniture, vanityunits, display work, reception areas, wallpanelling, toilet partitions, and door anddrawer fronts.

It is also suitable for medical, dental andfood preparation areas.

PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICSSheet Sizes: 1800mm x 1500mm(Velour, Gloss) 1800mm x 750mm

3600mm x 1500mm3600mm x 700mm

Thickness: 0.7mm (nominal)Mass: 0.9kg/m2

Finish: Velour, Gloss

Tolerances comply with Australian/NewZealand Standard AS/NZS 2924.1.

WHEN SPECIFYINGSurfacing shall be Formica DecorativeLaminates as supplied by The LaminexGroup, Pattern shall be .... in .... finish.

SUBSTRATESFormica Decorative Laminates should bebonded to a suitable substrate such ashigh moisture-resistant and standardparticleboard, high moisture-resistantand marine grade ply or medium densityfibreboard. A smooth surface is

important. Rougher substrates such aslarge-chip particleboard may result in avisually unacceptable product.

LIMITATIONSDo not use externally or in areas whereprolonged exposure to temperaturesexceeding 135º may occur. Must besupported by recommended substrate overentire surface area. Do not bond directly toplaster, concrete walls or gypsum wallboard.

PROPERTIESCompositionFormica Decorative Laminate consists ofseveral base layers of phenolic resin-impregnated kraft paper. A layer ofmelamine-impregnated paper in a solidcolour or printed design is applied to thedecorative side of the base. Printed designsare covered with a transparent overlaycontaining melamine.The layers are bondedunder heat and pressure.The back of thelaminate is sanded to permit good bonding.

FIRE HAZARD INDICES(Typically achieved when tested to AS/NZS 1530.3)Indices Result Range


Cone Calorimeter:Typical values for Formica laminateswhen tested to Australian/New ZealandStandard AS/NZS 3837.

AS/NZS 3837Heat Release kW/m2 50.5Specifc Extinction Area, m2/kg 71.6Building Code of Australia 2Group Classification

Tests on Formica Decorative Laminatewere conducted by the Australian WoolTesting Authority Ltd at Flemington,Victoria.

The laminate was unadhered.

Specification:AS/NZS 2924.1,Type HGP: HighPressure decorative laminates - sheetsmade from thermosetting resins.

Finish:Average gloss level using a Gardner 60ºmeter of 11 for velour finish; and 104 forglossy finish.

Thickness Tolerance:A variation of no more than ±0.10mm.

Appearance:Minimal defects permissible wheninspected in accordance with Australian/New Zealand Standard AS/NZS 2924.1.

Resistance to Surface Wear:Average wear resistance of not less than350 taber cycles. Initial wear point notless than 150 taber cycles.




Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Fo

rmic

a®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s6

Resistance to Immersion in Boiling Water:No more than 19% increase in weightand 21% increase in thickness for 0.7mmlaminates. No more than a moderatechange in gloss and/or colour.

Resistance to dry heatNo more than a slight change in glossand/or colour after 20 minutes incontact with a container holding glyceroltristearate at 180ºC for velour finish, ora moderate change for glossy finish.

Resistance to Scratching:Resists a force of 2 Newtons whenscratched with a diamond stylus. Glosshas a scratch resistance of no less than0.5 Newtons.

Dimensional Stability:After exposure to controlled high andlow humidity conditions, a dimensionalchange of no more than: 0.75% with thegrain and 1.25% across the grain.

Resistance to Impact:No visible damage when subjected to animpact of 20N from a 5mm steel ballmounted at one end of a spring-loaded bolt.

Resistance to Staining:No staining by 34 specified reagents.Moderate staining by 15 additional specifiedreagents is permitted, but a mild abrasivecreme cleanser (not recommended onglossy finish) should easily remove the stains.Highly abrasive cleaners are notrecommended for stain removal.

Resistance to Colour Change inArtificial Light:No more than a slight colour change inXenon arc light (minimum 6 on BlueWool Scale).

Formica Decorative Laminates comply withthe colour fastness requirements of theAustralian/ New Zealand Standard AS/NZS2924.1.They have good colour retentionunder normal conditions of internal use.

Prolonged exposure to sunlight maycause some change in colour. For thisreason, Formica Decorative Laminatesare not recommended for external use.

Resistance to Cigarette Burns:No more than a moderate change ingloss and/or moderate brown staining.

Formability:Will satisfactorily postform to a minimuminternal or external radius of 10mmwithout cracking, blistering or delaminating.

Resistance to Blistering:After the sample temperature hasreached 163ºC at the specified heat uprate, a minimum time of 15 secondsshould elapse before blistering occurs.

Resistance to Steam:No more than a moderate change ofgloss and/or colour.

DESIGN AND SPECIFICATIONNOTESFormica Decorative Laminate can beformed by specialist fabricators to arecommended minimum internal orexternal radius of 10.0mm.

Some fabricators have the ability toform to radii below the recommendedminimum.

Any requirements for smaller radii willbe negotiated between specifier andmanufacturer.

STATIONARY FORMINGPostforming (P/F) Laminate bonded withsuitable adhesive to pre-shaped core.

Area to be formed must reach 163ºCbefore forming.

This temperature can be controlled andmonitored by the use of “tempilaq”(heat sensitive liquid).

Apply tempilaq on the area to beheated. Allow heat up time to elapse.

The tempilaq will melt at the prescribedtemperatures and give an immediate,accurate visible indication of thetemperature on the laminate surface.Heat up and bending must becompleted before the laminate blisters,• Tempilaq must melt across the entire

area to ensure tight forming.

• Heat up time is 20 to 28 sec.before forming.

• Blister time is in excess of 34 sec.

Any cracking along the top or bottom ofthe postformed edge is a clear indicationof insufficient heat either on top oralong the bottom of the bend.

Tempilaq will indicate the area affected byinsufficient heat.Adjust the heat accordingly.

Settings for best post forming will varyfrom machine to machine. It is thefabricator’s responsibility to optimisesettings using the guidelines supplied.

Common Problems EncounteredDuring Postforming1. Factors affecting changes in heat uptime:a. Patternb. Colourc. Sheet thicknessd. Room temperaturee. Board temperaturef. Relative humidityg. Draughts from doorways or other

openings

2. Main factors contributing to cracks whenpostforming are:a. Rough substrate profile preparationb. Wrong heat up ratec. Insufficent heatd. Very cold substrate and laminatee. Uneven heat distributionf. Element too far from laminateg. Heating element too cold

3. Main factors contributing to blisteringwhen postforming are:a. Heating the laminate for too longb. Uneven heat distributionc. Warped materiald. Heating element too hot

4. Main factors contributing todelamination when postforming are:a. Insufficient heatb. Insufficient gluec. Insufficient pressure

Remember• Temperature must be uniform along

the postformed length.

Section 6: 1.2



• Too much tension can cause “tension cracks” as the laminate cools.

• Insufficient heat and pressure will leave a gap between laminate and substrate, creating a hollow area which is susceptible to cracking onimpact.

• Use a hand roller to press down along bend to ensure proper adhesion to substrate.

• Condition laminate and substrate together for at least 48 hours prior tofabrication. Ideal environment is 24ºC and 45% relative humidity.

CooktopsWhen using Formica Decorative Laminateas a splashback, please refer to themanufacturer’s installation recommendationsfor cooktops around combustible materials.

WHEN SPECIFYINGSurfacing shall be Formica PostformingGrade laminate as manufactured by TheLaminex Group. Colours and/or patternsshall be .....in ....finish. Sheet size shall be.....

DESIGN CAPABILITIESFormica Decorative Laminate can have a180º rounded edge. It has a heatresistant surface up to 135ºC.

PRODUCT DATAStorageSheets should be stored flat and face-to-face to reduce the possibility of damage.Bulk stocks should be stored flat onsupports and covered to protect fromdust. Sheets should be withdrawn inpairs with a sheet of paper between.

HandlingTo avoid scratching or marking thesurface, work areas should be kept clean.Contact with any abrasive surface shouldbe avoided. Sheets should be liftedcarefully and care should be taken notto slide them on the decorative surface.

CuttingFormica® Decorative Laminate shouldalways be cut with the working face upto minimise surface chipping.

Hand SawingA sharp panel saw gives good resultsdue to its small teeth.The cutting

stroke should be held at approximately45º to the sheet and the back strokeshould be light.

Machine SawingBench-type circular saws, with a pitch of6mm to 8.5mm and only a slight set,provide a clean cut of the decorativesurface. Metal band saws are ideal forcutting shapes.

PlaningAn excellent edge finish can be achievedwith a hand plane.

Hand PlaningSpecially hardened plane irons, such as“Titan”, require less sharpening thanstandard iron plane knives.

Machine PlaningVertical spindle moulding machines withtungsten-tipped cutters are ideal foredge finishing and for making mitres.

DrillingHand or power operated high-speedtwist drills will cut clean holes. Due tothe hard melamine surface, a small pilothole should be drilled for carpenter’sbits. Fast cut types give the best results.For large holes 20mm diameter andover, a centre bit should be used.

BendingForming is accomplished by applyinginfra-red heat to the laminate in the areaof the bend. Once it has reached therequired temperature of 163ºC, thesheet is formed with the aid of amandrel.The sheet is allowed to cool andbond whilst held in the desired shape.Due to the high degree of control neededto bend Formica Decorative Laminate, thiswork is usually carried out in theworkshop by an experienced fabricatorusing special postforming equipment.

BondingEnsure that the surface to which theFormica Decorative Laminate is to bebonded is clean, dust-free and withoutirregularities.

Formica Decorative Laminate can bebonded with several types of adhesive;the choice depends on the particular

application. Refer to the adhesivemanufacturer for details of particularadhesive types.

All adhesive on the decorative surfaceshould be removed immediately.

JOININGWaterproof mastic should be used toprevent the ingress of water into thesubstrate or glue line at butt joints. SelleysBath Tub Caulk-White or 781 clear silicone,or Dow Corning 732 RTU clear siliconeare recommended, used in accordancewith the manufacturer’s instructions.Thisshould also be done when extrudedaluminium or PVC joint strips are used.

Corner joining methods include: Full Mitre,Mason’s Mitre and Aluminium joining strip.Full mitre is the only means of joining acove top or specially shaped components.

Each of these joining methods can bepre-cut by the fabricator for assemblyon site.

The use of Radiused corners in cutoutsis the recommended way of reducingstress by distributing it over a wider arearather than directing it to a 90º corner. Itis important to smooth the edges of theradius cutout with a fine tooth file as thiswill further reduce any stress in theconstruction. Over-cutting inside cornersshould be avoided as this may increasethe risk of stress cracks.

GREENfirst PRODUCTFormica DecorativeLaminate is aGreenfirst™ product and is certified byGood EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.





Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Fo

rmic

a®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s6

Section 6: 2.1

Formica® Liner Grade LaminateFormica Liner Grade laminateis a medium duty decorativesurface suitable for lining theinterior of cabinetry in indoorapplications.

APPLICATIONSFormica® Liner Grade laminate is suitable for both commercial anddomestic applications for lining theinternal surfaces of cabinetry such asdrawers, shelves and cupboards, and theundersides of benchtops, furniture, tabletops and desktops.

Formica Liner Grade laminate ismedium duty and should not be usedon exposed surfaces.

# Texture only in 2440 x 1220mm size

Formica Liner Grade laminate meetsAS/NZS 2924, for high-pressuredecorative laminates.

LIMITATIONSDo not use externally or in areas whereprolonged exposure to temperaturesexceeding 135ºC may occur. FormicaLiner Grade Laminate is not a structuralelement and must be supported byrecommended substrate over entiresurface area. Do not apply to plasterboardor concrete walls or to gypsum wallboard.

FIRE TESTSCone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837(Irradiance of 50kW/m2)Classification Result 0.6,1.2mm Unit/Range

Group Number 1, 2 1-3Average Specific 49.1, 52.1 m2/kgExtinction Area

PROPERTIES(AS/NZS 2924.1 VGS Type)PROPERTY REQUIREMENTResistant to Average wear not Surface Wear: less than 150 cyclesResistance to No deterioration Immersion in other than a slight Boiling Water: change of gloss and/or

colour. Gain in weight of not more than 15% for 0.6mm

Resistance to No requirementDry Heat at 180°C:Resistance to No deterioration Steam: other than a slight

change of gloss/colourDimensional Dimensional change Stability: of not more than

0.75% with grain and 1.25% across grain for 0.6mm

Resistance to Greater than 1 NewtonScratching: forceResistance to Reagents Groups Staining: 1 and 2 = No visible

change.Reagents Groups 3 and 4 = Slight change of colour/gloss

Resistance to Not more than slight Colour Change colour change in in Artificial Light*: Xenon arc light

Grey scale >4 at Blue Wool scale 6

Resistance to No requirementCigarette Burns:

* Formica Liner Grade laminate has good colour retention and dimensional stability in normalinterior applications. However, prolonged exposure tosunlight may cause shrinkage and/or some change incolour. Formica Liner Grade laminate is therefore notrecommended for external applications or interiorapplications with prolonged exposure to direct sunlight.

WHEN SPECIFYINGSurfacing shall be Formica LinerGrade laminate as supplied by TheLaminex Group. Colours and/or patternshall be .......... in .......... finish.

Sizes: 3050mm x 1300mm2440mm x 1220mm

Thickness: 0.6 & 1.2mm#(nominal)Weight: 0.9 & 1.7kg/m2 approx.Finish: Gloss,TextureColours and Refer to current Pattern Range: Product Availability

Chart






Formica® Chemtop®2™ LaminateFormica Chemtop2 is a high-pressure decorativelaminate. It is designedspecifically for applicationswhich require strong resistanceto chemicals.

USESFormica Chemtop2 laminates are usedon horizontal and vertical surfaces inchemical, medical and pathogeniclaboratories, also in clinics and incommercial, institutional and industrialoperations. Chemtop2 has increasedresistance to alkalis, many acids,corrosive salts and solvents.

A detailed list of chemicals against whichChemtop2’s performance has beenmeasured is shown on pages 6:7 - 6:8.

DIMENSIONSFormica Chemtop2 is available in 3600 x1500mm sheet size only. FormicaChemtop2 mass approximately 1.32kg/m2.

LIMITATIONSIt is not recommended that FormicaChemtop2 laminates be applied directlyto plastered or concrete walls or togypsum wallboard.

Do not use externally or in areas whereprolonged exposure to temperaturesexceeding 135ºC may be experienced.

‘Butt’ matches between FormicaChemtop2 and standard laminate is notrecommended due to the integralcoating on Formica Chemtop2 resultingin a slightly different hue than itscorresponding standard laminate.

Do not chop, slice, pound or hammeron Formica Chemtop2 surface.

Chemtop laminate should be protectedfrom damage caused by high heat, suchas heat created from Bunsen burners.The Bunsen burner should be placed ona trivet to protect the laminate surface.

PROPERTIESFormica Chemtop2 complies withAS/NZS 2924.1.1998 for High PressureDecorative Laminates - sheets madefrom thermosetting resins, classificationHGP (postforming grade).

Formica Chemtop2 laminates haveproperties similar to general decorativelaminate but their high technologycomposition yields increased chemicalresistance.

COMPOSITIONFormica Chemtop2 consists of severallayers of phenolic resin impregnated kraftpaper combined with surface colour papertreated in a special integral coating.Allpapers are then bonded under controlledheat and pressure.

SPECIFICATIONAustralian Standard AS/NZS 2924.1.1998,class HGP for ‘High Pressure DecorativeLaminates’.

THICKNESS TOLERANCEFormica Chemtop2: 0.97+0.13mm.

APPEARANCENo more than 0.6mm2 of surfaceimpurities per sheet of laminate (NEMA LD 3-2005).

RESISTANCE TO SURFACEWEARWear resistance of not less than 350cycles.

RESISTANCE TO IMMERSION INBOILING WATERNo more than 15% increase in weightand 18% increase in thickness forFormica Chemtop2.

RESISTANCE TO DRY HEATNo more than a slight change in gloss orcolour after 20 minutes in contact witha container holding glycerol tristearate at180ºC.

DIMENSIONAL STABILITYAfter exposure to controlled high andlow humidity conditions, a dimensionalchange of not more than 0.6% with thegrain and 1.05% across the grain forFormica Chemtop2.

RESISTANCE TO IMPACTSmall ball impact resistance of >or=20N force.

RESISTANCE TO CRACKINGNo worse than hairline cracks, onlyvisible under magnification, after sampleshad been exposed for 6 hours at 50ºC.



Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Fo

rmic

a®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s6

Section 6: 3.2

RESISTANCE TO STAINING(AS/NZS 2924.1.1998 PART 15)No effect by specific reagents listed inAS/NZS 2924.1,1998. Refer to effects byspecific reagents listed on pages 3 & 4.

RESISTANCE TO COLOURCHANGE IN ARTIFICIAL LIGHTNo more than a slight colour changeafter exposure to Xenon arc light atBlue Wool 6.

RESISTANCE TO CIGARETTEBURNSNo deterioration other than moderatechange in gloss and/ or moderate brownstain.

FORMABILITYFormica Chemtop2 will satisfactorilypostform to a minimum 12.5mmexternal and inside cove radius of 5mmin the machine direction. Cross-grainpost forming is not recommended.Note: A slight colour change in thecove is normal, and does not indicate aproduct defect. Slight gloss change mayoccur along the postformed edge and ismore evident in dark colours.

Ideal postforming temperatire is 121ºC,slightly lower than conventional HPL.Tempilaq (grey colour) can be used todetermine the proper temperature.

Coves should be formed at atemperature of 149º-163ºC.The peel-coat must be removed from the heatedarea before forming or coving. Minimumradius for cold forming is 102mm.

RESISTANCE TO STEAMNo more than a moderate change ingloss and/or colour.

WHEN SPECIFYING ORORDERING• State Formica Chemtop2• State sheet size and quantity• State colour• State any other special requirements

PRODUCT DATAStorage: Always store sheets face-to-faceand withdraw in pairs. FormicaChemtop2 should be protected fromlight, heat and moisture and shouldnever be stored in contact with thefloor or an outside wall. Do not store inareas where temperatures are less than16ºC and where relative humidity is lessthan 40%.

Tools: Formica Chemtop2 can befabricated using standard laminate tools.The use of sharp carbide-tipped bladesis recommended when cutting FormicaChemtop2.This practice will minimisechipping.

Handling:To avoid scratching or marking,keep work area clean. Likewise avoidcontact with abrasive surfaces. Lift sheetscarefully; do not slide on decorative surface.

Cutting: Formica Chemtop2 shouldalways be cut working face upwards tominimise surface chipping. All insidecorners of cutouts must be radiused aslarge as possible, 1/8” (3mm) minimum,to avoid stress cracking.The edges andcorners should be routed, sanded or filedsmooth and free of chips or nicks.

Substrates:The recommendedsubstrates for Formica Chemtop2 are:Medium Density Fibreboard,Particleboard and Plywood

Machine Sawing: Formica Chemtop2 hasa special chemical resistant surface.Werecommend the use of sharp, carbide-tipped cutting blades with low ornegative hook profiles. Low feed speedsand high tool speeds are alsorecommended. A board may be clampedto the saw fence to hold the productdown to reduce vibration while cutting.

Planing: An excellent edge finish can beachieved with a hand plane.

Hand planing Specially hardened planeirons, such as “Titan” require lesssharpening than standard iron plane knives.

Machine planing Vertical spindlemoulding machines with tungsten-tippedcutters are ideal for edge finishing andfor making mitres.

Drilling: Hand or power operated high-speed twist drills will cut clean holes.Because of the hard surface, a small pilothole should be drilled for carpenter’sbits. Fast cut types give the best results.For holes 20mm diameter and over, acentre bit should be used.

Bonding: Ensure that the surface towhich Formica Chemtop2 grade is to bebonded is clean, dust-free and withoutirregularities. A more accurate job willresult when bonding is done by arecognised fabricator in the workshopwhere proper equipment and conditionsare available. Formica Chemtop2 can bebonded with several types of adhesives(listed on page 3 & 4); the choicedepending on the particular application.

Contact adhesive is the weakest of allthe recommended adhesives because ofit’s elastomeric nature. PVAc (whiteglue), urea and resorcinol adhesivesdistribute much more of the stress tothe substrate, making these assembliesmore crack resistant. Refer to theadhesive manufacturer for more detailed information.

All glue on the decorative surface shouldbe removed immediately.

Joining: It is recommended thatwaterproof mastic be used to preventingress of water into substrate, or glueline where butt joints occur. Use inaccordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions.

Care and Maintenance: FormicaChemtop2 is a durable work surface.Normal maintenance consists of a wipeover with a damp cloth and detergent.Stubborn stains may be removed by theuse of an organic solvent orhypochlorite bleach, followed by wipingwith a damp cloth.



Good laboratory practices dictate thatall chemical spills should be wiped uppromptly. Use water or appropriatesolvent to dilute and dissolve the spiltmaterial.The use of abrasive cleaners,powders, scouring pads, steel wool,sandpaper etc..., will damage the finishand permanently reduce the stain andchemical resistance of the laminate.

RESISTANCE TO REAGENTSEvaluated in accordance with AS/NZS2924.2:1998 Part 15 - Resistance tostaining, 16 hour covered exposure at20C.The reagents marked with an * maycause a change in gloss or colour,dependant upon the length of exposurewhile the others register no effect otherthan a very slight marking which maysometimes result from vigorous physicalcleaning.

*May cause damage in gloss or colour,dependant upon the length of exposure.

Acids ConcentrationAcetic Acid (all conc.)Chromic Acid* 60%Dichromate cleaningsolution*Formic Acid* 90%Glacial Acetic Acid*Hydrochloric Acid 10%Hydrofluoric Acid*Nitric Acid 10%Nitric Acid* 70%Perchloric Acid* 60%Phosphoric Acid 85%Sulphuric Acid 10%Sulphuric Acid* 96%

Alkalis ConcentrationAmmonium Hydroxide 28%Potassium Hydroxide 15%Sodium Carbonate Sat.Sodium Hydroxide 40%Sodium Sulphide 15%

Solvents ConcentrationAcetoneAmyl AcetateBenzeneCarbon TetrachlorideChloroformCresol*Denatured AlcoholDioxaneEthyl AcetateFurfural*Methy Ethyl Ketone (MEK)Methylene ChlorideMethylated spiritsNaphthaTetrahydrofuranTouleneXylene

Other Reagents ConcentrationGentian Violet Dye 1%Amyl AlcoholCalcium HypochloriteCopper Sulphate 10%Ferric Chloride 10%Phenol* 85%Phenolphthalein 1%Potassium Permanganate* 2%Trichloroethylene

Hospital & Health Care ConcentrationAmyl AlcoholAniline blue 2.5%Bromocresol Green Sol’nChloroformEosin Solution*Ethyl AlcoholEthyl EtherEucalyptol EugenolFormaldehyde 37%Gentian Violet 1% sol’nHematoxylinHydrogen Peroxide 3%Hydrogen Peroxide 20%Iodine Tincture* 2%Isopropyl AlcoholMercurochrome*Methylene Blue*Mineral oilPetroleum JellyPovidine Iodine*Silver Nitrate* 10%Zephiran Chloride 17%Zinc Oxide

General Reagents ConcentrationCellosolveKeroseneNail Polish RemoverPine oilSodium Hypochlorite 5%Trisodium Phosphate 30%Urea 6.6%Vegetable oil

AS/NZS 2924.2:1998 Part 15 ReagentsAcid-based metal Cleaners*AlcoholAlcoholic BeveragesAlkaline-based Cleaning agents dilutedto 10% in waterAmidosulphonic acid descaling agents < 10%* Ammonia (10% solution of commercial concentrate)Animal and vegetable fats & oilsBall point pen inksBlack teaBleaching agents & sanitary cleanerscontaining sodium hydroxideBoric AcidCitric Acid 10%Cleaning solution 23% dodecylbenzenesulfonate, 10% alkyl aryl polyglycolether, 10% waterCoffeeCola BeveragesHair colouring & bleaching agents*Hand creamHydrochloric acid based cleaners ( </=3%HCI)Hydrogen peroxide (3% solution)Lacquers and adhesives (except fast-curing materials) *Laundry marking inksLemonade and fruit drinksLipstickLyes, soap solutionsMeats and sausagesMilk (All types)MustardNatural fruit and vegetable juicesNail polishNail Polish RemoverPhenol and chloramine T disinfectantsSalt (NaCI) solutionsShoe PolishStain or paint remover based onorganic solvents



Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Fo

rmic

a®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s6

Section 6: 3.4

AS/NZS 2924.2:1998 Part 15 ReagentsToothpasteTincture of iodine (or 10% povidoneiodine)*UrineVinegar concentratedWaterWater coloursWine vinegarYeast suspension in water

SERVICEFor additional sales and technical serviceregarding any FORMICA surfacingmaterial, contact The Laminex GroupCustomer Services:Phone: 132 136

HEALTH AND SAFETYInhalation of dust generated fromprocessing Formica decorative laminatemay cause irritation and sensitisation byinhalation (asthma) and by skin contact(dermatitis). Repeated inhalation of dustmay cause irreversible health effectsincluding asthma, chronic nose or throatirritation or lung scarring. Do notbreathe the dust.Wear a respiratorwhen using power tools. For furtherinformation refer to the FormicaLaminate Material Safety Data Sheet.

Recommendations, suggestions or statementsmade in this brochure are intended to helpcustomers.They are based on our experience andjudgment.They should not be regarded asamounting to legal warranty or as involving anyliability on our part.



Section 6: 4.1

Formica® Metals LaminateFormica Metals Laminate arehigh-pressure laminatesmanufactured with genuinedecorative metallic foils.

The surface of these productsis coated with a protectivelacquer similar to a goodquality timber lacquer.

APPLICATIONSFormica® Metals Laminate are ideal forwalls, doors, feature panelling, roomdividers, exhibition stands and shopfitting(displays, stands, etc.).

Other uses include fireplace and kitchenhoods, lift linings and many other areaswhere a metallic look is desired.

Metallic finishes are recommended forlight duty interior applications only.Theyare not recommended for heavy usageareas such as worktops, bars and tables.

PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICSSizes: 2400mm x 1200mmThickness: 0.8mm to 1.3mmWeight: 1.5kg/m2 approx.

(1mm)



Cone Calorimeter AS/NZS 3837(Irradiance of 50kW/m2)Classification Result Unit/RangeGroup Number 1 1-3Average Specific 80.3 m2 / kgExtinction Area0.8mm Laminate unadhered

WHEN SPECIFYINGSurfacing shall be Formica MetalsLaminate as supplied by The LaminexGroup. Colour/Finish shall be ..........

CARE & MAINTENANCECautionAvoid the use of solvents for cleaningpurposes. Any spillage of liquids shouldbe removed as soon as possible. Avoidthe use of abrasive cleaners, even thosein liquid form.

Formica Metals should only be cleanedwith a soft, moist cloth or moist chamoisleather and then dried with a soft, drycloth.

Do not place hot objects on the surface.

The lacquered surface of FormicaMetals have similar properties to a highquality wood lacquer, thus the surfacecould be damaged by hard objects andsome solvents.

SITE WORK NOTESFormica Metals should be bonded toonly high quality substrates using TradeEssentials Contact Adhesives. Whenusing hot glues or adhesives thetemperature should not exceed 60°C(140°F). When pressing the laminate toa substrate, a thin protective soft layer(eg. paper) should be placed on top ofthe metallic surface. Avoid excess gluecoming in contact with the unprotectedmetallic surface. Use only sufficientpressure to ensure a good bond.

During cutting and machining a slightburring may occur on the new edge.This can be removed by careful use of afine file.

Note: This technical data does not apply to Brushed Stainless Steel or Steel Wave.For these products refer to the LaminexStainless Steel Technical Data Sheet.



Formica® Decorated MDFFormica® Decorated MDF is amedium density fibreboardbonded on both sides with ahardwearing melaminedecorative surface. FormicaDecorated MDF can bemachined and face routedusing conventional woodworking tools. However,Formica Decorated MDF is awood based panel and willreact to changes in moistureas will natural timber.

APPLICATIONSFormica® Decorated MDF can be usedin the following applications, in all areasaway from high humidity, such as wall units, bedroom furniture,office furniture, wall lining, shelving.

Note: Formica Decorated MDF is forinterior use only and should not beexposed to damp conditions or highhumidity.

DECORATIVE SURFACEPROPERTIESFormica Decorated MDF, when tested inapproved manner complies with therelevant sections of AS/NZS 1859.3 forsurface properties as below:




COLOURSFormica Decorated MDF is available inmany of the Formica range of solidcolours & woodgrains and in somepatterns. Please contact your localbranch for availability.

FINISHVelvet, Pearl.

SHEET SIZES AND THICKNESSESRefer to the Formica Product Availability Chart.

GREENfirst PRODUCTFormica DecoratedMDF is a Greenfirst™

product and iscertified by GoodEnvironmental ChoiceAustralia asenvironmentallypreferable.


THICKNESS

Specifications Unit 13mm- 23mm-22mm 33mm

Thickness Tolerance mm mm +/-0.3 mm +/-0.3Density kg/m3 730 720Internal Bond MPa 0.60 0.50Modulus of Rapture MPa 34.5 31.0Modulus of Elasticity MPa 3400 3400Surface Soundness MPa 1.2 1.4Screw Holding, Face N 800 800Screw Holding, Edge N 1000 1000Thickness Swell (24hr) % <6 <6

* Values reflect new testing methods for screw holding properties in AS/NZS 4266.13

WEIGHTThickness 16mm 18mm 25mm 33mm

kg per m2 11.7 13.1 18.0 23.0



Section 6: 5.1

Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Fo

rmic

a®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s6

LA-2008GECA 28-2006–




Section 6: 5.2




IMPORTANT NOTEA slight variation exists between the finishes onFormica melamine faced board products and theFormica high-pressure laminate products.






Formica® Decorated MR® MDF Formica® Decorated MR® MDFis a moisture resistant mediumdensity fibreboard, factorybonded, with hardwearingmelamine impregnateddecorative paper, to both sides.This product is suitable for usein areas of high humidity orwhere accidental wetting mayoccur. However, FormicaDecorated MR MDF is a woodbased panel and will react tochanges in moisture as willnatural timber.

APPLICATIONSFormica® Decorated MR® MDF is designedfor interior use, such as kitchen cupboards,doors, bathroom vanities, laundrycupboards, shelving, wall panelling and allcommercial and domestic furniture.

Formica Decorated MR MDF can bemachined and face routed with allconventional wood working toolsachieving clean sharp edges.

Formica Decorated MR MDF is availablein many of the Formica range of solidcolours, patterns and woodgrains and insome patterns.

DECORATIVE SURFACEPROPERTIESFormica Decorated MR MDF, when testedin approved manner complies with therelevant sections of AS/NZS 1859.3 forsurface properties.




FIRE TESTS(Typically achieved when tested to

AS/NZS 1530.3)Indices Result Range



COLOURSFormica Decorated MR MDF is availablein many of the Formica range of solidcolours & woodgrains and in somepatterns. Please contact your localbranch for availability.




THICKNESS

Property Unit 13mm- 23mm-22mm 33mm

Thickness Tolerance mm +/- 0.3 +/- 0.3Density kg/m3 730 710Internal bond MPa 0.90 0.70Modulus of Rapture MPa 43.0 38.5Modulus of Elasticity MPa 3600 3400Surface Soundness MPa 1.7 1.8Screw Holding, Face N 1000 1000Screw Holding, Edge N 1600 1600Thickness Swell (24hr) % <4 <4Wet Bending Strength (Me) MPa 9.7 8.5

* Values reflect new testing methods (Method A) for screw holding properties in AS/NZS 4266.13

WEIGHT

Thickness 16mm 18mm 25mm 32mm

kg per m2 11.7 13.1 18.0 23.0



Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Fo

rmic

a®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s6

Section 6: 6.1






GREENfirst PRODUCTFormica Decorated MRMDF is a Greenfirst™

product and is certifiedby Good EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.







LA-2008GECA 28-2006–


Formica® Decorated ParticleboardFormica® DecoratedParticleboard is apredecorated particleboardsubstrate with a hardwearingmelamine decorative surfaceon both sides.

APPLICATIONSFormica® Decorated Particleboard can beused in all applications away from highhumidity, such as wall units, built-infurniture, bedroom furniture, shelving andwall lining.

COLOURSA wide range of colours, patterns andwoodgrains are available. Please checkyour local branch for availability.

DECORATIVE SURFACE PROPERTIESFormica Decorated Particleboard, whentested in approved manner complieswith the relevant sections of AS/NZS1859.3 substrate properties as follows:








SUBSTRATE PROPERTIES(Typical physical properties when tested to AS/NZS 1859.2-2001 Int.)

THICKNESS RANGE & TYPICAL VALUESSpecifications Units 13-22mm 23-33mm >33mm

Thickness Tolerance mm +/-0.3 +/-0.3 +/-0.3Density kg/m3 640 610 580Internal Bond MPa 0.60 0.50 0.30Modulus of Rapture MPa 14.5 13.5 9.5Modulus of Elasticity MPa 2200 2100 1700Surface Soundness MPa 1.2 1.2 0.9Screw Holding, Face N 600 600 600Screw Holding, Edge N 700 700 700Thickness Swell (24hr) % <12 <12 <12

* Values reflect new testing methods for screw holding properties in AS/NZS 4266.13-2001 (Int).In most instances the performance characteristics of the particleboard exceeds the minimum requirement of AS/NZS1859.1-2001 (Int). However for minimum property values refer to AS/NZS 1859.1-2001 (Int).


kg per m2 10.4 11.5 15.5 20.1




IMPORTANT NOTEA slight variation exists between finishes on Formicamelamine faced board products and the Formica high-pressure laminate products.



Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Fo

rmic

a®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s6

Section 6: 7.1



Formica® Decorated Particleboard MR®

Formica DecoratedParticleboard MR® is a moistureresistant particleboard, factorylaminated on both sides with ahardwearing melaminedecorative surface.The superiorperformance of FormicaDecorated Particleboard MR isdue to the bonding of the woodparticles with a speciallyblended moisture resistantresin system.

APPLICATIONSFormica® Decorated Particleboard MR® issuitable for use in the following applications:Kitchen cupboards, laundry cupboards, vanityunits, shelving, wall linings, partitions, built-infurniture, all detail joinery where a moistureresistant decorative board is required.

COLOURSA wide range of colours, patterns andwoodgrains are available. Please checkyour local branch for availability.

MOISTURE RESISTANCEFormica Decorated Particleboard MRcomplies with the Wet Cyclic Test formoisture resistance properties asspecified in AS/NZS 1859.1. Refer toPhyscial Properties table for details.


DECORATIVE SURFACEPROPERTIESWhen tested in approved manner complieswith the relevant sections of AS/NZS1859.3 for surface properties as follows:







SHEET SIZES AND THICKNESSESRefer to the Formica ProductAvailability Chart.


THICKNESS RANGE & TYPICAL VALUESSpecifications Units 13-22mm 23-33mm >33mm

Thickness Tolerance mm +/-0.3 +/-0.3 +/-0.3Density kg/m3 640 610 630Internal Bond MPa 0.80 0.70 0.60Modulus of Rapture MPa 17.0 15.5 17.5Modulus of Elasticity MPa 2300 2400 3000Surface Soundness MPa 1.6 1.6 1.7Screw Holding, Face N 700 800 800Screw Holding, Edge N 900 900 900Thickness Swell (24hr) % <6 <5 <5Wet Bending Strength (Me) MPa 4.5 4.5 5.5

* Values reflect new testing methods for screw holding properties in AS/NZS 4266.13In most instances the performance characteristics of the particleboard exceeds the minimum requirement of AS/NZS 1859. However for minimum property values refer to AS/NZS 1859.1.


kg per m2 10.4 11.5 15.5 20.1



Laminate Product: Care & MaintenanceAppendix 2. General Care and Maintenance, Section 9:2


Formica® ABS Edging

APPLICATIONSSuitable for use as a matching orcontrasting edge finish for furniture, desktops, cupboard doors and drawers,shopfittings and display panels etc.,where a high impact aestheticallyappealing edge is required.

ADVANTAGES• ABS can be applied around tight

corners. Although it will ‘whiten’ on thebend, original colour can be restored by applying heat such as with a hot air blower, to the affected area.

• Normal waste disposal procedures areacceptable.

• It does not give off toxic fumes when burning.

• It is recognised as being environmentallyfriendly.

WHEN SPECIFYINGEdges shall be 2mm thick Formica ABSEdging as supplied by The LaminexGroup. Colour shall be ..........

Note: Woodgrains are throughwoodgrain, patterns are patternededging.

SITE WORK NOTES• Rolls of edging should be stored in dry

conditions at a temperature of 18-25°C.• All Formica ABS Edging is supplied

primed ready for use with conventional hot melt adhesives.

• Avoid cold air draughts in the area where the edgebanding operation is performed.

• Use a high melting point hot melt witha loading of 3.5-4.0 gr/lineal metre (22mm width).

• Use adequate pressure on pressure roller.• Periodically check the accuracy of

temperature gauges, as these can be out by as much as 50°C.

• Always use heating fence where fitted.• Do not use edging if it has been

allowed to become damp or extremely cold.

• A glue tank temperature of 190°C-210°C and applicator roll temperature of 200°C-215°C are recommended. Bond failure may occurif glue temperature at the applicator roller is below 190°C.

• Maintain constant glue level in glue tank by adding glue often. Do not let tank run down and then add large quantity as this will dramatically reduceglue temperature in tank even though gauges may still indicate required temperature.

• Machine speeds of a minimum of 20m/min are recommended.

• Four bladed milling cutters of approx.70mm diam. and running at 12000 RPM will give an excellent finish.

• A hot air source of between 375°C-450°C and feed speed of 6-8m/min will successfully bond pre-glued edging.

Cleaning• Removal of hot melt adhesive residues

from the surface of ABS edging can be accomplished by rubbing with a soft cloth containing ABS Cleaner or white spirits or similar aliphatic hydrocarbon solvent.

• Care must be exercised with rubbing as severe rubbing can result in gloss change to the surface.

• Solvents are hazardous. Please read the Material Safety Data Sheet for the solvent before it is used.

Formica ABS Edging is included in theGreenfirst range of environmentallypreferable products.

Width: 22mm. Other widths available subject to enquiry.

Thickness: Solid Colours,Woodgrain and Prints2mm.

Roll Length: 100 lineal metresColour Range: Most popular solid

colours and woodgrains are available along with a selected range of patterns.


Formica ABS Edging isavailable in a range of coloursdesigned to match FormicaDoors, Formica laminates andboard products. It is light fastunder normal internalapplications and has highdimensional stability. It isresistant to commonhousehold cleaning agents,weak acids and alkalines.However, strong acids,aromatic hydrocarbons, estersand ketones will all attack ABS.

ACCESSORIES


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Fo

rmic

a®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s6

Section 6: 9.1

ACCESSORIES


Formica® Melamine Preglued Edging

APPLICATIONSFormica® Melamine Preglued Edging isrecommended for all types of edgetreatment for particleboard, mediumdensity fibreboard and plywood. It issupplied pre-glued with a hot melt.

PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICSRoll Sizes (nominal):Preglued 100m

25mThickness: 0.40mmWidth (nominal): 21mm

WHEN SPECIFYINGEdging shall be Formica Melamine Edgingas manufactured by The LaminexGroup. Colour and/or pattern shall be.......... in .......... finish.

STORAGERolls of Formica Melamine Edging shouldbe stored in dry conditions attemperatures not below 18°C.



Stain Resistance: Pass AS/NZS 2924.1 type VLS

Bondinga. General. Because this product is

basically a melamine laminate and nota coated paper, it requires higheroperating temperature at the glue line.

To ensure a successful bond thefollowing recommendations should be followed:

1. Avoid cold air draughts in the areawhere the edgebanding operation isperformed.

2. Store edging in a dry place, maintainingtemperature at or above 18°C.

3. Use adequate pressure on pressure roller.

4. Always use heating fence where fitted.5. Periodically check the accuracy of

temperature gauges; these can be out by as much as 50°C.

6. Do not use Formica Melamine Edging if the material has been allowed to become damp or wet, or ifits temperature is less than 18°C.Substrate moisture content should be 8-10%.

b. Pre-glued Continuous MelamineEdging. To achieve adequate bonding,a glue film temperature at the point ofcontact of 140°C must be achieved.Commercial edgebanders with a feedspeed of 6-8m/min. and a hot airtemperature of 300°C, willsuccessfully bond Formica Pre-gluedMelamine Edging.

For an ‘iron-on’ operation temperaturesgreater than 250°C are recommendedto achieve a glue film temperature of140°C.This is achieved normally after10-15 seconds (under pressure) andan ‘iron-on’ speed of 60-70 secondsper metre length.

Formica® Melamine PregluedEdging is formulated toachieve exceptionalperformance.

The combination of modifiedmelamine thermosettingresins and continuous hotpressing, ensures high wearand stain resistance.

ACCESSORIES


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Fo

rmic

a®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s6

Section 6: 11.1

Formica® Melamine Unglued Edging

APPLICATIONSFormica® Melamine Edging isrecommended for all types of edgetreatment for particleboard, mediumdensity fibreboard and plywood. It issupplied unglued for bonding with hot melts.

PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICSRoll Sizes (nominal):Unglued 100m Thickness: 0.40mmWidth (nominal): 21mm

WHEN SPECIFYINGEdging shall be Formica Melamine Edgingas manufactured by The LaminexGroup. Colour and/or pattern shall be.......... in .......... finish.

STORAGERolls of Formica Melamine Edging shouldbe stored in dry conditionsat temperatures not below 18°C.



Stain Resistance: Pass AS/NZS 2924.1type VLS

APPLICATIONRECOMMENDATIONSFor best adhesion, the room, equipmentand material temperature will be ideallymaintained at minimum of 18ºC. Machinecomponents such as pressure rollers,which are in contact with edging, cancause heat loss and should be maintainedat equal to or above 18ºC to max 40ºC.

Substrate moisture content: 8 -10%.

HINTS FOR UNGLUED EDGEBANDINGAs this is a thermally reliant process,cold air draughts can affect satisfactoryinterface bonding temperaturessignificantly. Ensure edge bander is notsubject to cold air draughts. For bestadhesion, the room, equipment andmaterial temperature should not be lessthan a minimum of 18ºC, to max 40ºC.

Additional Hints• Keep edging clean and store edging in

a dry place• To maintain satisfactory molten

adhesive do not allow adhesive tank torun down before refilling. Keep tank full by adding to adhesive tank as required

• Adhesive tanks should be inspected and cleaned regularly

• Similarly, if using a cartridge system,maintain a charged system

• Be careful not to contaminate adhesives by allowing dirt, dust or foreign matter to be mixed with the adhesive

Generally adhesives begin to degrade overtime at temperatures above 180ºC. It isgood practice to lower temperatures to120ºC if the machine is not intended to beused for prolonged periods.

To effectively complete heat transfer andbonding of both materials, adequate useof pressure on pressure roller isrequired. 3.5 Bar in a range of 3 to 5 Baris generally sufficient.

Substrate temperature can affect rapidheat loss when applying adhesives.Therefore it is recommended to use aheating fence where possible if minimumtemperatures cannot be maintained.

Periodically check accuracy oftemperature guages supplied on theedge bander machines. If left un-calibrated they can indicateinaccuraely by as much as +\-20ºC.

Hot Melt TypesThere are many commercial hot meltsavailable. It is recommended thatadhesive products chosen are specificallyformulated for use with melaminelaminate edge strip. Ensure that OH&Sprocedures, technical support andapplication technology information isavailable and well supported by theadhesive supplier.

Formica® Melamine Edging isformulated to achieveexceptional performance.The combination of modifiedmelamine thermosettingresins and continuous hotpressing, ensures high wearand stain resistance.

ACCESSORIES


Unglued Edging ApplicationHot Melt Adhesive loading:3.5 to 4.0 gms per lineal meter (21mmwidth) or as determined by edge banderoperator required to achieve satisfactoryresults dependent on type of hot meltadhesive used.

Hot Melt Applicator Temperature:190° to 200°C

Hot melt Temp at Pressure Roller:180° minimum

Pressure Roller Temperature:18°C minimum to40ºC maximum

Feed Speed:6.5 to 20 meters/min

Note: Colour/Finishes and productshown are available at the time ofpublication but may be withdrawn.



Formica® DoorsThe Formica Door range isavailable in a selected rangeof colours.

APPLICATIONSFormica® Doors are suitable for use inall areas of high humidity, such as kitchencupboard doors, bathroom vanities,laundry cupboards, shelving, wallpanelling and all domestic andcommercial furniture applications.


kg per m2 11.7

THICKNESSES16mm.

DIMENSIONAL STABILITYLength 0.4%, Thickness 5.0%, withchanges from 35% Relative Humidity to85% Relative Humidity (relative todatum point of 65% relative humidity).

DECORATIVE SURFACEPROPERTIESFormica MR MDF , when tested inapproved manner complies with therelevant sections of AS/NZS 1859.3 forsubstrate properties as below:




MOISTURE RESISTANCEFormica Doors complies with Wet CyclicTest Moisture Resistance Properties asspecified in AS/NZS 1859.2.




COLOURSFormica Doors are available in a rangeof Formica colours. For moreinformation refer to the FormicaProduct Availability Chart.

Note: Colour/Finishes and productshown are available at the time ofpublication but may be withdrawn.


THICKNESS

Property Unit 16mm

Board Density kg/m3 730Internal Bond MPa 0.90av.Modulus of Rupture MPa 43av.Modulus of Elasticity MPa 3600av.*Screw Holding – Face N 1000av.*Screw Holding – Edge N 1600av.Surface Soundness MPa 1.7Thickness Swell 24 hrs % <4Moisture Resistance MOR(A) MPa 9.7



CABINET DOORS

Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Fo

rmic

a®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s6

FLOORING


Formica® Laminate FlooringFormica® Laminate Flooringhas a range of surface finishesthat provide added depth and definition.

Formica Laminate Flooringdelivers the look and feel oftraditional timber flooring.

PRODUCT FEATURESThe Forma-lock locking system providesextremely high joint strength (tensilestrength 800kg per lineal metre)allowing for areas as large as 300 sqm to be installed without the need to install an expansion joint into the bodyof the floor, using recommended perimeter expansion gaps.

Formica® Laminate Flooring’s surface ishighly durable – scratch, wear, stain andburn resistant.

The Forma-lock locking system allows quick, easy and no mess installation withno special tools or glue required.

Formica Laminate Flooring’s proven Forma-lock locking system gives high quality tight fitting joins.

Formica Laminate Flooring can be usedimmediately after installation, saving timeand money.

Formica Laminate Flooring’s surfacegrain embossing and V-groove edge finish gives the look and feel of real timber.

Formica Laminate Flooring’s 12mmheavy duty panels have a pre-adherednoise suppressing underlay for longlasting stability, and minimal foot noise.

LAMINATE FLOOR THICKNESS 6mm 7mm 8mm 10mm 12mmProduct Class 23 31 32 32 32

Commercial Limited Warranty – – 7 years 7 years 7 years

Residential Limited Warranty 7 years 10 years 15 years 15 years 20 years

Size per plank 1380x193x6mm 1380x193x7mm 1380x193x8mm 1380x116x10mm 1380x193x12mm

Planks per pack 10 8 7 8 5

m2 per pack 2.663m2 2.130m2 1.864m2 1.281m2 1.331m2

Weight per pack (approx) 15kg 15kg 15kg 10kg 15kg

Substrate Standard HDF Standard HDF Aquastop 6 HDF Aquastop 6 HDF Aquastop 6HDF

Silent Underlay – – – – Yes

Formaldehyde Emission E1 E1 E1 E1 E1

Swelling (EN 317) <12% <12% <6% <6% <6%

Impact Resistance (EN 685) IC1 IC1 IC2 IC2 IC2

Abrasion Resistance (EN 685) AC3 AC3 AC4 AC4 AC4

Slip Resistance (AS/NZS 4586) – – R9 R9 R9

Fire Resistance ISO 9239

• Average Critical Radiant Flux – – 7.1kW/m2 7.1kW/m2 7.1kW/m2

• Mean Distance of Flame Travel – – 343.3mm 343.3mm 343.3mm

• Average Smoke Observation – – 6% 6% 6%



FLOORING

Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Fo

rmic

a®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s6

COMMERCIAL COLLECTION RESIDENTIAL USE ONLYLAMINATE FLOOR 12mm 10mm 8mm 7mm 6mmTHICKNESS Standard Plank Narrow Plank Standard Plank Standard Plank Standard Plank

(includes silent underlay)

Product suitability • Suitable for large • Suitable for large • Suitable for large • Suitable for medium • Suitable for smallresidential & general residential & general residential & general residential floor areas residential floor commercial floor areas commercial floor areas commercial floor areas areas only (excluding

• General residential hallways, family • Restaurants, hotel • High use residential • High use residential traffic rooms & kitchens)

rooms, retail & & general & general public spaces commercial traffic commercial traffic • Light residential

traffic• Heavy residential &

general commercial traffic

Product features • High strength • High strength • High strength • Good general • Ideal for cost locking profile locking profile locking profile flooring product effective room

makeover• Premium grade • Thicker substrate • Thicker substrate • Ideal for small to

quality & appearance for reduced foot noise for reduced foot noise medium sizeresidential floor

• Silent underlay • Durable surface • Durable surface areasattached to plank overlay for high overlay for highfor superior sound traffic areas traffic areasinsulation

• Australian woodgrain• Stronger protective décors

wear layer on surface• Authentic traditional

plank design

Residential Limited 20 years 15 years 15 years 10 years 7 yearsWarranty*

Commercial Limited 7 years 7 years 7 years – –Warranty*

PRODUCT OPTIONS & APPLICATIONS

1. Overlay Special resin-coated wear layer gives a highly durable surface finish.

2. V-Groove Provides a 3 dimensional structure and more realistic timber appearance (only available on selected 8, 10 and 12mm options).

3.Textured surface finish A range of various textured surface finishes (including registered embossed,available on selected items).

4. Décor paper The resin coated décor paper provides the deep, rich colour and authentic timber look.

5. Core substrate For our commercial grade products - 8mm, 10mm and 12mm:These options feature the added benefit of highly moisture

resistant Aquastop 6 HDF substrate created by the use of special resins.6mm and 7mm:These options feature a specially developed high-density fibreboard substrate.

6. Backing Special impregnated kraft paper helps keep the panel flat.

7. Silent Underlay Provides noise reduction and enhanced stability (available on 12mm product only).

1

3

6

2

4

5

7




ACCESSORIESThe range. With a range of five flooringthicknesses and a wide selection ofcontemporary styles, colours andtextures, there is a product for everyfloor application.

The quality. Only Formica LaminateFlooring offers you Forma-Lock. It’s ourunique locking system, which locks alledges of the flooring panels firmlytogether giving stronger joins andgreater peace of mind.The product isbacked by a comprehensive limitedwarranty.

The advantages. Formica LaminateFlooring is actually more impact resistantthan most solid timber floors andextremely resistant to wear, scratches,stains and cigarette burns.To clean,simply wipe with a micro fibre mop -stains, dust and mites are gone. In theunlikely event that damage does occur,the flooring panel can simply bereplaced. Applying a matching ColorFillwill obscure scratches immediately.

Formica Laminate Flooring consists of upto 90% natural wood fibre derived fromsustainably managed forest plantations.Chlorine and PVC free, it does notcontain any wood preservatives orharmful solvents.

BUILT WITH THEENVIRONMENT IN MINDFormica Laminate Flooring has beencertified as an environmentally preferableproduct by Good Environmental ChoiceAustralia.

The flooring consists of up to 90%natural wood fibre. It is manufacturedexclusively from timber sourced fromsustainably managed Europeanplantations, using a significantproportion of pre-consumer recycledfibre (60%) and reclaimed wood waste(30%) giving this product a high eco-preferred content.

The wood fibres are bonded under highpressure and temperature, usingbiologically degradable low emission resins.

Formica Laminate Flooring is chlorineand PVC free and it does not containany wood preservatives or harmfulsolvents so it has little impact on indoorair quality.

GREEN STAR Office InteriorsCompatibility (v1.1)Formica Laminate Flooring cancontribute to Green Star credits for :• IEQ-11: Volatile Organic Compounds • IEQ-12: Formaldehyde Minimisation

and • MAT-2: Flooring Materials.

For more information refer to theFormica Laminate Flooring Greenfirstinformation sheet available atwww.formica.com.au

GREENfirst PRODUCTFormica LaminateFlooring is aGreenfirst™ productand is certified byGood EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentally preferable.

Note: To ensure maximum floor lifeFormica Laminate Flooring InstallationInstructions should always be followedwhen laying Formica Laminate Flooring.

Affinity Cherry Cherrywood TF-1091 CSL2206Ashen Cedar Ashen Cedar TF-0091 CSL2209Blonde Beech Beech TF-5303 CSL2200Breezy Brushbox Brushbox TF-0593 CSL2200Castille Oak Blackbutt TF-2063 CSL2206Charred Ebony Mocha Oak TF-669 CSL2218Elegant Cherry Beech TF-12191 CSL2216Estate Oak Blackbutt TF-2063 CSL2200European Beech Beech TF-5303 CSL2200Heavenly Oak Heavenly Oak TF-12191 CSL2200Ideal Walnut Brushbox TF-12191 CSL2200Malted Oak Blackbutt TF-12191 CSL2200Mellow Cedar Blackbutt TF-12191 CSL2200Mocha Oak Mocha Oak TF-669 CSL2218Natural Oak Heavenly Oak TF-12191 CSL2200Rich Acacia Acacia TF-2373 CSL2208Rich Jarrah Jarrah TF-2373 CSL2207Rouge Beech Beech TF-1091 CSL2206Smoke Cedar Astor Silver TF-7565 CSL2211Tanzania Brushbox TF-2373 CSL2208

Flooring Decor Matching Matching Matching

Quad Multifloor Trim ColorSealantBeading Ref. No. Ref. No.

FLOORING



Section 7

STONE SURFACES

Issued September2009Section 7: 1.1

essa™ stoneessa stone is a remarkablydurable and virtuallymaintenance free quartzsurface material created withthe latest engineeringtechnology.A meticulouslydesigned colour paletteensures that essa stone isnaturally at home in the mostdiscerning kitchens, bathroomsand commercial interiors.

PRODUCT APPLICATIONSessa™ stone can be used for kitchen andvanity benchtops, splashbacks, furniturecomponents, internal cladding, wet areapartitioning, flooring, stairwells andfireplace surrounds.

Note: when used for splashbackapplications, the installation mustconform to the minimum Australianand New Zealand Standards forinstallation behind gas cook tops, forclearances in relation to appliancesgenerating heat. Please refer to AS 5601 Gas installations and AS NZS 4386.2 Domestic kitchenassemblies – Installation.

essa stone is suitable for most interiorapplications. Exposure to direct sunlightfor extended periods can cause colourfading.Therefore, it is not recommendedfor use in exterior applications where itis exposed to direct sunlight.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Slab Dimensions

Nominal Thickness 20mmNominal slab size 3000 x1400mm

(4.20m2)Actual size of 3030 x 1415mmtrimmed slab (4.29m2)

Dimensional Tolerance of Trimmed SlabThickness ± 0.08mmLength ± 20mmWidth ± 10mm

Nominal WeightSlab 220kg per slabm2 55kg per m2

Note: Each slab is produced with apurposely tapered edge toaccommodate any mild edge damagethat may occur during handling andtransportation.

FIRE TESTS(Typically achieved when tested to AS/NZS 1530.3:1999)Indices Result Range


METHOD OF TEST FORHEAT RELEASECone Calorimeter Test(Typically achieved when tested to AS/NZS 3837:1998)Indices Unit ResultAverage heat release KW/m2 91.0rate at 50 KW/m2

Average specific m2/kg 778extinction areaBCA Classification 3

TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Property Test Method ResultAbrasion Resistance (Weight Loss) ASTM D 4060 1094mgIzod Impact Strength ASTM D256 (Method A) 13.3 J/mBoiling Water Resistance NEMA LD3 2000 3.5 No effectColourfastness ANSI 124.6.5.1 PassCompression Strength (Dry) ASTM C 170 209 Mpa

(Wet) 203MpaDeflection Temperature ASTM D 648 243°cUnder Load (1.82 MPa)Flexural Modulus ASTM D 790 39.7 GpaFlexural Strength ASTM D 790 42.4 MPaFreeze and Thaw Cycling ASTM C 1026 UnaffectedFungal Bacterial Resistance ASTM G 21 No GrowthSurface Gloss Horba IG-320 over 45Barcol Hardness ASTM D 2583 86Rockwell Hardness (HRM) ASTM D 785 (Procedure A) 115Point impact ANSI Z 124.8.4.2.1 PassSlip ResistanceStatic Coefficient of Friction (Dry) ASTM C 1028 0.67

(Wet) 0.49Specific Gravity (23/23°c) ASTM D 792 (Method A) 2432Stain Resistance ANSI Z124.6.5.2 PassTensile Strength ASTM D 638 17.8 MPaToxicity NSF51 for food zone certifiedThermal Expansion ASTM D-696 1.52x10/in/in/°CWater Absorption ASTM D 570 (24hr. Immersion) <0.011%Wear and Cleanability ANSI Z124.6.5.3 Pass

Note:This data shall be considered as an indication only. It may vary depending on the colours and batches of the products.essa stone is tested and approved for use in food preparation areas.



STONE SURFACES


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Lam

inex

®B

ran

de

d P

rod

uct

s7

Section 7: 1.2

Section 8

MDF PRODUCTS


Trade Essentials® Craftwood®

Trade Essentials Craftwood is aMedium Density Fibreboard(MDF). Craftwood ischaracterised by a stable,homogenous surface withexcellent machining propertiesand is suitable for many typesof finishing such as painting,staining, laminating andveneering. Craftwood MDF is awood based panel and reacts tochanges in moisture like naturaltimber, ie. high or low humiditymay cause some expansion orcontraction of the board.

APPLICATIONSCraftwood® MDF is recommended forinterior applications only, such as detailedjoinery, lacquered furniture, furnituremouldings, built-in furniture, shelving, walllinings and partitions (if used withsuitable feature jointing systems), patternmaking, toys, clocks and trophies.

Note: Craftwood MDF should not beexposed to damp conditions or highhumidity.

SHEET SIZES & THICKNESSESCraftwood MDF is available in a largerange of thicknesses and sheet sizes. SeeAppendix 6.



FIRE TEST RESULTSCone Calorimeter (Results when tested inaccordance with AS/NZS 3837)Classification ResultGroup Number 3 Average Specific 90.1 Kg/m2

Extinction Area

GREENfirst PRODUCTTrade EssentialsCraftwood MDF is aGreenfirst product andis certified by GoodEnvironmental ChoiceAustralia asenvironmentallypreferable.

Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF ismanufactured to meet the AustralianAS/NZS standard for formaldehydeemission levels (≤ 1.0mg/L).

Trade Essentials Craftwood MDF is alsoavailable in the lower formaldehydeemmision level E0 (≤ 0.5mg/L).

PROPERTIES(Typical physical properties when tested to AS/NZS 1859.2)

THICKNESS RANGE & TYPICAL VALUESSpecifications Units <5mm 5-8mm 9-12mm 13-22mm 23-33mm

Thickness Tolerance mm +/-0.2 +/-0.2 +/-0.2 +/-0.3 +/-0.3Density kg/m3 810 780 760 730 720Internal Bond MPa 1.10 0.90 0.75 0.60 0.50Modulus of Rupture MPa 41.5 40.0 38.5 34.5 31.0Modulus of Elasticity MPa 4400 3500 3600 3400 3400Surface Soundness MPa 0.6 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.4Screw Holding, Face N 800 800Screw Holding, Edge N 1000 1000Thickness Swell (24hr) % <25 <16 <10 <6 <6Formaldehyde Level mg/L 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

Thickness 9mm 12mm 16mm 18mm 25mm 32mmkg per m2 6.9 9.0 11.7 13.1 18.0 23.0

WEIGHT




Sheet Size & Thickness AvailabilityAppendix 6Section 9:6

Greenfirst ProductsSection 3:1

Section 8: 1.1

< < < < <

LA-2008GECA 28-2006–



Trade Essentials® Craftwood MR®

Trade Essentials Craftwood MR isa highly moisture resistantMedium Density Fibreboard(MDF), suitable for use in areas ofhigh humidity, or whereaccidental wetting may occur.Thehigh moisture resistant propertiesof Craftwood MR is due to thebonding of the wood fibres with aspecially formulated moistureresistant resin system. CraftwoodMR MDF is a wood based paneland reacts to changes in moisturelike natural timber, ie. high or lowhumidity may cause someexpansion or contraction withoutany degradation to the strengthof the board.

APPLICATIONSCraftwood MR® MDF is designed forinterior use such as kitchen cupboards,bathroom vanities, laundry cupboards,shelving, wall lining (if used with asuitable jointing system) and mouldings.

Note: Craftwood MR MDF is notrecommended for exterior use.

SHEET SIZES & THICKNESSESCraftwood MR MDF is available in alarge range of thicknesses and sheetsizes. See Appendix 6.




Extinction Area

MOISTURE RESISTANCECraftwood MR complies with WetCyclic Test Moisture ResistanceProperties as specified in the propertiestable below (AS/NZS1859.2.).

GREENfirst PRODUCTCraftwood MR is aGreenfirst product andis certified by GoodEnvironmental ChoiceAustralia asenvironmentallypreferable.

Craftwood MR MDF is manufactured tomeet the Australian AS/NZS standard forformaldehyde emission levels (≤ 1.0mg/L).

Craftwood MR MDF is also available inthe lower formaldehyde emission levelE0 (≤ 0.5mg/L).


THICKNESS

Specifications Unit 9mm - 13mm - 23mm -12mm 22mm 33mm

Thickness Tolerance mm +/-0.2 +/-0.3 +/-0.3Board Density kg/m3 760 730 710Internal Bond kPa 1.00 0.90 0.70Modulus of Rupture MPa 46.0 43.0 38.5Modulus of Elasticity MPa 3600 3600 3400Surface Soundness MPa 1.3 1.7 1.8Screw Holding - Face N 1000 1000Screw Holding - Edge N 1600 1600Thickness Swell (24hr) % <7 <4 <4Wet Bending Strength MPa 10.5 9.7 8.5(Method A)Formaldehyde level mg/L ≤ 1.0 ≤ 1.0 ≤ 1.0

Thickness 9mm 12mm 16mm 18mm 25mm 32mmkg per m2 6.9 9.0 11.7 13.1 18.0 23.0

WEIGHT






MDF PRODUCTS

Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Tra

de

Ess

en

tial

s®8

Section 8: 2.1

LA-2008GECA 28-2006–


MDF PRODUCTS


Trade Essentials® Craftwood® (Thin)Trade Essentials Craftwood(Thin) is a Medium DensityFibreboard (MDF) designed forapplications where a thin board(3mm - 6mm) is required with ahard smooth surface that can beoverlayed with natural veneer,vinyl, paint and lacquer.

Craftwood MDF (Thin) is awood based panel and reacts tochanges in moisture like naturaltimber, ie. high or low humiditymay cause some expansion orcontraction of the board.

APPLICATIONSCupboard backs, drawer bottoms,curved panels, door skins and otherapplications requiring a thin panel.

Note: Craftwood® MDF (Thin) isdesigned for interior use only and shouldnot be exposed to damp conditions orhigh humidity.

SHEET SIZES & THICKNESSESFor sheet sizes and thicknesses seeAppendix 6.




Extinction Area

GREENfirst PRODUCTCraftwood (Thin) is aGreenfirst product andis certified by GoodEnvironmental ChoiceAustralia asenvironmentallypreferable.

Craftwood (Thin) is manufactured tomeet the Australian AS/NZS standardfor formaldehyde emissions levels (≤ 1.0mg/L).


THICKNESS

Property Unit <5mm 5-8mmBoard Density kg/m3 810 780 Internal Bond MPa 1.10 0.90Modulus of Rupture MPa 41.5 40.0Modulus of Elasticity MPa 4400 3500Thickness Swell 24 hrs % <25 <16Formaldehyde Levels mg/L ≤ 1.0 ≤ 1.0

Thickness 3mm 4mm 4.75mm 6mmkg per m2 2.5 3.3 4.0 4.7

WEIGHTGeneral Site Work NotesAppendix 1. Handling & Product Application GuidelinesSection 9:1




Section 8: 3.1

LA-2008GECA 28-2006–



MDF PRODUCTS

Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Tra

de

Ess

en

tial

s®8

Trade Essentials® Craftform®

Trade Essentials Craftform is aninnovative Medium DensityFibreboard (MDF) productwhich features speciallymachined V-grooves thatprovide enhanced flexibility ofthe MDF sheet.This flexibilityallows for creative shapes to beformed, with a radius of downto 200mm being achievable.The Craftform substrate is9mm Moisture Resistant MDFwhich provides added securityin areas of humidity andaccidental wetting.

APPLICATIONSCraftform® MDF panels arerecommended for interior joineryapplications where a flexible substrate isrequired.The substrate can be usedeither as a supporting material forfurther decorative finishing or as thefeature itself. Craftform is ideal forfabricating into curved furniture andformed shapes for counter fronts,gondolas, displays and other decorativefeatured joinery.

Note: A PVA adhesive such as TradeEssentials Craftwood PVA isrecommended when creating formsusing Craftform MDF. For details oncorrect methods of fabricating forms andshapes with Craftform please refer tothe Craftform brochure.

BENDING PROPERTIESThis is a feature of Craftform MDF,allowing fabrication of the 9mm MDFsheet into curves and shapes down to aminimum radius of 200mm.




Extinction Area

MOISTURE RESISTANCECraftform complies with Wet Cyclic TestMoisture Resistance Properties asspecified in the Properties table below(AS/NZS 1859.2.).

SHEET SIZEFor sheet sizes see Appendix 6.

GREENfirst PRODUCTCraftform is aGreenfirst product andis certified by GoodEnvironmental ChoiceAustralia asenvironmentallypreferable.


THICKNESS

Property Unit 9mmBoard Density kg/m3 770 Internal Bond MPa 1.00Modulus of Rupture MPa 46Modulus of Elasticity MPa 3600Thickness Swell 24 hrs % <7Formaldehyde Level mg/L ≤ 1.0

Thickness 9mmkg per m2 6.9

WEIGHT





Section 8: 4.1

LA-2008GECA 28-2006–


MDF PRODUCTS


Trade Essentials® White MDFTrade Essentials White MDF is ahigh quality Medium DensityFibreboard (MDF) with a whitemelamine surface bonded to bothsides.The melamine surface is non-porous and hardwearing making itideal for cabinetry.White MDF isvery versatile, as the MDF coreallows the panel to be used as apre-finished product, or faceroutered and finished with a paintsystem where required. MDF is awood based panel and reacts tochanges in moisture like naturaltimber, ie. high or low humidity willcause some expansion orcontraction without any effect onthe strength of the board.

APPLICATIONSTrade Essentials® White MDF is availablein Standard (STD) and Moisture Resistant(MR) grades, with surface finishes includingDécor Texture,Velvet and Satin finishes.

White MDF STD is a high quality MDFsubstrate with a hardwearing whitemelamine surface bonded to both sides.White MDF STD is designed for interioruse in built-in cupboards, wardrobes andfurniture, shelving, wall linings and alldetailed joinery where the product willnot be exposed to damp conditions orhigh humidity.

White MDF MR is a highly moistureresistant MDF with a hardwearing white melamine surface bonded to both sides.It is suitable for use in areas of highhumidity, or where accidental exposureto moisture may occur.White MDF MRis designed for interior use in kitchencupboards, bathroom vanities, laundrycupboards, shelving, built in cupboards,wardrobes and furniture, wall linings andall detailed joinery where a moistureresistant decorative board is required.

Trade Essentials Single Sided MDF is ahighly moisture resistant MDF, sandedsmooth on one side and bonded on theother side with a hard wearing melaminesurface. Single Sided MDF is manufacturedfor the membrane pressing and paintedpanel market.

Surface Finishes available are Flint andSatin.

Note: White MDF Satin Finish: thesurface is suited to professionallyprepared 2-pack polyurethane or similarcoating systems.Water based paints donot tend to bond easily to melaminesurfaces and as such, the use of acrylicor domestic oil based paint is notrecommended. In all applications, thepainting of melamine panels should bereferred to a reputable paint-tradeprofessional.To achieve the best 2-packpolyurethane finish, recommendation isthe use of undercoat on the paintedsurfaces prior to the final finishing coatsbeing applied.The Laminex Groupaccepts no responsibility for the paintfinish on the white melamine surface.




Extinction Area

Thickness 16mm 18mm 21mm 25mmkg per m2 11.7 13.1 15.0 18.0

WEIGHT

PROPERTIES(Typical physical properties when tested to AS/NZS 1859.2 for White MDF STD)

THICKNESS

Property Unit 16mm- 21mm-18mm 25mm

Board Density kg/m3 730 720 Internal Bond MPa 0.60 0.50Modulus of Rupture MPa 34.5 31.0Modulus of Elasticity MPa 3400 3400 Thickness Swell 24 hrs % <6 <6Screw Holding - Face N 800 800Screw Holding - Edge N 1000 1000Formaldehyde Level mg/L ≤ 1.0 ≤ 1.0

Section 8: 5.1


MDF PRODUCTS

Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Tra

de

Ess

en

tial

s®8

MOISTURE RESISTANCEWHITEBOARD MRWhite MDF MR complies with WetCyclic Test Moisture ResistanceProperties as specified in the Propertiestable on page 126 (AS/NZS1859.2).

GREENfirst PRODUCTTrade Essentials WhiteMDF is a Greenfirstproduct and is certifiedby Good EnvironmentChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.

SHEET SIZES & THICKNESSESFor sheet sizes and thicknesses seeAppendix 6.

Section 8: 5.2




Greenfirst ProductSection 3:1

LA-2008GECA 28-2006–


PARTICLEBOARD PRODUCTS


Trade Essentials® ParticleboardTrade Essentials Particleboardis a three layered board, withfine particles on the top andbottom surfaces, and largerwood flakes in the middle.Thewood particles are pressed andbonded together with resincreating a tight compact panelthat can be machined easily.Surfaces are sanded smooth atthe mill, ready for use orfinishing with a high pressurelaminate, decorative foil ortimber veneer.





APPLICATIONSTrade Essentials® Par ticleboard is anunderated flat panel product. TradeEssentials Par ticleboard is designed forinterior use for a wide range ofsubstrate applications, includingjoinery, furniture, built-in furniture,shelving and cupboards of all typeswhere the product will not besubjected to high humidity.

SHEET SIZES & THICKNESSESTrade Essentials Particleboard is availablein a large range of sheet sizes andthicknesses. See Appendix 6.




Extinction Area

GREENfirst PRODUCTTrade EssentialsParticleboard E0 is aGreenfirst product andis certified by GoodEnvironmental ChoiceAustralia asenvironmentallypreferable.

Trade Essentials Particleboard ismanufactured to meet the AustralianAS/NZS standard for formaldehydeemission levels (≤ 1.5mg/L)

Trade Essentials Particleboard is alsoavailable in the lower formaldehydeemission level E0 (≤ 0.5mg/L).

WEIGHTThickness 9mm 12mm 16mm 18mm 25mm 33mmkg per m2 6.0 7.8 10.4 11.5 15.5 20.1


THICKNESS

Specification Unit 9-12mm 13-22mm 23-33mm >33mmDensity kg/m3 660 650 610 580Modulus of Rupture MPa 14.5 14.5 13.5 9.5Modulus of Elasticity MPa 2300 2200 2100 1700Internal Bond MPa 0.60 0.60 0.50 0.30Surface Soundness MPa 1.0 1.2 1.2 0.9Screw Holding Face N - 600 600 600Screw Holding Edge N - 700 700 700Thickness Swell 1hr % <12 <12 <12 <12Formaldehyde Level mg/L ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.5

LA-2008GECA 28-2006–




Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Tra

de

Ess

en

tial

s®8

Trade Essentials® Particleboard MRTrade Essentials ParticleboardMR is a moisture resistantparticleboard for use in areasof high humidity or areaswhere occasional wetting mayoccur.The superiorperformance of ParticleboardMR compared to standardparticleboard is due to thebonding of wood particles witha special moisture resistantresin system. Particleboard MRcan be easily identified by thegreen dye incorporated in thecore of the board.

APPLICATIONSTrade Essentials® Particleboard MR isdesigned for interior use in areas of highhumidity such as kitchen cupboards,bathroom vanities, laundry cupboards,shelving, or any situation where amoisture resistant particleboard isrequired. 33mm particleboard is usedfor tables, desks and bench tops.

SHEET SIZES & THICKNESSESTrade Essentials Particleboard MR isavailable in a large range of sheet sizesand thicknesses. See Appendix 6.




Extinction Area

MOISTURE RESISTANCEComplies with Wet Cyclic Test moistureresistant properties as specified in theProperties table (AS/NZS 1859.1).

GREENfirst PRODUCTTrade EssentialsParticleboard MR E0 isa Greenfirst productand is certified byGood EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.

Trade Essentials Particleboard MR ismanufactured to meet the AustralianAS/NZS standard for formaldehydeemission levels (≤ 1.5mg/L)

Trade Essentials Particleboard MR is alsoavailable in the lower formaldehydeemission level E0 (≤ 0.5mg/L).

Thickness 12mm 16mm 18mm 25mm 33mmkg per m2 7.8 10.4 11.5 15.5 20.1

WEIGHT





Section 8: 7.1


THICKNESS

Specification Unit 9-12mm 13-22mm 23-33mm >33mmDensity kg/m3 660 640 610 630Modulus of Rupture MPa 20.0 17.0 15.5 17.5Modulus of Elasticity MPa 2700 2300 2400 3000Internal Bond MPa 1.00 0.80 0.70 0.60Surface Soundness MPa 2.0 1.6 1.6 1.7Screw Holding Face N - 700 800 800Screw Holding Edge N - 900 900 900Thickness Swell 1hr % <5 <6 <5 <5Wet Bending Strength MPa 5.5 4.5 4.5 5.5(Method A)Formaldehyde Level mg/L ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.5

LA-2008GECA 28-2006–




Trade Essentials® Aquaban®

Trade Essentials Aquaban is asingle sided white decorated33mm Moisture ResistantParticleboard, purpose designedwith post forming benchtops inmind.The white melamineunderside of AquabanParticleboard will resist moisture,providing clean, hygienic anddurable quality benchtops.Thesuperior performance of AquabanParticleboard compared tostandard particleboard is due tothe bonding of the wood particleswith a special moisture resistantresin system.




Shelf LoadingsAppendix 4Section 9:4

APPLICATIONSTrade Essentials® Aquaban is suitable for use as a substrate inareas of high humidity such as kitchens, laboratories,commercial benchtops, or any application where a high qualitymoisture resistant bench top is required.

Trade Essentials Aquaban can be easily identified by the greendye incorporated into the core of the board.

PROPERTIES(Typical physical properties when tested to AS/NZS 1859.1)Density 610kg/m3

Modulus of Rupture 17.5 MPaModulus of Elasticity 3000 MPaInternal Bond 0.6 MPaThickness Swell (24 hr) -<5%(In addition, performance specifications for Aquaban will typically beas follows:)Bowing - Length <2.0mm per(Sheet laying flat) linear metreBowing - Width <2.0mm per(Sheet laying flat) linear metreWear Value >350 cyclesFormaldehyde Level ≤ 1.5mg/L

FIRE HAZARD INDICES(Typically achieved when tested to AS/NZS 1530.3)Indices Result RangeIgnitability 14 0-20Spread of Flame 8 0-10Heat Evolved 7 0-10Smoke Developed 4 0-10

FIRE TEST RESULTSCone Calorimeter (Results when tested in accordance with AS/NZS 3837)Classification ResultGroup Number 3 Average Specific 61.2 Kg/m2

Extinction Area

WEIGHTThickness 33mmkg per m2 20.1

SHEET SIZES For sheet sizes see Appendix 6.

MOISTURE RESISTANCEComplies with Wet Cyclic Test moisture resistant properties asspecified in table 4.2 of AS/NZS 1859.1



Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Tra

de

Ess

en

tial

s®8

Trade Essentials® WhiteboardTrade Essentials Whiteboard isa high quality particleboardwith a white melamine surfacebonded to both sides.Themelamine surface is non-porousand hardwearing making itideal for internal cabinetry.

General Site Work NotesAppendix 1. Handling & Product Application Guidelines, Section 9:1


Board Product: Shelf LoadingsAppendix 3. Handling & Product Application, Section 9:3

Sheet Size & Thickness Availability Appendix 6, Section 9:6

Greenfirst Product Section 3:1

APPLICATIONSThere are different Trade Essentials® Whiteboard panelproducts available to suit various applications.1. Whiteboard Standard (STD): designed for interior use as

built-in cupboards, wardrobes, furniture, shelving, wall linings and all detailed joinery where the product will not be subjected to high humidity.

2. Whiteboard STD Shelving: pre cut and edged on one long side to allow for quick, convenient cutting of shelves for cupboards and built-in furniture.

3. Whiteboard MR: high moisture resistant properties designed for interior use as kitchen cupboards, bathroom vanities, laundry cupboards, shelving, wall linings and all detailed joinery where a moisture resistant decorative board is required. Easily identified by green dye incorporated in the core of the board.

4. Whiteboard MR Shelving: pre-cut and edged on one long side in moisture resistant substrate.

5. Whiteboard MR E0: meets the lower formaldehyde emission level E0.

Surface finishes available include Décor Texture and Velvet.

PROPERTIESTypical properties for 18mm MR Whiteboard when tested toAS/NZS 1859.1Density 640 kg/m3

Modulus of Rupture 17.0 MpaModulus of Elasticity 2300 MpaInternal Bond 0.80 MPaThickness Swell (24 hr) <6%Surface Soundness 1.6MPaScrew Holding Face 700NScrew Holding Edge 900NFormaldehyde Level ≤ 1.5mg/L

WEIGHTThickness 33mm 18mmkg per m2 20.1 11.5

FIRE HAZARD INDICES(Typically achieved when tested to AS/NZS 1530.3)Indices Result RangeIgnitability 14 0-20Spread of Flame 8 0-10Heat Evolved 7 0-10Smoke Developed 4 0-10

FIRE TEST RESULTSCone Calorimeter (Results when tested in accordance with AS/NZS 3837)Classification ResultGroup Number 3 Average Specific 61.2 Kg/m2

Extinction Area

SHEET SIZES & THICKNESSESTrade Essentials Whiteboard is available in a range of sheetsizes and thicknesses. See Appendix 6.

MOISTURE RESISTANCE WHITEBOARD MRComplies with Wet Cyclic Test moisture resistant properties asspecified in the Properties table (AS/NZS 1859.1).

GREENfirst PRODUCTTrade Essentials Whiteboard MR E0 is aGreenfirst product and is certified by GoodEnvironmental Choice Australia asenvironmentally preferable.

Section 8: 9.1

LA-2008GECA 28-2006–




Trade Essentials® Particleboard FlooringTrade Essentials ParticleboardFlooring is made from a very highmoisture resistant particleboardand features an easy to use tongueand groove system that gives theflooring remarkable strength inthe unsupported joists.TradeEssentials Particleboard Flooring ismanufactured using extra finewood particles.This ensures a farbetter distribution of the waterresistant resins across the entiresurface. In addition, all edges arecoated with a wax edge seal.Thereis also the option of TermiteTreated Particleboard Flooring,should the specific situationdemand this protection.

APPLICATIONSTrade Essentials® Particleboard Flooringis a three layered particleboard, bondedwith moisture resistant resin and wax,specifically formulated for use asinterior flooring.

It is suitable for all domestic housing aswell as commercial installations,provided it is installed to therequirements of AS 1860 (Installationof Particleboard Flooring).

It can be used for a variety of framedbuilding constructions including fitted floor,upper storey and platform construction.

FIRE HAZARD INDICES(Typically achieved when tested to AS 1530.3)Indices Result Range



Extinction Area

MOISTURE RESISTANCE -GENERAL INFORMATIONTrade Essentials Particleboard Flooring iscapable of withstanding generalweathering for up to 3 months.Tomaintain best practice, boards must becovered on building sites.It is recommended to avoid wherepossible, exposure of the panels to severeconditions, such as prolonged exposureto intense sun, cyclic soaking rain etc, asthese exposures have the potential toalter the moisture gradient of the panelsand may cause dimensional change,similar to natural timber. A moisture levelof about 7% is present in the board atthe time of despatch from the warehouseat Welshpool,Western Australia.

For further information refer : AS/NZS1860.2: Particleboard Flooring Part 2Installation.

STORAGE AND EXPOSURE OFPARTICLEBOARD FLOORINGTrade Essentials Particleboard Flooringshould always be stored flat and in a dryarea, with timber bearers spaced about450mm apart to keep it off the floor orground. Packs of board are bestprotected from the weather.

Covering should allow some aircirculation during the storage period.Packs should be protected on the topand sides with waterproof material

Thickness 19mm 22mmkg per m2 13.1 14.7

WEIGHT


THICKNESS

Specification Unit 19mm 22mmDensity kg/m3 690 670Internal Bond MPa 0.80 0.70Modulus of Rupture MPa 25.0 25.0Modulus of Elasticity MPa 3400 3400Thickness Swell (24hr) % <5 <4Thickness Stability % <10 <9Surface Water Absorption g/m2 <60 <60Glue Bond Quality MPa 15.5 14.0Wet Bending Strength (Method A) MPa 5.0 5.0

(such as plastic sheeting). Packing shouldbe used to keep plastic sheeting clear ofthe flooring pack so that air circulationcan occur.

To maintain best practice, packs ofParticleboard Flooring should beprotected from the weather beforeinstallation. Particleboard Flooring shouldbe stored for about 1 week (wherepossible longer) prior to fixing to allowadjustment to site conditions.Waterabsorption will cause expansion of thesheets and this will lead to gaps in thefloor later when the particleboard sheetdries out. It is recommended to avoidwhere possible, exposure of the panelsto severe conditions, such as prolongedexposure to intense sun, cyclic soakingrain etc, as these exposures have thepotential to alter the moisture gradientof the panels and may cause dimensionalchange, similar to natural timber.

Like nearly all timber products,Particleboard Flooring may react tochanges in humidity and to directwetting, but if laid in accordance withthe required standards and therecommendations outlined in thisbrochure,Trade Essentials ParticleboardFlooring will withstand the conditions ofplatform construction.

Water should not be allowed to lie onthe flooring surface. Sweep it off or drilldrain holes in positions that will becovered when the job is completed. It isrecommended that protection by roofand walls be provided as soon as possible.

SAFETY AND HANDLINGParticleboard is a reconstituted woodproduct containing wood, resin and wax.Machine tools should be fitted with dustextractors and the wearing of a dustmask is recommended. Material SafetyData Sheets for Particleboard Flooringare available on request from any branchof The Laminex Group.

PRODUCT RANGETrade Essentials Particleboard Flooringhas a plain core colour with a yellowwax edge seal to all edges.There aretwo product thicknesses each identifiedby the colour of their PVC tongue:Green tongue (19mm) – For use withfloor joists spaced at 450mmBeige tongue (22mm) – For use withfloor joists spaced at 600mm

Trade Essentials Particleboard Flooring isavailable in different sheet sizes.There isalso the option of Termite TreatedParticleboard Flooring and BrownTongue (25mm) for commercialapplications. For full details contact yournearest branch of The Laminex Group.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS1. Assess the site

Ensure correct sub-floor clearance and ventilation as per Australian Standard 1860 “Installation of Particleboard Flooring”, or local building regulations. Particleboard Flooring is not suitable under conditions of permanent dampness,i.e. where particleboard moisture content is permanently in excess of 16 per cent moisture content.

2. Positioning and fixingLocate a string line parallel to the perimeter of the floor and at right angles to the joists. Fit the first new row of sheets with the tongued edgeto the string line.This will ensure edge straightness.Tongue and grooved edges must run parallel to the span and sheeting must span no less than two floor joist spacings. Fix second sheet in a similar manner inserting plastic tongue into the groove of sheet one. Be sure to apply bead of adhesive to tongue prior to installation.

DO NOT cramp or over-tighten.After each row is laid, fully nail or screw the previous row (refer to thefixing pattern).

Install all sheets with the same face upwards, to ensure flush mating of adjoining faces. Butt joints should be staggered in alternative rows to give a rigid floor.

Handy hints:The Laminex Group recommends Trade Essentials Particleboard Flooring Adhesive for this application.This is a high performance, fast setting synthetic rubber based adhesive, specially formulated for thepermanent and speedy installation ofstructural sheet flooring panels, in conjunction with supplementary mechanical fastenings.

If the tongue and grooved profile is changed to a square edge during trimming or cutting of sheet,re-profile the edge with a circular saw and insert a tongue, or alternatively use as square edged Particleboard Flooring.

Where Particleboard Flooring is used in square edge form, the sheetsshould be laid with their long edges supported by noggings or trimmers.Sheet butt joints must be staggered.



Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Tra

de

Ess

en

tial

s®8

Section 8: 10.2



3. Fixing techniqueParticleboard Flooring may be fixed on the subfloor with hand or power-driven fasteners. For a rigid squeak-free floor system, ensure a continuous 5mm bead of Trade Essentials Particleboard Flooring Adhesive is applied to all joists and along the top of the tongue.Two beads of adhesive need to be placedon the joist where the butt joint occurs.

DO NOT apply too far ahead as adhesive cures quickly. At all times follow instructions on the adhesive pack.

Where gun nailing, nail heads shouldnot penetrate the surface by more than 1.0mm. Adjust air pressure to suit softwood or hardwood joists.Gun nail only in accordance with gun nail specifications. Galvanised nails are recommended.

Nails should be punched below the surface of the sheets just before thesanding or laying of floor coverings.This ensures firm seating of the flooring joists. Particleboard Flooring that is likely to be subjected to increased levels of traffic vibration should be fixed with spiral or helical shank nails.

4. TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION4.1 Platform floor construction

Platform flooring construction involves flooring laid on the floorjoists over the whole floor area prior to the erection of the walland roof framing.Trade Essentials Particleboard Flooring is capable of withstanding general weathering for up to 3 months. Less exposure however,is recommended.To maintain best practice, packs of Particleboard Flooring should be protected from the weather before installation. ParticleboardFlooring will expand and contract as sheets respond to changes in atmospheric moisture.

Allowance for the movement must be made throughout the floor area by providing gaps and special joints as appropriate to accommodate sheet expansion.

An expansion joint is a 20mm gap in flooring sheets located above a wide (50mm minimum) or double joist.

Extra joist area is necessary so that sheet ends can be properly fixed while still allowing the 20mm gap.

The joint may be covered by a metal or plastic moulding,screwed into the joist, or partitioning may be located overthe joint. Spacing of expansion joints should be between 10mmand 20mm with the final decisiondepending upon the assessment of whether:- the floor is elevated or on

ground level- the area is air conditioned- it is a tropical region (coastal

area, north of 27th parallel)- what moisture variations are

likely in the flooring

PLATFORM CONSTRUCTION FITTED FLOOR

Stagger Sheet Butt Joints

Do not fit closerthan 10mm tobase of groove

800mm

600mm for 22mm board450mm for 19mm board

Butt nails at 150mm centres

Field nails at 200mm centres

3600mm

Adhesive 5mm bead

Stable Footings

Stable Footings

Flooring

Flooring

Trimmer required when board not under plate

Air Vents

400mm Minimum above ground

10mm ExpansionGap

400mm Minimum above ground

Nailing Method Joist Type Nail or Screw Size (mm)Hand Hammer (nails) Hardwood & 50 X 2.80

Cypress PineSoftwood 55 X 3.15

Nail Gun (nails)* All Timber 55 X 2.5 Tee - head or Finished head

Screw Timber Type No. 10 X 50mm,Type 17 Countersunk head, Self drilling

Screw Steal Type No. 10 X 45mm Countersunk head, Self embedding wing tip



Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Tra

de

Ess

en

tial

s®8

Section 8: 10.4

- Exposure to very hot sun,particularly after the board hasbeen soaked by rain, may causepanel shrinkage and cupping. If this occurs, then light wetting ofthe board and shading of the site may help minimise the effect by slowing the rate at which the flooring dries.

DO NOT stack heavy concentrated loads on the floor,e.g. bricks, heavy structural materials.

DO NOT use the floor as a mixing table and avoid build up of plaster, concrete and paint on the floor.

4.2 Fitted floor constructionFitted floor construction involvesconstruction of the floor after the internal walls. An expansion gap of 1–2 mm per metre of room dimension (10mm minimum)should be left around the room perimeter.This is usually coveredby the skirting board. For large floor areas an expansion joint should be provided.

4.3 Upper storey constructionUpper storey construction utilises Particleboard Flooring laid on timber joists and supported on wall framing/ internal brick work. Green and Beige Tongue Particleboard Flooring is ideal for internal upper storey construction and extensions.

5. Surface finishingAustralian Standard 1860 “Installationof Particleboard Flooring” provides guidelines for surface finishing.(a) Inspect for dampness, especially

if board has been weathered before proceeding with finishing operations; if found to be excessively damp it shall be left until its moisture content is 15 percent or less.

(b) If the flooring is to be covered with carpet, the surface should be firm and tight with no loose flakes or particles:(i) Nails should be inspected and

hammered flush, screws should be flush with the surface.

(ii) If the surface has been exposed to the weather, somesanding may be required. Fullsanding may not be necessary,but rough or uneven areas should be spot sanded. Nail punching and screw counter sinking will only be necessaryin these areas.Note: FULL SANDING maybe necessary if the Particleboard Flooring has been subjected to prolongedrain while being exposed.

(iii) Sanding before carpet layingshould be with 40-60 grit sand paper.

(c) For other surface finishes, full sanding will usually be required if the particleboard has been exposed to the weather. The surface shall be given a first cut with 40-60 grit sand paper followed by 80-100 grit sand paper.

(d) Depth of material removed shallnot exceed the following exceptwhere otherwise specified by the manufacturer :(i) Over the general sheet area

– 1mm(ii) Within 50mm of any

supported edge – 2mm(e) All surfaces should be cleaned

to remove dust.

6. Surface preparation - wet area rooms (Bathrooms, kitchens, laundries)• Procedures required by AS 3740

“Waterproofing of Wet Areas Within Residential Buildings”,should be followed closely.

• Holes may be required in the floorto accommodate pipes, drains andplumbing wastes.These should be accurately drilled and cut ensuringthat excessive material is not removed (rough punching is unacceptable).

• All edges should be sealed usingpink primer, construction adhesive,or another suitable sealer.

• All building debris, plastic or otherbuilding matter should be completelyremoved and the floor surface sanded clean prior to waterproofing treatments.

• Joints between sheets should be carefully inspected and prepared.Flashing should be placed over joints.

• An impermeable membrane is required to seal the floor prior tothe overlaying of surface finishes such as ceramic or PVC tiles.The Laminex Group recommends the following for application:(a) Davco Dampfast(b) Bostick Ultraseal

The Laminex Group recommends that the respective manufacturer’s instructions are followed when applying these products.

7. Resilient sheet and tileThe requirements of Australian Standard 1884 “Floor Coverings – Resilient Sheet and Tiles-Laying and Maintenance Practices” should be followed when finishing with materialssuch as flexible and semi-rigid cork,rubber, linoleum and vinyl.

Unsatisfactory results may be obtained if resilient floor coverings are laid directly on to the Green Tongue or Beige Tongue ParticleboardFlooring, due to movement of the flooring or subfloor structure with changes in moisture content or settling.

Use of an underlay will minimise the risk of either failure of the bond between the covering and the floor,or of particleboard flooring sheet joints showing through the coverings.Underlay joins should not coincide with the particleboard flooring joins.

ADHESIVES


Trade Essentials® AdhesivesTrade Essentials Adhesives are arange of high quality gluesspecifically designed for thetrade to bond a wide array ofdecorative laminates, melamineboard, wood and wood basedpanel products.

Each adhesive has been developed and selected to suit most applications required by cabinet makers, joiners, furnituremanufacturers, post-formers and builders.

Trade Essentials® Adhesives are manufactured specifically forThe Laminex Group by one of Australia’s largest and mostexperienced adhesive manufacturers.When you purchase TradeEssentials Adhesives you can be assured of the highest qualityproducts, and technical support from The Laminex Group.

The following product groups are available in the TradeEssentials Adhesives range:

• Contact Adhesives• Thinners and Cleaners• Construction Adhesives• PVA’s and Water Based Adhesives

Substrates Applications

Part

icle

boar

d

MD

F Bo

ard

Hig

h Pr

essu

reLa

min

ate

Wet

Are

a Pa

nelli

ng

Mel

amin

e

Tim

ber

Met

als

(1)

Plas

ter

Boar

d

Cem

ent S

heet

Mas

onry

Plas

tic (

2)

Rub

ber

(3)

Lam

inat

ing

Post

For

min

g

Edge

Glu

ing

Wal

l Pan

els

Part

icle

boar

dFl

oori

ng

Ass

embl

y

(1) Except copper and its alloys (2) Except polyethylene, polypropylene, teflon, etc. (3) Except silicone or fluropolymers

ADHESIVE PRODUCTS & SELECTION GUIDE

Brushable Contact Adhesive • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Sprayable Contact Adhesive • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Cleaners & Solvents

ABS Edge Strip Cleaner •

Contact Adhesive Thinner • • •

Adhesive Cleaner • • •

Construction Adhesives

Wet Area Panelling Adhesive • • • • • • • • • • •

Particleboard Flooring Adhesive • • • • • • • • • •

PVA Adhesives

Cross-Linking PVA Adhesive • • • • • • • • • • • •

General Purpose PVA Adhesive • • • • • • •

Craftwood® PVA Adhesive • • • • • • • • • •

CONTACT ADHESIVES


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Tra

de

Ess

en

tial

s®8

Section 8: 12.1

Brushable Contact AdhesiveTrade Essentials BrushableContact Adhesive is a generalpurpose polychloroprene based,brush-scraper grade contactadhesive used for bondingdecorative laminates to plywood,particleboard and mediumdensity fibreboard. It is also usedfor bonding supported PVC, cork,leather, wood, metal and mosttypes of rubber.This adhesive isNOT suitable for external use,waterproof bonds, bondingfibreglass to fibreglass, or forbonding materials to copper orits alloys.

TYPICAL PROPERTIESColour Yellow to AmberHeat Resistance 140ºC (AS1937.4)Solids: 22.5% approx.Viscosity: 1500cps approx.Specific Gravity: 0.8kg/lt approx.Coverage: 4m2/lt per surface

SURFACE PREPARATIONTo obtain the best results, the surfaces tobe bonded should be dry, clean, and freefrom dust, grit, oil, loose materials etc.

APPLICATIONApply an even film of adhesive with abrush, or serrated scraper (providedwith adhesive) to both surfaces to bebonded, paying particular attention tothe edges. Allow the coated surfaces todry until slightly tacky, approximately 15minutes at normal room temperature.

A longer drying time may be necessaryunder high humidity conditions. Bringboth surfaces together with a rollingaction to avoid trapping air, ensuring thatthey are in the correct position at firstapplication, as the surface will adhereimmediately on contact. Apply handpressure strength.

If possible, roll the surfaces togetherthrough a pinch roller or press with arubber hand roller from the centre outto eliminate air pockets. Full bondstrength will be achieved in about twodays from bonding; however, about 90%of the bond strength will be obtainedwithin 24 hours of bonding.

CLEAN UPEquipment or adhesive spills can becleaned up with Trade EssentialsAdhesive Cleaner.

Note: Solvent is not recommended forremoving adhesive from vinyl orlacquered surfaces.

THINNERIf thinning is required use TradeEssentials Contact Adhesive Thinner.Please read the Material Safety DataSheet for this product before it is used.

Adhesive Selection GuideSection 8:11

Safety & Usage Recommendations forContact AdhesivesAppendix 4 Safety & UsageSection 9:4

CONTACT ADHESIVES


Sprayable Contact AdhesiveTrade Essentials Sprayable ContactAdhesive is a sprayable solventbased contact adhesive which offersa high strength heat-resistant bondthat is resistant to water and manyhousehold chemicals and the effectof ageing. It is designed for use inthe furniture and building trade forbonding a wide range of surfacessuch as fabric backed plastics,plywood, particleboard, MDF, woodveneer, plasterboard, laminatedplastics, aluminium, mild steel,glavanised iron and polyurethanefoam without the need for clampsor mechanical support.

TYPICAL PROPERTIESColour:Sprayable Contact Adhesive - RedSprayable Contact Adhesive - ClearBonding Range: Up to 30 minsHeat Resistance 140ºC (AS1937.4)Solids: 17.5% approx.

(sprayable grade)Viscosity: 300cps approx.

(sprayable grade)Specific Gravity: 0.86kg/lt approx.Coverage: 6-8m2 per litre for

total area

SURFACE PREPARATIONSurfaces must be clean, dry, free from oiland dust.Wipe metal surface with solventto remove oil often found on metal.

APPLICATIONSprayable Contact adhesives are used inthe manufacture of counter tops, tabletops, desk tops, vanities, furniture, sandwichpanels, doors, cabinets, partitions, wallpanels and other laminated products. It isNOT suitable for bonding polystyrene,solid polypropylene, polyethylene, copper,copper alloys, exterior applications or loadbearing joints.

Sprayable Contact adhesives can beapplied using conventional air-sprayequipment. Spray adhesive to bothsurfaces to be bonded. Apply adhesive toapproximately 80% coverage over theentire area, half in a north-south spray

pattern and half east-west. Applyadditional adhesive to edges or areasthat will be post-formed to achieve100% coverage.

Allow surfaces to dry before bonding.Thiswill take 5-10 minutes when cold sprayequipment is used.A longer drying timemay be necessary under high humidityconditions.When dry, the adhesive willfeel tacky, but will not transfer to thefinger when touched. Surfaces should bejoined within 30 minutes after application.If the surfaces are not joined within thistime, they can be re-activated by applyinganother coat of adhesive.

A minimum of 276 Kpa (40PSI) bondpressure is suggested for best results. Apinch roller or rotary press isrecommended. If not available, use a75mm rubber hand roller and applypressure from the centre toward edgesto avoid air pockets and bubbles. Donot use so much pressure as to crushcore materials.

CautionHighly Flammable - use in a ventilatedarea away from flame or sparks. Store ina cool, dry place.

Note: The two most common causes oflaminate to particleboard bond failure are:

1. Not enough pressure applied when bonding.

2. Adhesive cating too thin. Red Sprayable Contact Adhesive minimisesoperator error in this regard.

Equipment and adhesive spills can becleaned with Trade Essentials AdhesiveCleaner.

Note: Solvent is not recommended forremoving adhesive from vinyl orlacquered surfaces.

THINNERSprayable Contact Adhesive consistencyhas been carefully selected for optimumspray characteristics.Thinning is notrecommended. If the adhesive hasthickened beyond the point of easyapplication, only thin to originalconsistency with Trade EssentialsContact Adhesive Thinner.

Please read the material Safety DataSheet for this product before it is used.


Safety & Usage Recommendations forContact AdhesivesAppendix 4 Safety & UsageSection 9:4

s

THINNERS & CLEANERS


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Tra

de

Ess

en

tial

s®8

Section 8: 14.1

Contact Adhesive ThinnerTrade Essentials Contact AdhesiveThinner is a solvent blend designedfor the thinning of multi-purposeneoprene based contact adhesives.

APPLICATIONThinning of sprayable Neoprene contact adhesive is notrecommended; however, if the adhesive has thickened beyondthe point of easy application, only thin to original consistencywith Trade Essentials Contact Adhesive Thinner.

DO NOT thin with any other commercial thinner.

NOT suitable for use with adhesives for bonding polystyrenefoam, since attack of the foam will occur.

Avoid contact with lacquered or plastic surfaces.

Please read the Material Safety Data Sheet for this productbefore it is used.

TYPICAL PROPERTIESColour: Clear LiquidSpecific Gravity: 0.78kg/lt approx.Viscosity: Water thinSolids: 0%


Safety & Usage Recommendations for Contact AdhesivesAppendix 4 Safety & UsageSection 9:4

THINNERS & CLEANERS


APPLICATIONTrade Essentials Adhesive Cleaner is NOT recommended forthe thinning of Neoprene contact adhesives.

It is NOT suitable for cleaning bonded polystyrene foam, sinceattack of the foam will occur.

Please read the Material Safety Data Sheet for this productbefore it is used.


Adhesive CleanerTrade Essentials Adhesive Cleaneris a solvent which has beendesigned for the cleaning andremoval of dried solvent basedrubber adhesives (contact adhesives).As an adhesive cleaner it may beused for the cleaning of equipmentand adhesive spillage.



THINNERS & CLEANERS


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Tra

de

Ess

en

tial

s®8

Section 8: 16.1

ABS Edge Strip CleanerTrade Essentials ABS Edge StripCleaner is an aliphatic solventmixture which has been designedfor the cleaning and removal ofhot melt residues from the surfaceof ABS as well as Melamine andPVC edging.

APPLICATIONABS Edge Strip Cleaner is NOT recommended for the thinningof Neoprene contact adhesives nor is it recommended forremoval of dried solvent based rubber adhesives.

Hot melt residues can be removed from the surface of ABS,PVC and Melamine Edging by rubbing with a soft clothcontaining ABS Edge Strip Cleaner. Severe rubbing may result ingloss change to the surface so care must be exercised.

ABS Edge Strip Cleaner will not damage melamine laminatesurfaces.

ABS Edge Strip Cleaner can also be used to remove hot meltresidues from brushes, machines etc.

Solvents are hazardous. Please read the Material Safety DataSheet for the solvent before it is used.




CONSTRUCTTION ADHESIVES


APPLICATIONTrade Essentials Particleboard FlooringAdhesive is recommended for bonding awide variety of materials includingtimber, tileboard, hardboard, steel,aluminium and cement sheet etc. It isideal for the installation of TradeEssentials Particleboard flooring andmost other types of interior sub-flooring.

TYPICAL PROPERTIESColour: Buff pasteSolids: 76% approx.Viscosity: 95,000 CPS approx.Specific Gravity: 1.08kg/lt Coverage: A 300ml cartridge

will form 15 metresof a 5mm bead.An 850ml cartridgewill form 40 metresof a 5mm bead.

DIRECTIONSSurfaces to be bonded must be cleanand free from paint, oil, grease, dust etc.Ensure floor joists are flat and level.Apply adhesive in a 5-6mm bead overarea to be covered by first sheet.

Position sheet and nail firmly to joists.Fix each subsequent sheet in the samemanner but also run a 3mm bead ofadhesive along top of tongue beforeplacing into groove of previous sheet.

The joint will continue to gain strengthfor 2-3 days and maximum stressloading should not be applied untilsuch time.

CLEAN UPUse Trade Essentials Adhesive Cleaneror Mineral Turpentine.

Please refer to the Trade EssentialsParticleboard Flooring brochure fordetailed instructions on this product.


Particleboard Flooring AdhesiveTrade Essentials ParticleboardFlooring Adhesive is a solventbased mastic adhesive/sealantdeveloped for use in theconstuction industry. It cures toform a tough flexible moistureresistant bond.


CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVES


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Tra

de

Ess

en

tial

s®8

Section 8: 18.1

Wet Area Panelling AdhesiveTrade Essentials Wet AreaPanelling Adhesive is a highstrength, polychloroprene rubberbased adhesive/sealant supplied ina ready to use cartridge. It curesto form a tough, flexible heatresistant bond.

APPLICATIONSWet Area Panelling Adhesive isrecommended for bonding a wide varietyof materials including timber, tileboard,hardboard, gyprock, steel, aluminium andcement sheet etc. It is ideal for theinstallation of most wallboards andinterior panelling products.

It is not suitable for the bonding ofpolystyrene foam.

TYPICAL PROPERTIESColour: Pall YellowSolids: 42% approx.Viscosity: 180,000 CPS @

25ºC approx.Specific Gravity: 0.95kg/lt Coverage: A 300ml cartridge

will form 15 metresof a 5mm bead.

DIRECTIONSSurfaces to be bonded must be cleanand free from paint, oil, grease, dust etc.Apply a 5mm bead of Wet AreaPanelling Adhesive to each stud, battenor frame section to be covered.

If fixing to a solid surface such as a brickor concrete wall, place dabs of adhesivespaced 150mm apart, 35mm in diameterand 4-5mm thick.

Position wall panelling to be bonded andpress together ensuring a transferenceof half the adhesive to back of panel.

Pull the surfaces apart and allow theadhesive to dry for 5-15 minutesdepending on weather conditions.Reposition the panelling and press thetwo surfaces together. Use a rubbermallet or a hammer and clean block ofwood to ensure a complete bond.Thejoint will continue to gain strength for2-3 days and maximum stress loadingshould not be applied until such time.

CLEAN UPUse Trade Essentials Adhesive Cleaneror Mineral Turpentine.

Please refer to Wet Area PanellingInstallation Guide for detailedinstructions on this product.



CONSTRUCTTION ADHESIVES


Adhesive Selection GuidePage 124

General Purpose PVA AdhesiveTrade Essentials General PurposePVA is a high quality adhesivedesigned for most wood workinguses. It dries clear, is easily sanded,and is fast setting. Cured bondswill withstand a wide range oftemperature and humidityconditions.

APPLICATIONS Trade Essentials General Purpose PVA isa fast setting high bond strength gradePVA, suitable for bonding most soft andhard woods as well as particleboard andMDF. It is an excellent adhesive fordowel, mortice and tenon joints. It issuitable for general purpose bonding forjoinery and assembly work, where goodbond strength and short clamp timesare desirable.

PROPERTIESColour White liquid,

dries clearSolids High (approx. 48%)pH 4 - 5Viscosity Medium (5,500 cps)Open Assembly 5 mins. maximumTime at 20°CClosed Assembly 10 mins. maximumTime at 20°C

DIRECTIONS • All surfaces to be bonded must be

clean, dry and free from oil, grease,dust etc.

• General Purpose PVA Adhesive maybe applied by squeeze bottle, trowel,roller coater, air activated glue gun ormechanical glue spreader.

• Bonds must be made while adhesivecoating is wet. Where possible,assembled pieces should be clampedfor a minimum of 30 minutes while

adhesive sets. Light machining ispossible after this time, however it isbest to allow 24 hours beforesubjecting bonds to any stress.

• Excessive adhesive can be removedwith a damp cloth while adhesive isstill wet.

• For exterior applications, use TradeEssentials Cross Linking PVA.

COVERAGETrade Essentials General Purpose PVAAdhesive should be applied at a rate of100 to 200 grams per square metre (5 to 10m2 per litre), depending on theporosity of the substrate, application andambient temperature.

CLAMP TIMES (MINIMUM)

When the minimum clamp time is used,the freshly bonded panels should bestacked for a minimum of 24 hoursbefore machining.

STORAGEKeep containers sealed and away fromdirect sunlight. Recommended storagetemperature is 5-30°C.

General Purpose PVA has a storage lifeof 12 months.

Material Safety Data Sheet is availableon request.

LIMITATIONSGeneral Purpose PVA should not beused when timber and ambienttemperatures are below 10°C.

General Purpose PVA is not suitable forload bearing applications or where awater resistant bond is required.

GREENfirst PRODUCTTrade EssentialsGeneral Purpose PVA isa Greenfirst productand is certified byGood EnvironmentalChoice Australia asenvironmentallypreferable.


Safety & Usage Recommendations forPVA AdhesivesAppendix 5 Safety & UsageSection 9:5

Temperature Low Density High Density

Timbers Timbers

20°C 60 minutes 120 minutes



PVA ADHESIVES


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Tra

de

Ess

en

tial

s®8

Section 8: 20.1

APPLICATIONSCross Linking PVA Adhesive is fastsetting, develops high bond strength andheat and humidity resistance, withoutCatalyst addition, when dried at normalor elevated temperatures.

The properties of Trade Essentials CrossLinking PVA are superior to normalPVA, and conform to BS EN 204 -Exposure Group D3.

Applications for Cross Linking PVAinclude:• Edge gluing timber• Solid timber veneer to core stock• Finger jointing• Panel to frame gluing

PROPERTIESColour White liquid,

dries clearSolids High (approx. 48%)pH 3.3Viscosity Medium (4,500 cps)Open Assembly 5 mins. maximumTime at 20°CClosed Assembly 10 mins. maximumTime at 20°C

DIRECTIONSCross Linking PVA Adhesive may beapplied via brush, roller or squeezebottle. It is also suitable for use onpowered roll glue spreader or airassisted / airless spray equipment.

Cross Linking PVA Adhesive is designedfor use with hot press, radio frequency(RF) equipment, or standard cold presssetups.• All surfaces to be bonded must be

clean, dry and free from dust, oil,grease etc

• Timber moisture content should be between 8% and 12%

• Ambient and panel temperatures should be above 10°C

• Adhesive should be applied as a thin,even coating to one surface only.Parts should be combined, while theadhesive is wet, using good evenpressure (30 to 130 psi isrecommended) until the adhesivehas set

• Clamp time details are listed in tableon page 150.

• Excessive adhesive can be removedwith a damp cloth while adhesive isstill wet

• Not suitable for below waterlineapplications or for continuoussubmersion

ADHESIVE CURE TIMESHot Press Cure Typically 60-90 secs

@ 100ºC (depending on coating weight & substrate thickness)

Rf Cure A LOW power setting is preferred to produce workable amperage without arcing. A minimal change after the initial amperage drop-off will indicate adhesiveis sufficiently set.

Cold Press 20-30 minutes @ 23ºC

COVERAGEThe rate of usage of Trade EssentialsCross Linking PVA Adhesive is governedby the type of application, substrate andambient conditions.

Coverage shall fall in the range of 75 to150 grams per square metre (6 to 14m2

per litre), for most applications.

Cross Linking PVA AdhesiveTrade Essentials Cross Linking PVAAdhesive is a unique single packPVA that provides superiorbonding properties to normal PVA.It provides excellent bond strength,high heat and humidity resistance.

PVA ADHESIVES




For lamination of High PressureLaminates to particleboard or MDFboard using a hot press, the followingsettings have been found to begenerally suitable:

Adhesive Coating Press time: 2 minsWeight: 70-80gsm Temperature: 80°C Pressure: 100-

150psi

STORAGEKeep containers sealed and away fromdirect sunlight. Recommended storagetemperature is 5-30°C. Cross LinkingPVA has a shelf life of 6 months.Material Safety Data Sheets are availableon request.

LIMITATIONSCross Linking PVA should not be used when timber or ambienttemperatures are below 10°C. CrossLinking PVA is not suitable for loadbearing applications.

GREENfirst PRODUCTTrade Essentials CrossLinking PVA is aGreenfirst product andis certified by GoodEnvironmental ChoiceAustralia asenvironmentallypreferable.




Timbers Timbers




PVA ADHESIVES


Tech

nic

al D

ata:

Tra

de

Ess

en

tial

s®8

Section 8: 21.1

APPLICATIONSCraftwood® PVA Adhesive is used forthe assembly and joining of Craftwoodfor furniture and cabinet making,and laminating Craftwood for turningand shaping.

PROPERTIESColour Yellow LiquidSolids High (approx. 48%)pH 3.3Viscosity Medium (4,500 cps)Open Assembly 5 mins. maximumTime at 20°CClosed Assembly 10 mins. maximumTime at 20°C

DIRECTIONSCraftwood PVA may be applied viabrush, roller or squeeze bottle. It is alsosuitable for use on powered roll gluespreader and is suitable for use with hotor cold presses.• All surfaces to be bonded must be

clean, dry and free from dust, oil,grease etc

• MDF moisture content should be between 8% and 12%

• Ambient and panel temperatures should be above 10°C

• Adhesive should be applied as a thin,even coating to one surface only. Partsshould be combined, while theadhesive is wet, using good evenpressure (30 to 130 psi is

recommended) until the adhesive hasset

• Bonded parts should be clamped orpressed for at least 1 hour to allowthe adhesive to set.

• Excessive adhesive can be removedwith a damp cloth while adhesive isstill wet

• Allow to stand overnight for full bond development.

COVERAGETrade Essentials Craftwood PVAAdhesive should be applied at a rate of100 to 200 grams per square metre (5 to 10m2 per litre), depending on theporosity of the substrate, application andambient temperature.



STORAGE AND HANDLINGKeep containers sealed and away fromdirect sunlight. Recommended storagetemperature is 5-30°C.

Craftwood PVA has a storage life of 6months. Material Safety Data Sheet isavailable on request.

LIMITATIONSCraftwood PVA should not be usedwhen timber or ambient temperaturesare below 10°C.

Craftwood PVA is not suitable for loadbearing applications.

Craftwood® PVA AdhesiveTrade Essentials Craftwood PVAAdhesive is a unique water basedadhesive which has beenspecifically formulated tocomplement the high qualityproperties of Craftwood MDF.Craftwood PVA has fast 'wet tack',is quick drying and has excellentmachining and sanding properties.The bonds formed are verystrong, heat and moisture resistant and the glue line will accept the stains and lacquers recommended for Craftwood.




Timbers Timbers



Appendix

Section 9

HANDLING AND PRODUCTAPPLICATION GUIDELINES


Appendix 11.1 GENERAL SITE WORK NOTESStorageAlways store sheets face to face with a sheetof protective paper between the faces.

Bulk stocks should be stacked flat andcompletely supported.

Avoid low humidity & extreme temperature.

HandlingKeep work area clean to avoid marringand scratching.

Avoid contact with abrasive surfaces orgrit. Lift sheets carefully, do not slide onthe decorative surface. Do not use as awork surface.

PreconditioningPrior to fabrication laminate andsubstrate material should be allowed toreach moisture equilibrium under thesame conditions for 48 hours.

The recommended environment toachieve this is 20-25°C and 50% relativehumidity.

FabricationLaminates can be bonded to a variety ofsubstrates including particle board,medium density fibreboard, plywood,hardboard, corestock, paper honeycomband aluminium. Substrate surface mustbe of sound strength and free of sandingdefects to ensure good adhesion tolaminate and to minimise “telegraphing”of defects. Do not bond thin laminatesdirectly to plaster, plasterboard orconcrete. Laminates of less than 2mmthickness should be bonded fullysupported to substrate.

For the correct adhesive for yourapplications refer to the AdhesiveSelection guide page 139 or yournearest Branch of The Laminex Group.

To obtain maximum dimensional stability,unframed panels should have a backingsheet bonded to rear surface.

Ensure sufficient adhesive and mechanicalpressure is used to provide a first classbond.We recommend a minimumpressure of 3kg/cm2 for contact adhesivesand 6kg/cm2 for hard setting glues.

Hand SawingA panel saw gives the best result becauseof the relatively small set of the teeth.

The back stroke should be light and thecutting stroke at approximately 45° tothe face of the board.

Keep the saw sharp.

Machine SawingCircular saws with 3-4 teeth per 25mmwith only a slight set and a saw blade tipspeed of 3000 metres/minute will give aclean cut. For long production runstungsten carbide tipped blades 300mmto 350mm in diameter and operating at3000 to 3500 RPM are recommendedto achieve this. Always cut with face upto minimise surface chipping.

JigsawingA clean cut can be achieved with a jigsawusing hardened blades with average teethand slow feed speed. Non-carbide bladeswill dull quickly. Ensure sheet is adequatelysupported while cutting.

Note:Jigsaws cut with an upward stroke,therefore, in this instance cut from theback of the sheet.

Metal cutting band saws with 32 teethper 25mm are ideal for shapes.

Hand PlaningA perfect edge finish can be made with ahand plane. Specially hardened plane irons,such as the Titan high-speed type, requireless sharpening than standard irons.

Machine PlaningVertical spindle moulding machines withtungsten-tipped cutters operating at6000 RPM are ideal for edge finishingand for making perfect mitres withoutany edge chipping.

Portable RoutingPortable routers with twin flutedtungsten carbide cutters and replaceabletips are recommended for on-site edgetrimming or cut-outs for sinks, basins, etc.

DrillingHigh-speed twist drills, either hand orpower operated, will cut clean holes.Because of the hard melamine surface, asmall pilot hole should be drilled forcarpenter’s bits.

Fast cut types give the best results.For larger holes, 18mm diameter and over, a centre bit should be used.

ScrewingWhere mechanical fixing of any laminatesheeting is required always use roundhead screws and cup washers. Drill thehole slightly larger than the shank of thescrew to allow for laminate movement.Do not overtighten screws or fractureof the laminate surface may occur.Nails should never be used.

CRACKING OF LAMINATEIntermittent cracking of laminate onfabricated components, particularly withcut outs or internal L shape corners, canbe a problem occuring particularly withchanges in climatic conditions.

Laminates will grow in moist humidconditions and shrink in dry conditions.Shrinkage is accelerated if heat is also afactor, therefore rapid shrinkage mayoccur in hot dry conditions unlesscomponents have been preconditionedprior to fabrication.

Ragged edges with underside chip outor square cut internal corners provideweak spots for cracking to commence asthe laminate shrinks.

The main actions to prevent this type ofcracking are:• Laminate and substrate should be

allowed to equilibrate for up to 72hours before fabrication.

Ap

pe

nd

ices

9


• All cut outs must have clean chip freeedges and small (2-3mm) internalradius at corners.

• Ensure that machined edges of cutouts are sanded smooth and that thetop edge of the laminate is arrissed toeliminate the possiblity of stress.

• L-shaped sections must have a small(2-3mm) chip free radius at internalcorner.

• Sufficient glue and pressure must be used to ensure a first class bond, oralternately use a hard setting glue suchas urea or epoxy around perimeter ofcut out or corners.

This cracking is a recognisedcharacteristic of laminates and will neverbe totally eliminated therefore it isimportant that you and your customersunderstand why it occurs and whereverpossible take the necessary precautionsto reduce the chances of it happening.

OPENING UP OF JOINSAs detailed under ‘Cracking of Laminate’,laminates will grow in moist humidconditions and shrink in dry hotconditions.This needs to be allowed forin fabrication where laminate sheets arebeing joined, particularly in areas subjectto extreme climatic changes.

The main actions to be taken tominimise laminate movement are:• Laminate and substrate should be

allowed to equilibrate for up to 72hours before fabrication.

• Sufficient glue and pressure must beused to ensure a first class bond, oralternatively use a hard setting gluesuch as urea or epoxy both sides ofany join and around each laminatepanel perimeter.

• If contact adhesive is used then theadhesive coverage must be in excessof 85% on both laminate andsubstrate surfaces.

• If installing laminate on site allow it toacclimatise for up to 72 hours beforefabrication. If site is to have airconditioning then this should be inoperation before laminate is installed.

• Where two fabricated componentsare to be joined such as at a Mason’smitre, a complete spread of siliconsealant or Colorfill should be appliedto one surface of the componentsbefore clamping them together.

Special Note: Oven and Hot PlatesurroundsLaminate can be used on bench topsaround ovens or hot plates, however it isrecommended that any cut outs for hotplates should have an appropriate heatabsorbing tape applied to the perimeterof the cut out to help avoid cracking asdetailed in ‘Cracking of Laminate’.

Regarding oven surrounds there aresome basic requirements which need tobe followed.

Gas appliances:The installation of gasappliances is covered by Plumbing codeAG 601. Basically any vertical surfacesurrounding a cooktop extending from10mm below the hob, to 150mm above,if closer than 200mm from the burner,must be non-combustible. Noncombustible means products like metal,ceramic tiles etc. Laminates arecombustible and therefore not permitted.

Always install gas appliances as permanufacturers instructions.When installedcorrectly, laminate products are suitable.

Electric appliances: There is no nationalregulation regarding the surrounds ofelectric appliances, however theappliance must conform to AS 3172 andpart of this standard is the inclusion ofinstallation instructions for eachparticular appliance.

Always install electrical appliances as permanufacturers instructions.When installedcorrectly, laminate products are suitable.

Therefore with electric appliances themanufacturers installation instructionsbecome the standard and must beadhered to at all times.The onlyrequirement for surrounding surfaces isthat they can withstand temperaturesup to 90°C which means that laminatesare suitable for this application withelectric appliances.

However, in all instances it is thecustomers’ responsibility to ensure thatall regulations are adhered to wheninstalling laminates in these applications.

HANDLING AND PRODUCTAPPLICATION GUIDELINES


LAMINATE PRODUCTS - GENERAL CARE & MAINTENANCE

Appendix 2Laminate surfaced products arehardwearing materials, but like allmaterials can be damaged if usedwithout some care and maintenance.

The following information should help inassisting you to maintain the surface ofyour products with the minimum timeand effort.

Special care is needed for the following:Laminex Lucent, Laminex Metallics,Laminex Stainless Steel and FormicaMetals Laminates. Refer to individualproduct datasheets. For generallaminates the following care andmaintenance applies.

CLEANINGA wipe over with a clean soft dampcloth should be sufficient to keep alldecorative surfaces clean.

Light stains or streaks can be wipedaway using an all purpose cleaner suchas Windex spray cleaner or Ajax Spray nWipe or Mr Muscle.

Soiled surfaces are removed with warmsoapy water or with a commondetergent, such as Mr Muscle, Dissol,Nifty Solvent or Bathroom Cleaner, FlashLiquid or Bathroom Plus containing noabrasive or strongly acidic or alkalineingredients.

It may be necessary to use a brushsimilar to a tooth or nail brush as well,where the surface is of a texture orembossed finish.Wax or other polishesare unnecessary and should not be usedon decorative surfaces.

STAINSSpills of any nature should be wiped up assoon as they occur. Laminated surfacesare resistant to most household products,but not absolutely stainproof.

They are unaffected by normalhousehold reagents such as detergents,non-bleach washing powders, nail polishremover, soaps, petrol, methylated spirits,

mineral turpentine, flyspray, grease,coffee, shoe polish and wax crayon.

Tea, beetroot juice, red wine, fruit juices,hypochlorite bleach, hydrogen peroxidesolution in any concentration, mineralacids, caustic solution, sodium bisulphate,potassium permanganate in anyconcentration, berry juices, silver nitrateor silver fluoride solutions, gentian violetin any concentration, mild silver protein,laundry blue, dye or iodine solution(alcohol containing 1% iodine), will causestains if not removed immediately.

If stain damage does occur, endeavour toremove by using either the normalcleaning method or appropriatesolvents.

If unsuccessful dab the stain with dilutedbleach mixture (1 part bleach to 8 partswater); leave for 3 minutes then washoff with water and dry. Note that bleachmay etch the laminate surface.

For a persistant stain apply a mildabrasive such as white toothpasteapplied with a soft toothbrush or clothbut be advised that doing so can changethe Finish texture. Never use a harshabrasive or steel wool.

Stains such as residual lacquer and paintsor adhesives can generally be cleanedwithout difficulty, particularly if thematerial has not been allowed to hardenfor weeks. Some special types ofadhesives and paints, however, hardenchemically and become insoluble andinfusible quite rapidly.These are theCyanoacrylates, ‘Two Pot’ epoxy resins,acid hardened urea and Resorcinol glues.

These must be removed before settingtakes place as they cannot always bedissolved without affecting the laminatesurface.

A glue remover such as LOCKTITE® GlueRemover is suitable for the removal ofCyanoacrylate glues and some other gluesfrom laminate surfaces. Follow the

product guidelines carefully. Some residualstaining may occur.

Laminated surfaces have the same colourfast properties as standard laminate. As such,under normal conditions of interior use,colour retention is assured. However,constant exposure to sunlight andmoisture will cause it, like most fabricsand paints, to change colour. For thisreason laminated boards are notrecommended for exterior use.

Common Adhesives and Paints can beremoved with the following materials:

1. Alcohols (Methylated Spirits,Methanol)

2. Aromatics (Xylene, Petrol)

3. Aliphatics (Mineral Turpentine,Kerosene)

4. Oils (Mineral Oil,Vegetable Oil)

5. Ketones (Acetones, Nail PolishRemover)

6. Ether – Alcohols (Cellosolves,Carbitoles)

7. Paint Thinners (Being a mixture of above)

8. Lacquer Thinners (Without theaddition of Acid)

Note: Acidic based paint strippers mustnot be used.

DangerSome of the above listed solvents areextremely flammable and vapoursharmful. Keep away from heat, sparksand open flame. Keep containers closed.Avoid prolonged breathing of vapour.Avoid prolonged or repeated contactwith skin. Use adequate ventilation.


Ap

pe

nd

ices

9

LAMINATE PRODUCTS - GENERAL CARE & MAINTENANCE

Section 9: 2.2

Oil Paints, if reasonably fresh, can benormally removed by groups 1, 2, 3, 4and 7.

If aged, can be generally removed bymore aggressive solvents such as 5,6 and 8.

Enamels generally require solvents fromgroups 2, 5, 6 and 8.

Contact Adhesives, if not too old and cured, can be removed by 2, 4, 5and 8.

PVA – Adhesive types can generally beremoved with soap and water andsolvent groups 1 and 3.

Paraffin wax residue from candles shouldbe scraped off, taking care not to scratchthe surface in the process.

Any residues still present can be ironedout through blotting paper.

SCRATCHES & CUTSLaminated surfaces can be damaged bychopping and cutting directly onto thesurface and to prevent this happening, acutting board or chopping board shouldalways be used.

Sliding of heavy metallic or earthenwareobjects can cause scuffing of the surface.

Severe cuts can be repaired withLaminex® Colorfill specially formulatedcolour matched kit for sealing joins andrepairing damaged decorative surfaces.

Note: While Laminex & Formica® HighPressure laminate Gloss finish has aprotective plastic film, it is recommendedthat the fabricator/installer of the finishedlaminate benchtops takes the necessaryprecautions to protect all laminatesurfaces until handover is complete.

BURNSLaminex & Formica laminates willwithstand boiling water andtemperatures up to 155°C (310°F).

However, it is recommended to use aprotective mat to prevent the surfacebeing scorched when a hot iron is beingor has been used.

The same applies when pans or dishesare taken from the oven or hot plates astheir temperature in most instanceswould be in excess of 155°C (310°F).

Some makes of electric frypans can alsogenerate sufficient heat to damagelaminate surfaces.If by accident a slight scorch markappears, it may be possible to remove,using the method detailed under theheading ‘stains’, applying a mild abrasivesuch as toothpaste with a softtoothbrush or cloth. Should the damagebe severe, replacement of the areawould be the only satisfactory solution.

Do not use laminate in areas whereprolonged exposure to temperaturesexceeding 135ºC may occur.

EXTERIOR USE Prolonged exposure to sunlight maycause some colour change to occur withlaminates. Laminates are notrecommended for exterior applicationsor interior applications with prolongedexposure to direct sunlight.

Note: All of the above situations cancause solvent based contact adhesives tosoften with resultant bubbling.

BOARD PRODUCTS - HANDLING &PRODUCT APPLICATION GUIDELINES


Appendix 33.1 SITE WORK NOTESStorage and Handling ofDecorated board productsThe following recommendations shouldbe applied to maintain board products ingood order and condition.The storagearea should be protected from the sun,rain and wind. Open sided sheds wouldnot be regarded as dry stores.

All packs should be evenly supported ateach end and intervals of not more than750mm where the packs are multiplestacked, and no further than 150mmfrom edge of boards. All supportsshould be vertically aligned.

Keep work area clean. Avoid contactwith abrasive surfaces or grit.

LIFT SHEETS CAREFULLY

Incorrect storage method

Correct storage method

PreconditioningThe Laminex Group despatches boardproducts with a moisture content ofbetween 5% to 9%.This can alter,however, during the time the boards arein transit or in storage before use. Apartfrom this, the relative humidity of theenvironment where the boards are tobe fixed may call for quite differentmoisture content, and some adjustmentmay be needed.

Pre-conditioning panels is recommendedto ensure that they attain an equilibriummoisture content (EMC) before fixing,so as to reduce the likelihood of bowingafter they have been fixed.

Any subsequent movement will thus bea drying shrinkage which, given adequatesupport and fixings, keep the boards flatand taut.

Some boards may achieve an EMCsimply by being stored for some time inthe location where they are to be usedwithout any positive conditioning.

Conditioning in airConditioning in air is adequate for mostlocations. It involves exposing the boardsin the room where they are to be fixedfor long enough to allow them to reacha moisture content which is in balancewith their surroundings and adjust theirdimensions accordingly.

To encourage free air circulation over allboard surfaces, the boards should bearranged loosely as shown.They shouldthen be allowed to stand like this for aminimum of 48 hours either horizontallyor vertically.

3.2 FABRICATIONMachiningDecorated Board products can be cut,drilled and machined using standardwood working equipment fitted withtungsten carbide tipped cutting edges.

It is recommended that the material becut on a bench type or beam saw, usinga 300mm tungsten tipped blade with 72to 96 teeth. For pre-laminated boardsuch as Whiteboard™, a triple chip sawblade should protrude 20-30mm abovethe surface of the blade.

Note: All decorated panels should becut only on saws that have a scribingblade on the underside.

ADHESIVES AND BONDINGWhen gluing dowels or biscuits to thecore of Decorate Board products, a highsolids PVA with good gap fillingproperties is suitable.Trade Essentials®

General Purpose PVA is recommendedfor this application.

However, when gluing timber and otherwood panels to a decorative melamineboard surface,Trade Essentials MelamineAdhesive is recommended. It provides asuperior bond to the non-poroussurface of the melamine coated boardand dries to a clear glue line.

DOWEL JOINTSDowel joints are one of the mostcommon adhesive based furnitureassembly joints. Dowelling is a simple,inexpensive, strong and reliable way ofmaking a butt or mitre joint.

Machining dowel holesDowel holes should be cleanly machinedwith all loose particles blown from theholes. If a blunt drill is used the drill willoverheat and polish the inside of thehole and reduce the ability of theadhesive to bond.



Ap

pe

nd

ices

9

Section 9: 3.2

Dowel diameterDowels used should be no thicker than50% of the thickness of the panel used.

Hole diameterThe fit of the dowel in the hole is criticalto withdrawal strength. Holes drilled inthe edges should be just a firm push-infit to prevent the edge of the boardfrom splitting as the dowels expand dueto moisture uptake from the adhesive.Dowel inserted into the face of a panelshould be a firm knock-in fit

Dowel and dowel hole diametersBoard Dowel DowelThickness Diameter Hole Diameter(mm) (mm) (mm)15 or less 6 6.216 to 24 6 to 8 6.2 to 8.225 or more 10 10.2

GluingWhen using dowel joints only thedowels are glued in place.The practiceof using glue between the edges and theface may actually weaken the joint.

DepthInserting the dowel to the proper depthis important.They should be inserted atleast 25mm into the edge of the paneland as deep as practical into the facesurface, but no more than two thirds ofthe thickness. In general, the longer thedowel the stronger the joint.(Preferred option is clearance of 0.1mmaround dowel)

Dowel SelectionDowels with multiple longitudinal orspiral groove patterns are recommendedto ensure uniform adhesive spread withinthe joint.The dowels should be cleanlymachined and free from any loose ortorn fibres.The moisture content ofdowels at the time of assembly shouldbe in the range 10% +/-2%.

Smooth dowel (not recommended)

Grooved dowels (preferred)

MECHANICAL FIXING

Selecting screw typeQuality parallel threaded screws arerecommended for Decorated Boardproducts.

Selecting screw lengthThe length of the screw directly affectsthe holding power of the screws, forexample, a 25mm screw has twice theholding power as a 13mm screw.This ismost important when screwing into theedge of panels.

Selecting screw diameterTo avoid splitting the panel whenscrewing into the edge, the screwdiameter should not exceed 20% of thepanel thickness. For example, themaximum screw diameter for 19mmboard is 4mm or 6 gauge.

Countersunk – recessed head parallel shank(recommended screw type)

Countersunk – slotted head traditional wood screw(not recommended)

Pilot HolesCorrect pilot holes are essential to avoidsplitting.The pilot holes should beapproximately 80% of the screw corediameter. Do not over tighten screws, asfurther turning after the screw is tightwill reduce holding power.

Recessed head

Parallel core(recommendedscrew type)

Slotted head

Traditional wood screw (not recommended)



Screw locationScrews should be carefully positioned toprevent splintering and break out – no closer than 25mm to a corner,no closer than 10mm to the edge.When a long line of screws has to beused, it is a good idea to stagger thescrews to prevent splitting the substratebeing screwed to.When screwing intothe edge, never place a screw closerthan 75mm from the end of the panel.

3.3 JOINTING SYSTEMS FORDECORATED MDF ANDPARTICLEBOARD PANELS

JointingIt is difficult to make a join in woodbased panels such as MDF andParticleboard for wall paneling and notshow the join.The slightest movementwill show up and look unsightly so thebest alternative is to make the join lookattractive, and this can be achieved inmany ways.

The most common types of joint forwall paneling is a ‘V’ joint, a slip tonguejoint or tongue and groove.

Featured jointsOn boards to be painted on site and forplain coloured pre-decorated boards,joints are usually featured: either by theuse of suitable cover strips, by bevellingboard edges, or by forming an ‘open’joint.These techniques, together withsome angle joint techniques, are shownon the following page.

Cover strips are manufactured inaluminium, plastic or wood. Aluminiumor metallised plastics are usually chosento contrast with the board; where as asuitably coloured plastic, or painted orstained wood helps to form moreunobtrusive joints.

Screws position on panel face

Screws position on panel edges

Recommended Pilot Hole Thickness The maximum recommended screw gaugeScrew Gauge Diameter to thickness of Decorated Board product

4 2.0mm 9mm – – N/R N/R N/R5 2.4mm 12mm Yes Yes – N/R N/R6 2.6mm 16mm Yes Yes Yes – N/R7 2.7mm 18mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes8 3.0mm 25mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes9 3.3mm 35mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Screw Gauge 4 5 6 7 8

N/R = NOT RECOMMENDED

12mm Minimum from edge25mm Minimumfrom corner

70mm Minimumfrom corner

Screws position on panel face

Screws position on panel edges


Ap

pe

nd

ices

9


Section 9: 3.4

The joints shown here are only arepresentation of the many configurationsthat can be used. Many types ofaluminium partition mouldings are alsoavailable. All feature joints are suitableproviding an expansion or contractiongap of 3mm minimum is provided.

The joint that will work the best is theslip tongue as it is simple and veryeffective.The edge of the panels have tobe grooved by either spindle moulder oron site with a router using a saw bladetype cutter such as a 4 tooth slottingcutter.The slip tongue can be plywoodor Thin Craftwood™ but the best isanodised aluminium, usually black.

The reason for this is that it will notshow any movement as it would with apainted tongue. All edges should bepainted black with a very fine arras onthe edge.This method works well withthe split batten system.

3.4 APPLICATION ANDINSTALLATION OF WOODBASED PANELS FOR INTERNALWALL PANELLINGDecorated MDF and particleboardpanels are also commonly used as wallpanelling.

Fixing panels to the wall – Split battens or ‘J’ clipsThe most effective method of fixing woodbased panels is wooden or aluminiumcleats to the wall and back of the panels.This method has many advantages.

The panels can be prepared off site i.e. cut,edged or polished.They are quick to install,can be easily replaced if damaged and ifthere is any expansion or contraction, theycan be easily pushed along.

FIXING PANELS TO STUD WORKSpacing of battens, studs and noggins forpanels up to 12mm thick:

Studs should be at 450 maximum withone noggin in walls up to 2400mm high,with two noggins in walls over 2400mmhigh. Battens should be spaced at450mm centers running at right anglesto the studs.

For panels over 12mm, the stud spacingcan be 600mm with noggins the same asfor thinner panels, and battens can bespaced at 600mm.

If the panels are to be mechanically fixedby screws or nails, it is important that afixing pattern be followed.The fixingshould work from the center out inevery direction or if this is not possibleon larger panels, fix along one long sidefirst and then work across the panel onall patterns evenly.

Timber Split Batten installation

Metal ‘J’ Clip installation

Tongue & groove

Overlap

Shadow line

Paintable

Aluminium slip tongue orthin timber

Black edgesand back

Sikaflex 11FC

3mm min

3mm min

3mm min

Rebated Mitre Joint Butt Joint with Dowell

Lock Mitre Joint Rebated Butt Joint

3mm - 6mm min

Receivers at 600mmmaximum centres

Aluminium tongue

Fixing clips at 300mm centres

Split batten receiver

MDF/Particleboardpanel


Screw - 3mm shorterthan panel thickness

Split batten fixing clipsat 300mm centres3 clips/900mm panel4 clips/1200mm panel6 clips/1800mm panel

Wall fixingSplit batten receiver

Tonguejoint

Aluminium J clips at 300mm centres

Aluminium J clipsreceiver



Aluminium receiverWall fixing

Aluminium J clips at 300mm centres3 clips/900mm panel4 clips/1200mm panel6 clips/1800mm panel

Wall fixing



Panel thicknessPanel thickness is relative to what isrequired from the panel i.e. impact orsound rating, etc.

As a general rule 12mm is very suitablefor most occasions but 16mm may bemore appropriate for sound rating.12mm is the thinnest panel that can beused with the split batten system.Thinner panels can be used providedgood support is provided and the panelsare well fixed with nails and adhesive.

Nails, staples, screws etc...When mechanical fixings are used forMDF or Particleboard panels it isparticularly important that the correctnumber of fixings are used.

Fasteners should be inset from boardedges by at least 12mm whereverpossible. Sometimes it will not bepossible to inset fasteners 12mm fromthe edge. In these instances, inset as faras the support width will allow.

3. FINISHING OF TIMBER VENEER PANELS1. Fine sand all surfaces to be finished.

2. Fill all holes and openings with a goodquality wood filler. Let dry and sandflat.

3. If the panels are to be stained, followthe manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. Apply a coat of sanding sealer andsand after drying.

5. Apply two or three coats of the clearlacquer, following the manufacturer’sinstructions.

Note: Due to the porosity of the cutedge of the surface veneer layer, it isimperative that this exposed grain is fullysealed to eliminate ingress of moisture.

It is recommended that particularattention is paid to the fine sanding (240grit or finer) of all veneer edges, and thatthe surface coating thickness is adequateto resist moisture ingress using the paintmanufacturer’s application specifications.

Precautions with Finishing Timber VeneersIt is recommended that two packpolyurethanes are used to seal and finishall Timber Veneer species.The reason forthis is that:

“Defects in finishes over veneers canrange from blooming to blotching.Blotching is caused by tannins in thetimber veneer reacting with acids in thecoating and adhesives, particularly withAcid Cure Lacquers.

Tannins leaching through the veneer canchange the colour of the timber, notablythe yellowing of pine.

Although the yellowing of timber isoften considered to add to themellowness of wood, the effects of acidson cherry, huon pine and some cedarscan be detrimental.

Acids from tannins, adhesives or acidcatalysts can unpredictably stain beech avery bright orange to deep red colour.

Blooming is caused by moisture beingtrapped under the coating and forming amilky haze. A process known as wickingcan occur where water rises up throughthe timber (even veneer) but cannotevaporate because the surface is sealed.

Some timbers, particularly beech,are ultra sensitive to water exposurewhich can lead to coatings ‘delaminating’or peeling off.

Polyurethanes offer the greatestresistance to leaching tannins, dyes ormoisture from veneers.

We recommend a two-packpolyurethane sealer coat on veneer,rather than less flexible coatings. Onbeech a two-pack polyurethane top coatis preferred also.

Nitro-cellulose and precatalysed lacquerssimply will not stand up to the moistureexposure, especially where sharp edgesare involved, tests have shown that somesingle pack lacquers will begin to breakdown in under 24 hours.”

Excerpt from “The AustralianCabinetmaker and Timber Trade Journal”June 1997. Reprinted with permission.

Incorrect DO NOT tack corners first

Correct sequence and frequency of fixing


Ap

pe

nd

ices

9

Section 9: 3.6


SHELF LOADINGSThe large range of board products both decorated and undecorated allow selection of product not only on aesthetic groundsbut on suitability for shelf loadings which may range from a simple shelf in a kitchen to a huge collection of books in a library.

Thickness (mm) Size Shelf Loading (Kg) Size Shelf Loading (Kg)16 600mm x 200mm 28 1000mm x 200mm 618 40 925 108 2332 226 4916 600mm x 300mm 42 1000mm x 300mm 918 60 1325 162 3532 339 7316 600mm x 400mm 56 1000mm x 400mm 1218 80 1725 215 4732 452 9816 600mm x 500mm 71 1000mm x 500mm 1518 101 2225 269 5832 >500 12216 600mm x 600mm 85 1000mm x 600mm 1818 121 2625 323 7032 >500 14616 900mm x 200mm 8 1200mm x 200mm 418 12 525 32 1332 67 2816 900mm x 300mm 13 1200mm x 300mm 518 18 825 48 2032 100 4216 900mm x 400mm 17 1200mm x 400mm 718 24 1025 64 2732 134 5616 900mm x 500mm 21 1200mm x 500mm 918 30 1325 80 3432 167 7116 900mm x 600mm 25 1200mm x 600mm 1118 36 1525 96 4032 201 85

CRAFTWOOD® (MDF) - SHELF LOADING RECOMMENDATIONS

Note: These loads should be used as a guide only.We recommended that all designers carry out theirown full load analysis based on their specific application.



PARTICLEBOARD - SHELF LOADING RECOMMENDATION

Thickness (mm) Size Shelf Loading (Kg) Size Shelf Loading (Kg)16 600mm x 200mm 20 1000mm x 200mm 418 28 625 75 1633 172 3716 600mm x 300mm 29 1000mm x 300mm 618 42 925 112 2433 258 5616 600mm x 400mm 39 1000mm x 400mm 818 56 1225 149 3233 344 7416 600mm x 500mm 49 1000mm x 500mm 1118 70 1525 187 4033 430 9316 600mm x 600mm 59 1000mm x 600mm 1318 84 1825 224 4833 >500 11116 900mm x 200mm 6 1200mm x 200mm 218 8 325 22 933 51 2116 900mm x 300mm 9 1200mm x 300mm 418 12 525 33 1433 76 3216 900mm x 400mm 12 1200mm x 400mm 518 17 725 44 1933 102 4316 900mm x 500mm 15 1200mm x 500mm 618 21 925 55 2333 127 5416 900mm x 600mm 17 1200mm x 600mm 718 25 1025 66 2833 153 64



Ap

pe

nd

ices

9

Section 9: 3.8

Thickness (mm) Size Loading (Kg) Size Loading (Kg)19 600mm x 200mm 50 1000mm x 200mm 1122 78 1725 115 2519 600mm x 300mm 76 1000mm x 300mm 1622 117 2525 172 3719 600mm x 400mm 101 1000mm x 400mm 2222 156 3425 229 5019 600mm x 500mm 126 1000mm x 500mm 2722 195 4225 287 6219 600mm x 600mm 151 1000mm x 600mm 3322 235 5125 344 7419 900mm x 200mm 15 1200mm x 200mm 622 23 1025 34 1419 900mm x 300mm 22 1200mm x 300mm 922 35 1525 51 2219 900mm x 400mm 30 1200mm x 400mm 1322 46 2025 68 2919 900mm x 500mm 37 1200mm x 500mm 1622 58 2425 85 3619 900mm x 600mm 45 1200mm x 600mm 1922 69 2925 102 43

CLASS 1 PARTICLEBOARD FLOORING - STATIC LOADING RECOMMENDATIONS


This table refers to Particleboard Flooring only.



SAFETY & USAGE RECOMMENDATIONSFOR CONTACT ADHESIVES

Appendix 4APPLICATION METHODSThe best method of applying contactadhesives is by:1. Spray application.2. Lambswool roller, then nip roller.3. Brush or scraper, then pass through a

nip roller. If a nip roller is not availablethen apply pressure with a 75mmrubber roller with a long handle.Thisdelivers an average of 1.75kg/cm2,longer rubber rollers decrease thepoundage delivered.

ADHESIVE BONDING HINTSDO NOT leave the lid off containers.

DO NOT store containers on concretefloors.Store on wooden base to prevent coldconcrete chilling.

DO NOT store containers in the openas this could lead to adhesive solidifying.

DO NOT smoke or have open flamenear adhesive.

DO NOT add foreign solvent to TradeEssentials Adhesives. For cleaning useTrade Essentials Adhesive Cleaner, andfor thinning where necessary, use TradeEssentials Contact Adhesive Thinner.

DO NOT apply adhesive attemperatures below 10°C unlessadequate heating and drying facilities areinstalled.There is a definite loss of ‘grab’at low temperatures.

DO NOT apply adhesive over paintedsurfaces.

DO check for proper surfacepreparation.Wipe metal with cleanerbefore applying adhesive. Mill process oilis often found on metal. Mould releasepowders are often found on rubber andplastic castings.

DO test adhesive on new or differentcomponents before going intoproduction.

DO apply two coats to rough end grain.

DO apply enough adhesive and pressureto surfaces. 85% of failures are due toone or both of these factors.

DO regularly check the condensationtrap to ensure air lines are free of water.

Bond FailureThe main symptoms and causes are:Symptom Possible CauseEdge lifting: Insufficient adhesive.

Bonding too soon.Insufficient pressure.Exposed to direct heat from the sun before 72 hrs.

Bubble in centre Bonding too soon,of laminate trapping solvent.

Edges were bonded first, instead of bonding from the centre outwards.Insufficient adhesive or inconsistent spray pattern.

Shiny area over Insufficient pressure.entire surface:Dull areas on Coating too thin on substrate: highly absorbent

surfaces.Adhesive Insufficient drying stringy when time, thereforedelaminating: bonding too soon.Small circular Dry or contaminatedunbonded areas: areas.

If the temperature is high, you willexperience shorter drying time. If thetemperature is low you couldexperience blushing, unless you havetaken all the proper precautions.During winter, bonding problems aremore likely to occur due to blushing.

Blushing is moisture condensing onfreshly applied adhesive due to rapidsolvent evaporation cooling the airbelow the dew point. In other words, awater film on top of the adhesive. Ifblushing occurs, it can be removed byapplying heat or hot air.

Approved hot air blowers are the bestoption, heating lamps in sufficientquantity, or industrial heaters maysometimes be used. Open radiators aredangerous and could cause fire. Blushingcan be eliminated altogether by theinstallation of a hot spray unit.



Ap

pe

nd

ices

9

Section 9: 4.2

PROPER SPRAYING1. Adjust the gun to give correct

coverage of adhesive. i.e. Fluid control, air control, gun depression (trigger).

2. Spray at 90° to the substrate and hold gun 300-375mm from substratewhile spraying. Do not forget to trigger the gun when you complete your pass.

3. Adhesive must be thoroughly dry before bonding.DO NOT exceed bonding range of adhesive.

4. Combine substrates and run throughpinch roller immediately after combining.

When bringing the two surfacestogether work from the centre out tothe edges/ends.This will remove anytension that can be in the laminatesheet.When hand rolling, work from thecentre to the end also.

BRING THE TWO SURFACESTOGETHER

HAND ROLLING

Laminate surface

Length of dowelSubstrate

Roller (pressure)work from centreout to edges

Symptom Cause Action

Adhesive coating splatters Too much fluid reaching tip. Reduce fluid pressure and flow.and is uneven. Atomisation pressure too low. Increase air pressure.

Air cap clogged. Clean with solvent or broom straw.Adhesive has become too thick. Thin to original consistency only.

Narrow fan. Improper choice of air cap. Choose correct air cap.Inadequate air pressure. Increase air pressure.Fluid pressure too low. Adjust pressure balance (air versus fluid).

Too light spray pattern. Insufficient adhesive reaching gun. Increase fluid pressure.Atomisation pressure too high. Reduce air pressure.Gun nozzle or caps are plugged. Clean with solvent or broom straw.Spray gun moving too fast. Slow speed.

Adhesive cobwebs Gun too far from work. Reduce distance between gun and work when sprayed. Atomisation pressure too high. to 300mm.

Reduce air pressure.

Adhesive film has lost its Conditions too cold. Raise area temperature to above 18°C.'tack' or initial grab. Blushing. Use approved hot air blowers to remove

moisture. An additional coat of adhesive may be required.

Adhesive goes lumpy in Incompatible thinners Use only recommended thinnersdrum and solids separate used to thin adhesive. for the adhesive.from solvent you are using.

Adhesive separating in drum, Material has phased or settled. Thoroughly stir and remix before using.with thinner solvent on top and thicker solids on bottom.

SPRAY APPLICATION SOLUTIONS



SAFETY AND HANDLING OFCONTACTS AND SOLVENTS

DANGERThe storage and handling precautionslisted below apply to all the previouslymentioned adhesives and solvents.

STORAGERECOMMENDATIONSStore in well sealed containers awayfrom heat and any source of combustionor sparks. Storage area should be dry,well ventilated and kept at a maximumof 30°C and a minimum of 5°C.

Refer to local, state and federalregulations for storage/ disposal. Iftemperature exceeds 30°C, coolcontainer under cold running water for30 minutes before opening. Stir beforeuse. Freezing is to be avoided.

Each product will remain suitable for itsintended purpose for up to 12 monthswhen stored in the original sealedcontainer.

HANDLING PRECAUTIONS1. Material is highly flammable. Flash

point of less than 0°C. Class 3 flammable liquid.

2. Do not smoke, have open flames, fire or electrical equipment near productswhile in use.Vapours are extremely flammable.

3. Use only in a well ventilated area.Avoid breathing the vapours and solvent contact with skin.

Respiratory protection not required ifventilation adequate. Otherwise use half-face vapour filter.

Protective gloves: Solvent resistant.Eye protection: Safety glass with side shield.

4. Harmful or fatal if swallowed. Keep out of reach of children. Do not induce vomiting if swallowed.Call a doctor immediately.

5. Keep container firmly closed when not in use.

6. In case of fire, foam, dry powder or carbon dioxide are preferred extinguishers. If liquid product is present, water jet may spread the flames.

7. Material Safety Data sheets for all listed adhesives are available on request.

SAFETY & USAGE RECOMMENDATIONSFOR PVA & WATER BASED ADHESIVES


Ap

pe

nd

ices

9

Section 9: 5.1

SAFETY AND USAGERECOMMENDATIONS FOR PVAAND WATER BASED ADHESIVES

STORAGERECOMMENDATIONSStore in well sealed containers awayfrom heat. Prevent from freezing.

Observe shelf life conditions for thespecific products.

PVA AND WATER BASEDADHESIVESMaterials are water based and non-hazardous.

General ventilation is recommendedduring normal use.Wash any spillagefrom skin with water.

If swallowed seek medical assistance.There are no known symptoms ofingestion.

Keep containers closed when not in use.

In case of fire use CO2, dry chemical orwater.

Material Safety Data Sheets are availablefor all products listed.

GENERALRECOMMENDATIONS FORWATER BASED ADHESIVESApplication can be by glue spreader,roller, squeeze bottle or brush.

Keep measuring equipment clean andaccurate.

ADHESIVE BONDING HINTS1. Ensure moisture content of timber is

under 14%, preferably 8-12%.2. Timber surfaces should be machined

for gluing on the same day.3. Ensure surfaces for gluing are

prepared with sharp well aligned cutters.

4. Assembly should be done within the specified assembly time, and glue squeeze achieved on pressing.

5. Clamp pressure should be adequate for the assembly to get intimate contact of surfaces. Softwood 50-100PSI Hardwood 150-200 PSI.

6. Test adhesive on new or different components before going into production.

7. Vary coverage rate to suit the porosity of the surface.

8. Do not apply adhesive at temperatures below 15°C, unless adequate heating facilities are installed.

9. Do not apply adhesive over painted surfaces.

10. As hardness / density of timber species increases, the adhesive selected should be the higher crosslinked type.

BOND FAILUREThe most common causes of bondfailure are:• Shrinkage stress from high or variable

moisture content of timber.• Exceeding assembly time of glue in

hot or dry weather.• Poor preparation of the surfaces for

gluing.• Insufficient pressure on large

assemblies particularly withhardwoods.

• Use of a glue that is inadequate forthe application or substrate.

Appendix 5

Appendix 6

WHITEBOARD STD & MR9mm x 3600 x 18009mm x 2400 x 18009mm x 2400 x 1200

12mm x 3600 x 180012mm x 3600 x 120012mm x 3600 x 90012mm x 2400 x 180012mm x 2400 x 1200

16mm x 3600 x 180016mm x 3600 x 120016mm x 3600 x 90016mm x 3600 x 60016mm x 3600 x 45016mm x 2400 x 180016mm x 2400 x 120016mm x 2400 x 600

18mm x 3600 x 180018mm x 3600 x 120018mm x 3600 x 60018mm x 3600 x 45018mm x 2400 x 180018mm x 2400 x 1200

25mm x 3600 x 180025mm x 3600 x 120025mm x 2400 x 180025mm x 2400 x 1200

33mm x 3600 x 180033mm x 2400 x 1200

WHITEBOARD SHELVING16mm x 3600 x 60016mm x 3600 x 45016mm x 3600 x 29516mm x 2400 x 600

AQUABAN (Benchtop Substrate)33mm x 3600 x 60033mm x 3600 x 90033mm x 3600 x 1800

MDF WHITE BACKING BOARD3mm x 2400 x 7603mm x 2400 x 1200

PARTICLEBOARD FLOORINGSTD & H2 Termite ResistentGreen Tongue19mm x 3600 x 80019mm x 3600 x 120019mm x 3600 x 900Beige Tongue22mm x 3600 x 80022mm x 3600 x 120022mm x 3600 x 900Brown Tongue25mm x 3600 x 600

WHITE MDF STD & MR9mm x 2400 x 120012mm x 2400 x 120016mm x 2400 x 120016mm x 3600 x 1200

18mm x 2400 x 120018mm x 3600 x 120025mm x 2400 x 120032mm x 2400 x 1200

PARTICLEBOARD STD & MR9mm x 3600 x 18009mm x 3600 x 12009mm x 2400 x 18009mm x 2400 x 1200

12mm x 3600 x 180012mm x 3600 x 120012mm x 3600 x 90012mm x 3600 x 60012mm x 3600 x 45012mm x 2400 x 180012mm x 2400 x 120012mm x 2400 x 90012mm x 2400 x 60012mm x 1800 x 1200

16mm x 3600 x 180016mm x 3600 x 120016mm x 3600 x 90016mm x 3600 x 60016mm x 3600 x 45016mm x 2700 x 120016mm x 2400 x 180016mm x 2400 x 120016mm x 2400 x 90016mm x 2400 x 60016mm x 1800 x 120016mm x 1800 x 900

18mm x 3600 x 180018mm x 3600 x 120018mm x 3600 x 90018mm x 3600 x 60018mm x 3600 x 45018mm x 2700 x 120018mm x 2400 x 180018mm x 2400 x 120018mm x 2400 x 90018mm x 2400 x 60018mm x 1800 x 1200

25mm x 3600 x 180025mm x 3600 x 120025mm x 3600 x 90025mm x 3600 x 60025mm x 2400 x 180025mm x 2400 x 1200


PARTICLEBOARD TIMBER EDGED SHELVING16mm x 3600 x 60016mm x 3600 x 450

CRAFTFORM9mm x 2400 x 1200

CRAFTWOOD MDF STD & MR3mm x 3600 x 12003mm x 2400 x 1200

4.75mm x 3600 x 18004.75mm x 3600 x 12004.75mm x 2400 x 1200

6mm x 3600 x 18006mm x 3600 x 12006mm x 2400 x 1200

7.5mm x 3600 x 18007.5mm x 3600 x 12007.5mm x 2400 x 1200



16 & 18mm x 3600 x 180016 & 18mm x 3600 x 120016 & 18mm x 2700 x 120016 & 18mm x 2400 x 180016 & 18mm x 2400 x 120016 & 18mm x 2400 x 90016 & 18mm x 2100 x 120016 & 18mm x 1800 x 1200

25 & 32mm x 3600 x 180025 & 32mm x 3600 x 120025 & 32mm x 2700 x 120025 & 32mm x 2400 x 180025 & 32mm x 2400 x 120025 & 32mm x 2400 x 90025 & 32mm x 2100 x 120025 & 32mm x 1800 x 1200

SINGLE SIDED MDF (735kg/m3)16,18 & 25mm x 3600 x 180016,18 & 25mm x 3600 x 120016,18 & 25mm x 2400 x 180016,18 & 25mm x 2400 x 1200

SINGLE SIDED MDF (810 kg/m3)16mm x 2400 x 120018mm x 2400 x 120025mm x 2400 x 1200

TRADE ESSENTIALS - SHEET SIZE AND THICKNESS AVAILABILITY

Contact your local branch for E0 productsand availability.

SHEET SIZE & THICKNESS AVAILABILITY


The information contained in this technical publication is intended to give a general indication of the characteristics of the material.While all possible care has been taken to ensure that the information is correct, the manufacturer cannot accept any liability, nor is any liability on thepart of the manufacturer to be implied as a result of the data given. All measurements shown are in millimetres and nominal unless otherwise stated.The information contained in this publication supersedes all previous information and is subject to alteration without notice.

For more information visit www.thelaminexgroup.com.au or call 132 136.The Laminex Group’s product range is marketed, and distributed by The Laminex Group. A division of Laminex Group Pty Limited ABN 98 004 093 092.The colours of the photographs depicted in this brochure are as close to The Laminex Group’s product range as photographic lighting and modern printingprocessess allow. Colour/finish combinations are subject to availability. Colour/finishes are shown at the time of publication, but may be withdrawn. Darkcolours and gloss finishes require more care and maintenance than light-coloured and lower-gloss surfaces.The Laminex Group recommends the use ofmild household cleaning products for dark colours and gloss surfaces, please visit www.laminex.com.au for specific care and cleaning information. Pleasenote that in certain lights or from certain angles wipe down marks may be visible.The Laminex Group’s products are no different than any other materialin that darker colours will always show scratches and superficial wear and tear more readily than lighter colours. The Laminex Group’s products shouldbe protected from strong, direct sunlight as continuous exposure may cause discolouration or fading to the surface over time. Please obtain a copy of theapplicable Warranty from The Laminex Group or visit www.thelaminexgroup.com.au. All Warranties are in addition to any rights that may exist under theTrade Practices Act.

This publication is printed on paper sourced from sustainably managed forests and manufactured using acid free and elemental chlorine free pulps.The paper manufacturer has ISO 14001 Environmental Management System in use.

Laminex®, Formica®,Trade Essentials®, essa™ stone, Greenfirst™

laminex product catalogue

Documents

laminex freestyle

laminex technical data

laminex metallics

laminex decorwood

laminex aquapanel

laminex group brandportfolio

laminex group hasbranches

laminex diamondgloss